# bibtab

bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lamport:1994:LDP
author: Leslie Lamport
title: LaTeX : a Document Preparation System: User's Guide and Reference Manual
publisher: pub-AW
address: pub-AW:adr
edition: Second
pages: xvi + 272
year: 1994
ISBN: 0-201-52983-1 OR 0201529831
ISBN13: 978-0-201-52983-8 OR 9780201529838
LCCN: Z253.4.L38L35 1994
bibdate: Wed Aug 10 09:55:59 1994
bibtimestamp: 1994.08.10 09:55:59 ???
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Leslie Lamport
rawtitle: {\LaTeX}: a Document Preparation System: User's Guide and Reference Manual
bibsource:
https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/bibnet/subjects/acc-stab-num-alg.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/bibnet/subjects/han-wri-mat-sci-2ed.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/texbook3.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/texgraph.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/typeset.bib

abstract:
LaTeX is a software system for typesetting documents. Because it is especially good for technical documents and is available for almost any computer system, LaTeX has become a lingua franca of the scientific world. Researchers, educators, and students in universities, as well as scientists in industry, use LaTeX to produce professionally formatted papers, proposals, and books. They also use LaTeX input to communicate information electronically to their colleagues around the world. With the release of LaTeX $ 2_epsilon $, the new standard version, LaTeX has become even more powerful. Among its new features are an improved method for handling different styles of type, and commands for including graphics and producing colors. LaTeX $ 2_epsilon $ makes available to all LaTeX users valuable enhancements to the software that have been developed over the years by users in many different places to satisfy a variety of needs. This book, written by the original architect and implementer of LaTeX is both the user's guide and the reference manual for the software. It has been updated to reflect the changes in the new release. The book begins with instructions for formatting simpler text, and progressively describes commands and techniques for handling larger and more complicated documents. A separate chapter explains how to deal with errors. An added appendix describes what is new and different in LaTeX $ 2_epsilon $. Other additions to the second edition include descriptions of new commands for inserting pictures prepared with other programs and for producing colored output; new sections on how to make books and slides; instructions for making an index with the MakeIndex program, and an updated guide to preparing a bibliography with the BibTeX program; plus a section on how to send your LaTeX documents electronically. Users new to LaTeX will find here a book that has earned worldwide praise as a model for clear, concise, and practical documentation. Experienced users will want to update their LaTeX library. Although most standard LaTeX input files will work with LaTeX $ 2_epsilon $, to take advantage of the new features, a few LaTeX $ 2_epsilon $ conventions must first be learned. For users who want an advanced guide to LaTeX $ 2_epsilon $ and to more than 150 packages that can now be used at any site to provide additional features, a useful companion to this book is booktitle The LaTeX Companion, by Goossens, Mittelbach, and Samarin (also published by Addison-Wesley).

TOC:
Preface / xvii 1: Getting Acquainted / 1 1.1 How to Avoid Reading This Book / 2 1.2 How to Read This Book / 3 1.3 The Game of the Name / 5 1.4 Turning Typing into Typography / 5 1.5 Why LaTeX ? / 7 1.6 Turning Ideas into Input / 8 1.7 Trying It Out / 8 2: Getting Started / 11 2.1 Preparing an Input File / 12 2.2 The Input / 13 2.2.1 Sentences and Paragraphs / 13 Quotation Marks / 13 Dashes / 14 Space After a Period / 14 Special Symbols / 15 Simple Text-Generating Commands / 15 Emphasizing Text / 16 Preventing Line Breaks / 17 Footnotes / 17 Formulas / 18 Ignorable Input / 19 2.2.2 The Document / 19 The Document Class / 19 The Title ``Page'' / 20 2.2.3 Sectioning / 21 2.2.4 Displayed Material / 23 Quotations / 24 Lists / 24 Poetry / 25 Displayed Formulas / 26 2.2.5 Declarations / 27 2.3 Running LaTeX / 28 2.4 Helpful Hints / 31 2.5 Summary / 32 3: Carrying On / 35 3.1 Changing the Type Style. / 36 3.2 Symbols from Other Languages / 38 3.2.1 Accents / 38 3.2.2 Symbols / 38 3.3 Mathematical Formulas / 39 3.3.1 Some Common Structures / 40 Subscripts and Superscripts / 40 Fractions / 40 Roots / 40 Ellipsis / 40 3.3.2 Mathematical Symbols / 41 Greek Letters / 41 Calligraphic Letters / 42 A Menagerie of Mathematical Symbols / 42 Log-like Functions / 44 3.3.3 Arrays / 45 The array Environment / 45 Vertical Alignment / 46 More Complex Arrays / 46 3.3.4 Delimiters / 46 3.3.5 Multiline Formulas / 47 3.3.6 Putting One Thing Above Another / 49 Over- and Underlining. / 49 Accents / 49 Stacking Symbols / 50 3.3.7 Spacing in Math Mode / 50 3.3.8 Changing Style in Math Mode / 51 Type Style / 51 Math Style / 52 3.3.9 When All Else Fails / 52 3.4 Defining Commands and Environments / 53 3.4.1 Defining Commands / 53 3.4.2 Defining Environments / 55 3.4.3 Theorems and Such / 56 3.5 Figures and Other Floating Bodies / 58 3.5.1 Figures and Tables / 58 3.5.2 Marginal Notes / 59 3.6 Lining It Up in Columns / 60 3.6.1 The tabbing Environment / 60 3.6.2 The tabular Environment / 62 3.7 Simulating Typed Text / 63 4: Moving Information Around / 65 4.1 The Table of Contents / 66 4.2 Cross-References / 67 4.3 Bibliography and Citation / 69 4.3.1 Using BibTeX / 70 4.3.2 Doing It Yourself / 71 4.4 Splitting Your Input / 72 4.5 Making an Index or Glossary / 74 4.5.1 Compiling the Entries / 74 4.5.2 Producing an Index or Glossary by Yourself / 75 4.6 Keyboard Input and Screen Output / 76 4.7 Sending Your Document / 77 5: Other Document Classes / 79 5.1 Books / 80 5.2 Slides / 80 5.2.1 Slides and Overlays / 81 5.2.2 Notes / 83 5.2.3 Printing Only Some Slides and Notes / 83 5.2.4 Other Text / 84 5.3 Letters / 84 6: Designing It Yourself / 87 6.1 Document and Page Styles / 88 6.1.1 Document-Class Options / 88 6.1.2 Page Styles / 89 6.1.3 The Title Page and Abstract / 90 6.1.4 Customizing the Style / 91 6.2 Line and Page Breaking / 93 6.2.1 Line Breaking / 93 6.2.2 Page Breaking / 96 6.3 Numbering / 97 6.4 Length, Spaces, and Boxes / 99 6.4.1 Length / 99 6.4.2 Spaces / 101 6.4.3 Boxes / 103 LR Boxes / 104 Parboxes / 104 Rule Boxes / 106 Raising and Lowering Boxes / 107 Saving Boxes / 107 6.4.4 Formatting with Boxes / 108 6.5 Centering and ``Flushing'' / 111 6.6 List-Making Environments / 112 6.6.1 The tt list Environment / 112 6.6.2 The tt trivlist Environment / 115 6.7 Fonts / 115 6.7.1 Changing Type Size / 115 6.7.2 Special Symbols / 116 7: Pictures and Colors / 117 7.1 Pictures / 118 7.1.1 The picture Environment / 119 7.1.2 Picture Objects / 120 Text / 120 Boxes / 120 Straight Lines / 122 Arrows / 123 Stacks / 123 Circles / 124 Ovals and Rounded Corners / 124 Framing / 125 7.1.3 Curves / 125 7.1:4 Grids / 126 7.1.5 Reusing Objects / 127 7.1.6 Repeated Patterns / 127 7.1.7 Some Hints on Drawing Pictures / 128 7.2 The graphics Package / 129 7.3 Color / 131 8: Errors / 133 8.1 Finding the Error / 134 8.2 LaTeX 's Error Messages / 136 8.3 TeX 's Error Messages / 140 8.4 LaTeX Warnings / 145 8.5 TeX Warnings / 147 A: Using MakeIndex / 149 A.1 How to Use MakeIndex / 150 A.2 How to Generate Index Entries / 150 A.2.1 When, Why, What, and How to Index / 150 A.2.2 The Basics / 151 A.2.3 The Fine Print / 153 A.3 Error Messages / 154 B: The Bibliography Database / 155 B.1 The Format of the bib File / 156 B.1.1 The Entry Format / 156 B.1.2 The Text of a Field / 157 Names / 157 Titles / 158 B.1.3 Abbreviations / 158 B.1.4 Cross-References / 159 B.2 The Entries / 160 B.2.1 Entry Types / 160 B.2.2 Fields / 162 C: Reference Manual / 165 C.1 Commands and Environments / 166 C.1.1 Command Names and Arguments / 166 C.1.2 Environments / 167 C.1.3 Fragile Commands / 167 C.1.4 Declarations / 168 C.1.5 Invisible Commands and Environments / 169 C.1.6 The Command / 169 C.2 The Structure of the Document / 170 C.3 Sentences and Paragraphs / 170 C.3.1 Making Sentences / 170 C.3.2 Making Paragraphs / 171 C.3.3 Footnotes / 172 C.3.4 Accents and Special Symbols / 173 C.4 Sectioning and Table of Contents / 174 C.4.1 Sectioning Commands / 174 C.4.2 The Appendix / 175 C.4.3 Table of Contents / 175 C.4.4 Style Parameters / 176 C.5 Classes, Packages, and Page Styles / 176 C.5.1 Document Class / 176 C.5.2 Packages / 178 C.5.3 Page Styles / 179 C.5.4 The Title Page and Abstract / 181 C.6 Displayed Paragraphs / 183 C.6.1 Quotations and Verse / 184 C.6.2 List-Making Environments / 184 C.6.3 The list and trivlist Environments / 185 C.6.4 Verbatim / 186 C.7 Mathematical Formulas / 187 C.7.1 Math Mode Environments / 187 C.7.2 Common Structures / 189 C.7.3 Mathematical Symbols / 189 C.7.4 Arrays / 190 C.7.5 Delimiters / 190 C.7.6 Putting One Thing Above Another / 190 C.7.7 Spacing / 191 C.7.8 Changing Style / 191 C.8 Definitions, Numbering, and Programming. / 192 C.8.1 Defining Commands / 192 C.8.2 Defining Environments / 192 C.8.3 Theorem-like Environments / 193 C.8.4 Numbering / 194 C.8.5 The ifthen Package / 195 C.9 Figures and Other Floating Bodies / 197 C.9.1 Figures and Tables / 197 C.9.2 Marginal Notes / 200 C.10 Lining It Up in Columns / 201 C.10.1 The tabbing Environment / 201 C.10.2 The array and tabular Environments / 204 C.11 Moving Information Around / 207 C.11.1 Files / 207 C.11.2 Cross-References / 209 C.11.3 Bibliography and Citation / 209 C.11.4 Splitting the Input / 210 C.11.5 Index and Glossary / 211 Producing an Index / 211 Compiling the Entries / 212 C.11.6 Terminal Input and Output / 212 C.12 Line and Page Breaking / 213 C.12.1 Line Breaking / 213 C.12.2 Page Breaking / 214 C.13 Lengths, Spaces, and Boxes / 215 C.13.1 Length / 215 C.13.2 Space / 216 C.13.3 Boxes / 217 C.14 Pictures and Color / 219 C.14.1 The picture Environment / 219 Picture-Mode Commands / 220 Picture Objects / 221 Picture Declarations / 223 C.14.2 The graphics Package. / 223 C.14.3 The color Package / 224 C.15 Font Selection / 225 C.15.1 Changing the Type Style / 225 C.15.2 Changing the Type Size / 226 C.15.3 Special Symbols / 226 D: What's New / 227 E: Using Plain TEX Commands / 231 Bibliography / 235 Index / 237

rawabstract:
\LaTeX{} is a software system for typesetting documents. Because it is especially good for technical documents and is available for almost any computer system, \LaTeX{} has become a lingua franca of the scientific world. Researchers, educators, and students in universities, as well as scientists in industry, use \LaTeX{} to produce professionally formatted papers, proposals, and books. They also use \LaTeX{} input to communicate information electronically to their colleagues around the world. With the release of \LaTeX{} $ 2_\epsilon $, the new standard version, \LaTeX{} has become even more powerful. Among its new features are an improved method for handling different styles of type, and commands for including graphics and producing colors. \LaTeX{} $ 2_\epsilon $ makes available to all \LaTeX{} users valuable enhancements to the software that have been developed over the years by users in many different places to satisfy a variety of needs. This book, written by the original architect and implementer of \LaTeX{} is both the user's guide and the reference manual for the software. It has been updated to reflect the changes in the new release. The book begins with instructions for formatting simpler text, and progressively describes commands and techniques for handling larger and more complicated documents. A separate chapter explains how to deal with errors. An added appendix describes what is new and different in \LaTeX{} $ 2_\epsilon $. Other additions to the second edition include descriptions of new commands for inserting pictures prepared with other programs and for producing colored output; new sections on how to make books and slides; instructions for making an index with the MakeIndex program, and an updated guide to preparing a bibliography with the BibTeX program; plus a section on how to send your \LaTeX{} documents electronically. Users new to \LaTeX{} will find here a book that has earned worldwide praise as a model for clear, concise, and practical documentation. Experienced users will want to update their \LaTeX{} library. Although most standard \LaTeX{} input files will work with \LaTeX{} $ 2_\epsilon $, to take advantage of the new features, a few \LaTeX{} $ 2_\epsilon $ conventions must first be learned. For users who want an advanced guide to \LaTeX{} $ 2_\epsilon $ and to more than 150 packages that can now be used at any site to provide additional features, a useful companion to this book is \booktitle{The \LaTeX{} Companion}, by Goossens, Mittelbach, and Samarin (also published by Addison-Wesley).

shortTOC:
Preface / xvii 1: Getting Acquainted / 1 2: Getting Started / 11 3: Carrying On / 35 4: Moving Information Around / 65 5: Other Document Classes / 79 6: Designing It Yourself / 87 7: Pictures and Colors / 117 8: Errors / 133 A: Using MakeIndex / 149 B: The Bibliography Database / 155 C: Reference Manual / 165 D: What's New / 227 E: Using Plain TEX Commands / 231 Bibliography / 235 Index / 237

rawshortTOC:
Preface / xvii \\ 1: Getting Acquainted / 1 \\ 2: Getting Started / 11 \\ 3: Carrying On / 35 \\ 4: Moving Information Around / 65 \\ 5: Other Document Classes / 79 \\ 6: Designing It Yourself / 87 \\ 7: Pictures and Colors / 117 \\ 8: Errors / 133 \\ A: Using MakeIndex / 149 \\ B: The Bibliography Database / 155 \\ C: Reference Manual / 165 \\ D: What's New / 227 \\ E: Using Plain TEX Commands / 231 \\ Bibliography / 235 \\ Index / 237

rawTOC:
Preface / xvii \\ 1: Getting Acquainted / 1 \\ 1.1 How to Avoid Reading This Book / 2 \\ 1.2 How to Read This Book / 3 \\ 1.3 The Game of the Name / 5 \\ 1.4 Turning Typing into Typography / 5 \\ 1.5 Why \LaTeX{}? / 7 \\ 1.6 Turning Ideas into Input / 8 \\ 1.7 Trying It Out / 8 \\ 2: Getting Started / 11 \\ 2.1 Preparing an Input File / 12 \\ 2.2 The Input / 13 \\ 2.2.1 Sentences and Paragraphs / 13 \\ Quotation Marks / 13 \\ Dashes / 14 \\ Space After a Period / 14 \\ Special Symbols / 15 \\ Simple Text-Generating Commands / 15 \\ Emphasizing Text / 16 \\ Preventing Line Breaks / 17 \\ Footnotes / 17 \\ Formulas / 18 \\ Ignorable Input / 19 \\ 2.2.2 The Document / 19 \\ The Document Class / 19 \\ The Title ``Page'' / 20 \\ 2.2.3 Sectioning / 21 \\ 2.2.4 Displayed Material / 23 \\ Quotations / 24 \\ Lists / 24 \\ Poetry / 25 \\ Displayed Formulas / 26 \\ 2.2.5 Declarations / 27 \\ 2.3 Running \LaTeX{} / 28 \\ 2.4 Helpful Hints / 31 \\ 2.5 Summary / 32 \\ 3: Carrying On / 35 \\ 3.1 Changing the Type Style. / 36 \\ 3.2 Symbols from Other Languages / 38 \\ 3.2.1 Accents / 38 \\ 3.2.2 Symbols / 38 \\ 3.3 Mathematical Formulas / 39 \\ 3.3.1 Some Common Structures / 40 \\ Subscripts and Superscripts / 40 \\ Fractions / 40 \\ Roots / 40 \\ Ellipsis / 40 \\ 3.3.2 Mathematical Symbols / 41 \\ Greek Letters / 41 \\ Calligraphic Letters / 42 \\ A Menagerie of Mathematical Symbols / 42 \\ Log-like Functions / 44 \\ 3.3.3 Arrays / 45 \\ The array Environment / 45 \\ Vertical Alignment / 46 \\ More Complex Arrays / 46 \\ 3.3.4 Delimiters / 46 \\ 3.3.5 Multiline Formulas / 47 \\ 3.3.6 Putting One Thing Above Another / 49 \\ Over- and Underlining. / 49 \\ Accents / 49 \\ Stacking Symbols / 50 \\ 3.3.7 Spacing in Math Mode / 50 \\ 3.3.8 Changing Style in Math Mode / 51 \\ Type Style / 51 \\ Math Style / 52 \\ 3.3.9 When All Else Fails / 52 \\ 3.4 Defining Commands and Environments / 53 \\ 3.4.1 Defining Commands / 53 \\ 3.4.2 Defining Environments / 55 \\ 3.4.3 Theorems and Such / 56 \\ 3.5 Figures and Other Floating Bodies / 58 \\ 3.5.1 Figures and Tables / 58 \\ 3.5.2 Marginal Notes / 59 \\ 3.6 Lining It Up in Columns / 60 \\ 3.6.1 The tabbing Environment / 60 \\ 3.6.2 The tabular Environment / 62 \\ 3.7 Simulating Typed Text / 63 \\ 4: Moving Information Around / 65 \\ 4.1 The Table of Contents / 66 \\ 4.2 Cross-References / 67 \\ 4.3 Bibliography and Citation / 69 \\ 4.3.1 Using \BibTeX{} / 70 \\ 4.3.2 Doing It Yourself / 71 \\ 4.4 Splitting Your Input / 72 \\ 4.5 Making an Index or Glossary / 74 \\ 4.5.1 Compiling the Entries / 74 \\ 4.5.2 Producing an Index or Glossary by Yourself / 75 \\ 4.6 Keyboard Input and Screen Output / 76 \\ 4.7 Sending Your Document / 77 \\ 5: Other Document Classes / 79 \\ 5.1 Books / 80 \\ 5.2 Slides / 80 \\ 5.2.1 Slides and Overlays / 81 \\ 5.2.2 Notes / 83 \\ 5.2.3 Printing Only Some Slides and Notes / 83 \\ 5.2.4 Other Text / 84 \\ 5.3 Letters / 84 \\ 6: Designing It Yourself / 87 \\ 6.1 Document and Page Styles / 88 \\ 6.1.1 Document-Class Options / 88 \\ 6.1.2 Page Styles / 89 \\ 6.1.3 The Title Page and Abstract / 90 \\ 6.1.4 Customizing the Style / 91 \\ 6.2 Line and Page Breaking / 93 \\ 6.2.1 Line Breaking / 93 \\ 6.2.2 Page Breaking / 96 \\ 6.3 Numbering / 97 \\ 6.4 Length, Spaces, and Boxes / 99 \\ 6.4.1 Length / 99 \\ 6.4.2 Spaces / 101 \\ 6.4.3 Boxes / 103 \\ LR Boxes / 104 \\ Parboxes / 104 \\ Rule Boxes / 106 \\ Raising and Lowering Boxes / 107 \\ Saving Boxes / 107 \\ 6.4.4 Formatting with Boxes / 108 \\ 6.5 Centering and ``Flushing'' / 111 \\ 6.6 List-Making Environments / 112 \\ 6.6.1 The {\tt list} Environment / 112 \\ 6.6.2 The {\tt trivlist} Environment / 115 \\ 6.7 Fonts / 115 \\ 6.7.1 Changing Type Size / 115 \\ 6.7.2 Special Symbols / 116 \\ 7: Pictures and Colors / 117 \\ 7.1 Pictures / 118 \\ 7.1.1 The picture Environment / 119 \\ 7.1.2 Picture Objects / 120 \\ Text / 120 \\ Boxes / 120 \\ Straight Lines / 122 \\ Arrows / 123 \\ Stacks / 123 \\ Circles / 124 \\ Ovals and Rounded Corners / 124 \\ Framing / 125 \\ 7.1.3 Curves / 125 \\ 7.1:4 Grids / 126 \\ 7.1.5 Reusing Objects / 127 \\ 7.1.6 Repeated Patterns / 127 \\ 7.1.7 Some Hints on Drawing Pictures / 128 \\ 7.2 The graphics Package / 129 \\ 7.3 Color / 131 \\ 8: Errors / 133 \\ 8.1 Finding the Error / 134 \\ 8.2 \LaTeX{}'s Error Messages / 136 \\ 8.3 \TeX{}'s Error Messages / 140 \\ 8.4 \LaTeX{} Warnings / 145 \\ 8.5 \TeX{} Warnings / 147 \\ A: Using MakeIndex / 149 \\ A.1 How to Use MakeIndex / 150 \\ A.2 How to Generate Index Entries / 150 \\ A.2.1 When, Why, What, and How to Index / 150 \\ A.2.2 The Basics / 151 \\ A.2.3 The Fine Print / 153 \\ A.3 Error Messages / 154 \\ B: The Bibliography Database / 155 \\ B.1 The Format of the bib File / 156 \\ B.1.1 The Entry Format / 156 \\ B.1.2 The Text of a Field / 157 \\ Names / 157 \\ Titles / 158 \\ B.1.3 Abbreviations / 158 \\ B.1.4 Cross-References / 159 \\ B.2 The Entries / 160 \\ B.2.1 Entry Types / 160 \\ B.2.2 Fields / 162 \\ C: Reference Manual / 165 \\ C.1 Commands and Environments / 166 \\ C.1.1 Command Names and Arguments / 166 \\ C.1.2 Environments / 167 \\ C.1.3 Fragile Commands / 167 \\ C.1.4 Declarations / 168 \\ C.1.5 Invisible Commands and Environments / 169 \\ C.1.6 The\\ Command / 169 \\ C.2 The Structure of the Document / 170 \\ C.3 Sentences and Paragraphs / 170 \\ C.3.1 Making Sentences / 170 \\ C.3.2 Making Paragraphs / 171 \\ C.3.3 Footnotes / 172 \\ C.3.4 Accents and Special Symbols / 173 \\ C.4 Sectioning and Table of Contents / 174 \\ C.4.1 Sectioning Commands / 174 \\ C.4.2 The Appendix / 175 \\ C.4.3 Table of Contents / 175 \\ C.4.4 Style Parameters / 176 \\ C.5 Classes, Packages, and Page Styles / 176 \\ C.5.1 Document Class / 176 \\ C.5.2 Packages / 178 \\ C.5.3 Page Styles / 179 \\ C.5.4 The Title Page and Abstract / 181 \\ C.6 Displayed Paragraphs / 183 \\ C.6.1 Quotations and Verse / 184 \\ C.6.2 List-Making Environments / 184 \\ C.6.3 The list and trivlist Environments / 185 \\ C.6.4 Verbatim / 186 \\ C.7 Mathematical Formulas / 187 \\ C.7.1 Math Mode Environments / 187 \\ C.7.2 Common Structures / 189 \\ C.7.3 Mathematical Symbols / 189 \\ C.7.4 Arrays / 190 \\ C.7.5 Delimiters / 190 \\ C.7.6 Putting One Thing Above Another / 190 \\ C.7.7 Spacing / 191 \\ C.7.8 Changing Style / 191 \\ C.8 Definitions, Numbering, and Programming. / 192 \\ C.8.1 Defining Commands / 192 \\ C.8.2 Defining Environments / 192 \\ C.8.3 Theorem-like Environments / 193 \\ C.8.4 Numbering / 194 \\ C.8.5 The ifthen Package / 195 \\ C.9 Figures and Other Floating Bodies / 197 \\ C.9.1 Figures and Tables / 197 \\ C.9.2 Marginal Notes / 200 \\ C.10 Lining It Up in Columns / 201 \\ C.10.1 The tabbing Environment / 201 \\ C.10.2 The array and tabular Environments / 204 \\ C.11 Moving Information Around / 207 \\ C.11.1 Files / 207 \\ C.11.2 Cross-References / 209 \\ C.11.3 Bibliography and Citation / 209 \\ C.11.4 Splitting the Input / 210 \\ C.11.5 Index and Glossary / 211 \\ Producing an Index / 211 \\ Compiling the Entries / 212 \\ C.11.6 Terminal Input and Output / 212 \\ C.12 Line and Page Breaking / 213 \\ C.12.1 Line Breaking / 213 \\ C.12.2 Page Breaking / 214 \\ C.13 Lengths, Spaces, and Boxes / 215 \\ C.13.1 Length / 215 \\ C.13.2 Space / 216 \\ C.13.3 Boxes / 217 \\ C.14 Pictures and Color / 219 \\ C.14.1 The picture Environment / 219 \\ Picture-Mode Commands / 220 \\ Picture Objects / 221 \\ Picture Declarations / 223 \\ C.14.2 The graphics Package. / 223 \\ C.14.3 The color Package / 224 \\ C.15 Font Selection / 225 \\ C.15.1 Changing the Type Style / 225 \\ C.15.2 Changing the Type Size / 226 \\ C.15.3 Special Symbols / 226 \\ D: What's New / 227 \\ E: Using Plain TEX Commands / 231 \\ Bibliography / 235 \\ Index / 237

entry:
@Book{Lamport:1994:LDP,
  author =       "Leslie Lamport",
  title =        "{\LaTeX}: a Document Preparation System: User's Guide
                 and Reference Manual",
  publisher =    pub-AW,
  address =      pub-AW:adr,
  edition =      "Second",
  pages =        "xvi + 272",
  year =         "1994",
  ISBN =         "0-201-52983-1",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-201-52983-8",
  LCCN =         "Z253.4.L38L35 1994",
  bibdate =      "Wed Aug 10 09:55:59 1994",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/bibnet/subjects/acc-stab-num-alg.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/bibnet/subjects/han-wri-mat-sci-2ed.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/texbook3.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/texgraph.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/typeset.bib",
  abstract =     "\LaTeX{} is a software system for typesetting
                 documents. Because it is especially good for technical
                 documents and is available for almost any computer
                 system, \LaTeX{} has become a lingua franca of the
                 scientific world. Researchers, educators, and students
                 in universities, as well as scientists in industry, use
                 \LaTeX{} to produce professionally formatted papers,
                 proposals, and books. They also use \LaTeX{} input to
                 communicate information electronically to their
                 colleagues around the world. With the release of
                 \LaTeX{} $ 2_\epsilon $, the new standard version,
                 \LaTeX{} has become even more powerful. Among its new
                 features are an improved method for handling different
                 styles of type, and commands for including graphics and
                 producing colors. \LaTeX{} $ 2_\epsilon $ makes
                 available to all \LaTeX{} users valuable enhancements
                 to the software that have been developed over the years
                 by users in many different places to satisfy a variety
                 of needs. This book, written by the original architect
                 and implementer of \LaTeX{} is both the user's guide
                 and the reference manual for the software. It has been
                 updated to reflect the changes in the new release. The
                 book begins with instructions for formatting simpler
                 text, and progressively describes commands and
                 techniques for handling larger and more complicated
                 documents. A separate chapter explains how to deal with
                 errors. An added appendix describes what is new and
                 different in \LaTeX{} $ 2_\epsilon $. Other additions
                 to the second edition include descriptions of new
                 commands for inserting pictures prepared with other
                 programs and for producing colored output; new sections
                 on how to make books and slides; instructions for
                 making an index with the MakeIndex program, and an
                 updated guide to preparing a bibliography with the
                 BibTeX program; plus a section on how to send your
                 \LaTeX{} documents electronically. Users new to
                 \LaTeX{} will find here a book that has earned
                 worldwide praise as a model for clear, concise, and
                 practical documentation. Experienced users will want to
                 update their \LaTeX{} library. Although most standard
                 \LaTeX{} input files will work with \LaTeX{} $
                 2_\epsilon $, to take advantage of the new features, a
                 few \LaTeX{} $ 2_\epsilon $ conventions must first be
                 learned. For users who want an advanced guide to
                 \LaTeX{} $ 2_\epsilon $ and to more than 150 packages
                 that can now be used at any site to provide additional
                 features, a useful companion to this book is
                 \booktitle{The \LaTeX{} Companion}, by Goossens,
                 Mittelbach, and Samarin (also published by
                 Addison-Wesley).",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  listoffigures = "6.1 Boxes and how \TeX{} puts them together / 103 \\
                 6.2 The complete definition of the \verb=\face= command
                 / 110 \\
                 6.3 The format of a list / 113 \\
                 7.1 Points and their coordinates / 119 \\
                 7.2 \verb=\put (1.4,2.6){\line(3,-1){4.8}}= / 122 \\
                 C.1 Making footnotes without the \verb=\footnote=
                 command / 173 \\
                 C.2 Sectioning and table of contents commands / 174 \\
                 C.3 Page style parameters / 182 \\
                 C.4 An example title / 183 \\
                 C.5 Writing programs with the \verb=ifthen= package's
                 commands / 196 \\
                 C.6 A \verb=tabbing= environment example / 202 \\
                 C.7 Examples of the \verb=tabular= and \verb=tabular*=
                 environments / 204 \\
                 C.8 A sample \verb=picture= environment / 220",
  listoftables = "3.1 Accents / 38 \\
                 3.2 Non-English Symbols / 39 \\
                 3.3 Greek Letters / 41 \\
                 3.4 Binary Operation Symbols / 42 \\
                 3.5 Relation Symbols / 43 \\
                 3.6 Arrow Symbols / 43 \\
                 3.7 Miscellaneous Symbols / 43 \\
                 3.8 Variable-sized Symbols / 44 \\
                 3.9 Log-like Functions / 44 \\
                 3.10 Delimiters / 47 \\
                 3.11 Math Mode Accents / 50",
  shorttableofcontents = "Preface / xvii \\
                 1: Getting Acquainted / 1 \\
                 2: Getting Started / 11 \\
                 3: Carrying On / 35 \\
                 4: Moving Information Around / 65 \\
                 5: Other Document Classes / 79 \\
                 6: Designing It Yourself / 87 \\
                 7: Pictures and Colors / 117 \\
                 8: Errors / 133 \\
                 A: Using MakeIndex / 149 \\
                 B: The Bibliography Database / 155 \\
                 C: Reference Manual / 165 \\
                 D: What's New / 227 \\
                 E: Using Plain TEX Commands / 231 \\
                 Bibliography / 235 \\
                 Index / 237",
  tableofcontents = "Preface / xvii \\
                 1: Getting Acquainted / 1 \\
                 1.1 How to Avoid Reading This Book / 2 \\
                 1.2 How to Read This Book / 3 \\
                 1.3 The Game of the Name / 5 \\
                 1.4 Turning Typing into Typography / 5 \\
                 1.5 Why \LaTeX{}? / 7 \\
                 1.6 Turning Ideas into Input / 8 \\
                 1.7 Trying It Out / 8 \\
                 2: Getting Started / 11 \\
                 2.1 Preparing an Input File / 12 \\
                 2.2 The Input / 13 \\
                 2.2.1 Sentences and Paragraphs / 13 \\
                 Quotation Marks / 13 \\
                 Dashes / 14 \\
                 Space After a Period / 14 \\
                 Special Symbols / 15 \\
                 Simple Text-Generating Commands / 15 \\
                 Emphasizing Text / 16 \\
                 Preventing Line Breaks / 17 \\
                 Footnotes / 17 \\
                 Formulas / 18 \\
                 Ignorable Input / 19 \\
                 2.2.2 The Document / 19 \\
                 The Document Class / 19 \\
                 The Title ``Page'' / 20 \\
                 2.2.3 Sectioning / 21 \\
                 2.2.4 Displayed Material / 23 \\
                 Quotations / 24 \\
                 Lists / 24 \\
                 Poetry / 25 \\
                 Displayed Formulas / 26 \\
                 2.2.5 Declarations / 27 \\
                 2.3 Running \LaTeX{} / 28 \\
                 2.4 Helpful Hints / 31 \\
                 2.5 Summary / 32 \\
                 3: Carrying On / 35 \\
                 3.1 Changing the Type Style. / 36 \\
                 3.2 Symbols from Other Languages / 38 \\
                 3.2.1 Accents / 38 \\
                 3.2.2 Symbols / 38 \\
                 3.3 Mathematical Formulas / 39 \\
                 3.3.1 Some Common Structures / 40 \\
                 Subscripts and Superscripts / 40 \\
                 Fractions / 40 \\
                 Roots / 40 \\
                 Ellipsis / 40 \\
                 3.3.2 Mathematical Symbols / 41 \\
                 Greek Letters / 41 \\
                 Calligraphic Letters / 42 \\
                 A Menagerie of Mathematical Symbols / 42 \\
                 Log-like Functions / 44 \\
                 3.3.3 Arrays / 45 \\
                 The array Environment / 45 \\
                 Vertical Alignment / 46 \\
                 More Complex Arrays / 46 \\
                 3.3.4 Delimiters / 46 \\
                 3.3.5 Multiline Formulas / 47 \\
                 3.3.6 Putting One Thing Above Another / 49 \\
                 Over- and Underlining. / 49 \\
                 Accents / 49 \\
                 Stacking Symbols / 50 \\
                 3.3.7 Spacing in Math Mode / 50 \\
                 3.3.8 Changing Style in Math Mode / 51 \\
                 Type Style / 51 \\
                 Math Style / 52 \\
                 3.3.9 When All Else Fails / 52 \\
                 3.4 Defining Commands and Environments / 53 \\
                 3.4.1 Defining Commands / 53 \\
                 3.4.2 Defining Environments / 55 \\
                 3.4.3 Theorems and Such / 56 \\
                 3.5 Figures and Other Floating Bodies / 58 \\
                 3.5.1 Figures and Tables / 58 \\
                 3.5.2 Marginal Notes / 59 \\
                 3.6 Lining It Up in Columns / 60 \\
                 3.6.1 The tabbing Environment / 60 \\
                 3.6.2 The tabular Environment / 62 \\
                 3.7 Simulating Typed Text / 63 \\
                 4: Moving Information Around / 65 \\
                 4.1 The Table of Contents / 66 \\
                 4.2 Cross-References / 67 \\
                 4.3 Bibliography and Citation / 69 \\
                 4.3.1 Using \BibTeX{} / 70 \\
                 4.3.2 Doing It Yourself / 71 \\
                 4.4 Splitting Your Input / 72 \\
                 4.5 Making an Index or Glossary / 74 \\
                 4.5.1 Compiling the Entries / 74 \\
                 4.5.2 Producing an Index or Glossary by Yourself / 75
                 \\
                 4.6 Keyboard Input and Screen Output / 76 \\
                 4.7 Sending Your Document / 77 \\
                 5: Other Document Classes / 79 \\
                 5.1 Books / 80 \\
                 5.2 Slides / 80 \\
                 5.2.1 Slides and Overlays / 81 \\
                 5.2.2 Notes / 83 \\
                 5.2.3 Printing Only Some Slides and Notes / 83 \\
                 5.2.4 Other Text / 84 \\
                 5.3 Letters / 84 \\
                 6: Designing It Yourself / 87 \\
                 6.1 Document and Page Styles / 88 \\
                 6.1.1 Document-Class Options / 88 \\
                 6.1.2 Page Styles / 89 \\
                 6.1.3 The Title Page and Abstract / 90 \\
                 6.1.4 Customizing the Style / 91 \\
                 6.2 Line and Page Breaking / 93 \\
                 6.2.1 Line Breaking / 93 \\
                 6.2.2 Page Breaking / 96 \\
                 6.3 Numbering / 97 \\
                 6.4 Length, Spaces, and Boxes / 99 \\
                 6.4.1 Length / 99 \\
                 6.4.2 Spaces / 101 \\
                 6.4.3 Boxes / 103 \\
                 LR Boxes / 104 \\
                 Parboxes / 104 \\
                 Rule Boxes / 106 \\
                 Raising and Lowering Boxes / 107 \\
                 Saving Boxes / 107 \\
                 6.4.4 Formatting with Boxes / 108 \\
                 6.5 Centering and ``Flushing'' / 111 \\
                 6.6 List-Making Environments / 112 \\
                 6.6.1 The {\tt list} Environment / 112 \\
                 6.6.2 The {\tt trivlist} Environment / 115 \\
                 6.7 Fonts / 115 \\
                 6.7.1 Changing Type Size / 115 \\
                 6.7.2 Special Symbols / 116 \\
                 7: Pictures and Colors / 117 \\
                 7.1 Pictures / 118 \\
                 7.1.1 The picture Environment / 119 \\
                 7.1.2 Picture Objects / 120 \\
                 Text / 120 \\
                 Boxes / 120 \\
                 Straight Lines / 122 \\
                 Arrows / 123 \\
                 Stacks / 123 \\
                 Circles / 124 \\
                 Ovals and Rounded Corners / 124 \\
                 Framing / 125 \\
                 7.1.3 Curves / 125 \\
                 7.1:4 Grids / 126 \\
                 7.1.5 Reusing Objects / 127 \\
                 7.1.6 Repeated Patterns / 127 \\
                 7.1.7 Some Hints on Drawing Pictures / 128 \\
                 7.2 The graphics Package / 129 \\
                 7.3 Color / 131 \\
                 8: Errors / 133 \\
                 8.1 Finding the Error / 134 \\
                 8.2 \LaTeX{}'s Error Messages / 136 \\
                 8.3 \TeX{}'s Error Messages / 140 \\
                 8.4 \LaTeX{} Warnings / 145 \\
                 8.5 \TeX{} Warnings / 147 \\
                 A: Using MakeIndex / 149 \\
                 A.1 How to Use MakeIndex / 150 \\
                 A.2 How to Generate Index Entries / 150 \\
                 A.2.1 When, Why, What, and How to Index / 150 \\
                 A.2.2 The Basics / 151 \\
                 A.2.3 The Fine Print / 153 \\
                 A.3 Error Messages / 154 \\
                 B: The Bibliography Database / 155 \\
                 B.1 The Format of the bib File / 156 \\
                 B.1.1 The Entry Format / 156 \\
                 B.1.2 The Text of a Field / 157 \\
                 Names / 157 \\
                 Titles / 158 \\
                 B.1.3 Abbreviations / 158 \\
                 B.1.4 Cross-References / 159 \\
                 B.2 The Entries / 160 \\
                 B.2.1 Entry Types / 160 \\
                 B.2.2 Fields / 162 \\
                 C: Reference Manual / 165 \\
                 C.1 Commands and Environments / 166 \\
                 C.1.1 Command Names and Arguments / 166 \\
                 C.1.2 Environments / 167 \\
                 C.1.3 Fragile Commands / 167 \\
                 C.1.4 Declarations / 168 \\
                 C.1.5 Invisible Commands and Environments / 169 \\
                 C.1.6 The\\ Command / 169 \\
                 C.2 The Structure of the Document / 170 \\
                 C.3 Sentences and Paragraphs / 170 \\
                 C.3.1 Making Sentences / 170 \\
                 C.3.2 Making Paragraphs / 171 \\
                 C.3.3 Footnotes / 172 \\
                 C.3.4 Accents and Special Symbols / 173 \\
                 C.4 Sectioning and Table of Contents / 174 \\
                 C.4.1 Sectioning Commands / 174 \\
                 C.4.2 The Appendix / 175 \\
                 C.4.3 Table of Contents / 175 \\
                 C.4.4 Style Parameters / 176 \\
                 C.5 Classes, Packages, and Page Styles / 176 \\
                 C.5.1 Document Class / 176 \\
                 C.5.2 Packages / 178 \\
                 C.5.3 Page Styles / 179 \\
                 C.5.4 The Title Page and Abstract / 181 \\
                 C.6 Displayed Paragraphs / 183 \\
                 C.6.1 Quotations and Verse / 184 \\
                 C.6.2 List-Making Environments / 184 \\
                 C.6.3 The list and trivlist Environments / 185 \\
                 C.6.4 Verbatim / 186 \\
                 C.7 Mathematical Formulas / 187 \\
                 C.7.1 Math Mode Environments / 187 \\
                 C.7.2 Common Structures / 189 \\
                 C.7.3 Mathematical Symbols / 189 \\
                 C.7.4 Arrays / 190 \\
                 C.7.5 Delimiters / 190 \\
                 C.7.6 Putting One Thing Above Another / 190 \\
                 C.7.7 Spacing / 191 \\
                 C.7.8 Changing Style / 191 \\
                 C.8 Definitions, Numbering, and Programming. / 192 \\
                 C.8.1 Defining Commands / 192 \\
                 C.8.2 Defining Environments / 192 \\
                 C.8.3 Theorem-like Environments / 193 \\
                 C.8.4 Numbering / 194 \\
                 C.8.5 The ifthen Package / 195 \\
                 C.9 Figures and Other Floating Bodies / 197 \\
                 C.9.1 Figures and Tables / 197 \\
                 C.9.2 Marginal Notes / 200 \\
                 C.10 Lining It Up in Columns / 201 \\
                 C.10.1 The tabbing Environment / 201 \\
                 C.10.2 The array and tabular Environments / 204 \\
                 C.11 Moving Information Around / 207 \\
                 C.11.1 Files / 207 \\
                 C.11.2 Cross-References / 209 \\
                 C.11.3 Bibliography and Citation / 209 \\
                 C.11.4 Splitting the Input / 210 \\
                 C.11.5 Index and Glossary / 211 \\
                 Producing an Index / 211 \\
                 Compiling the Entries / 212 \\
                 C.11.6 Terminal Input and Output / 212 \\
                 C.12 Line and Page Breaking / 213 \\
                 C.12.1 Line Breaking / 213 \\
                 C.12.2 Page Breaking / 214 \\
                 C.13 Lengths, Spaces, and Boxes / 215 \\
                 C.13.1 Length / 215 \\
                 C.13.2 Space / 216 \\
                 C.13.3 Boxes / 217 \\
                 C.14 Pictures and Color / 219 \\
                 C.14.1 The picture Environment / 219 \\
                 Picture-Mode Commands / 220 \\
                 Picture Objects / 221 \\
                 Picture Declarations / 223 \\
                 C.14.2 The graphics Package. / 223 \\
                 C.14.3 The color Package / 224 \\
                 C.15 Font Selection / 225 \\
                 C.15.1 Changing the Type Style / 225 \\
                 C.15.2 Changing the Type Size / 226 \\
                 C.15.3 Special Symbols / 226 \\
                 D: What's New / 227 \\
                 E: Using Plain TEX Commands / 231 \\
                 Bibliography / 235 \\
                 Index / 237",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lancaster:2014:QFT
author: Tom Lancaster and Stephen Blundell
title: Quantum Field Theory for the Gifted Amateur
publisher: pub-OXFORD
address: pub-OXFORD:adr
pages: xvii + 485
year: 2014
LCCN: QC174.45 .L36 2014
bibdate: Fri Oct 3 15:00:54 MDT 2014
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager
bibtimestamp: 2014.10.03 15:00:54 MDT
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Tom Lancaster and Stephen Blundell
rawtitle: Quantum Field Theory for the Gifted Amateur
ISBN:
0-19-969933-X (paperback), 0-19-969932-1 (hardcover) OR 019969933X (paperback), 0199699321 (hardcover)

ISBN13:
978-0-19-969933-9 (paperback), 978-0-19-969932-2 (hardcover) OR 9780199699339 (paperback), 9780199699322 (hardcover)

abstract:
Quantum field theory is arguably the most far-reaching and beautiful physical theory ever constructed, with aspects more stringently tested and verified to greater precision than any other theory in physics. Unfortunately, the subject has gained a notorious reputation for difficulty, with forbidding looking mathematics and a peculiar diagrammatic language described in an array of unforgiving, weighty textbooks aimed firmly at aspiring professionals. However, quantum field theory is too important, too beautiful, and too engaging to be restricted to the professionals. This book on quantum field theory is designed to be different. It is written by experimental physicists and aims to provide the interested amateur with a bridge from undergraduate physics to quantum field theory. The imagined reader is a gifted amateur, possessing a curious and adaptable mind, looking to be told an entertaining and intellectually stimulating story, but who will not feel patronised if a few mathematical niceties are spelled out in detail. Using numerous worked examples, diagrams, and careful physically motivated explanations, this book will smooth the path towards understanding the radically different and revolutionary view of the physical world that quantum field theory provides, and which all physicists should have the opportunity to experience.

subject:
Quantum field theory; Amateurs' manuals; Problems, exercises, etc; Quantum field theory; Quantenfeldtheorie

TOC:
Overture I: The Universe as a Set of Harmonic Oscillators 1. Lagrangians 2. Simple harmonic oscillators 3. Occupation number representation 4. Making second quantization work II: Writing Down Lagrangians 5. Continuous systems 6. A first stab at relativistic quantum mechanics 7. Examples of Lagrangians, or how to write down a theory III: The Need for Quantum Fields 8. The passage of time 9. Quantum mechanical transformations 10. Symmetry 11. Canonical quantization of fields 12. Examples of canonical quantization 13. Fields with many components and massive electromagnetism 14. Gauge fields and gauge theory 15. Discrete transformations IV: Propagators and Perturbations 16. Ways of doing quantum mechanics: propagators and Green's functions 17. Propagators and Fields 18. The S-matrix 19. Expanding the S-matrix: Feynman diagrams 20. Scattering theory V: Interlude: Wisdom from Statistical Physics 21. Statistical physics: a crash course 22. The generating functional for fields VI: PATH INTEGRALS 23. Path Integrals: I said to him, ``You're crazy'' 24. Field Integrals 25. Statistical field theory 26. Broken symmetry 27. Coherent states 28. Grassmann numbers: coherent states and the path integral for fermions VII: Topological Ideas 29. Topological objects 30. Topological field theory VIII: Renormalization: Taming the Infinite 31. Renormalization, quasiparticles and the Fermi surface 32. Renormalization: the problem and its solution 33. Renormalization in action: propagators and Feynman diagrams 34. The renormalization group 35. Ferromagnetism: a renormalization group tutorial IX: Putting a Spin on QFT 36. The Dirac equation 37. How to transform a spinor 38. The quantum Dirac field 39. A rough guide to quantum electrodynamics 40. QED scattering: three famous cross sections 41. The renormalization of QED and two great results X: Some Applications from the World of Condensed Matter 42. Superfluids 43. The many-body problem and the metal 44. Superconductors 45. The fractional quantum Hall fluid XI: Some Applications from the World of Particle Physics 46. Non-abelian gauge theory 47. The Weinberg--Salam model 48. Majorana fermions 49. Magnetic monopoles 50. Instantons, tunnelling and the end of the world Appendix A: Further reading Appendix B: Useful complex analysis Index

rawabstract:
Quantum field theory is arguably the most far-reaching and beautiful physical theory ever constructed, with aspects more stringently tested and verified to greater precision than any other theory in physics. Unfortunately, the subject has gained a notorious reputation for difficulty, with forbidding looking mathematics and a peculiar diagrammatic language described in an array of unforgiving, weighty textbooks aimed firmly at aspiring professionals. However, quantum field theory is too important, too beautiful, and too engaging to be restricted to the professionals. This book on quantum field theory is designed to be different. It is written by experimental physicists and aims to provide the interested amateur with a bridge from undergraduate physics to quantum field theory. The imagined reader is a gifted amateur, possessing a curious and adaptable mind, looking to be told an entertaining and intellectually stimulating story, but who will not feel patronised if a few mathematical niceties are spelled out in detail. Using numerous worked examples, diagrams, and careful physically motivated explanations, this book will smooth the path towards understanding the radically different and revolutionary view of the physical world that quantum field theory provides, and which all physicists should have the opportunity to experience.

rawTOC:
Overture \\ I: The Universe as a Set of Harmonic Oscillators \\ 1. Lagrangians \\ 2. Simple harmonic oscillators \\ 3. Occupation number representation \\ 4. Making second quantization work \\ II: Writing Down Lagrangians \\ 5. Continuous systems \\ 6. A first stab at relativistic quantum mechanics \\ 7. Examples of Lagrangians, or how to write down a theory \\ III: The Need for Quantum Fields \\ 8. The passage of time \\ 9. Quantum mechanical transformations \\ 10. Symmetry \\ 11. Canonical quantization of fields \\ 12. Examples of canonical quantization \\ 13. Fields with many components and massive electromagnetism \\ 14. Gauge fields and gauge theory \\ 15. Discrete transformations \\ IV: Propagators and Perturbations \\ 16. Ways of doing quantum mechanics: propagators and Green's functions \\ 17. Propagators and Fields \\ 18. The S-matrix \\ 19. Expanding the S-matrix: Feynman diagrams \\ 20. Scattering theory \\ V: Interlude: Wisdom from Statistical Physics \\ 21. Statistical physics: a crash course \\ 22. The generating functional for fields \\ VI: PATH INTEGRALS \\ 23. Path Integrals: I said to him, ``You're crazy'' \\ 24. Field Integrals \\ 25. Statistical field theory \\ 26. Broken symmetry \\ 27. Coherent states \\ 28. Grassmann numbers: coherent states and the path integral for fermions \\ VII: Topological Ideas \\ 29. Topological objects \\ 30. Topological field theory \\ VIII: Renormalization: Taming the Infinite \\ 31. Renormalization, quasiparticles and the Fermi surface \\ 32. Renormalization: the problem and its solution \\ 33. Renormalization in action: propagators and Feynman diagrams \\ 34. The renormalization group \\ 35. Ferromagnetism: a renormalization group tutorial \\ IX: Putting a Spin on QFT \\ 36. The Dirac equation \\ 37. How to transform a spinor \\ 38. The quantum Dirac field \\ 39. A rough guide to quantum electrodynamics \\ 40. QED scattering: three famous cross sections \\ 41. The renormalization of QED and two great results \\ X: Some Applications from the World of Condensed Matter \\ 42. Superfluids \\ 43. The many-body problem and the metal \\ 44. Superconductors \\ 45. The fractional quantum Hall fluid \\ XI: Some Applications from the World of Particle Physics \\ 46. Non-abelian gauge theory \\ 47. The Weinberg--Salam model \\ 48. Majorana fermions \\ 49. Magnetic monopoles \\ 50. Instantons, tunnelling and the end of the world \\ Appendix A: Further reading \\ Appendix B: Useful complex analysis \\ Index

entry:
@Book{Lancaster:2014:QFT,
  author =       "Tom Lancaster and Stephen Blundell",
  title =        "Quantum Field Theory for the Gifted Amateur",
  publisher =    pub-OXFORD,
  address =      pub-OXFORD:adr,
  pages =        "xvii + 485",
  year =         "2014",
  ISBN =         "0-19-969933-X (paperback), 0-19-969932-1 (hardcover)",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-19-969933-9 (paperback), 978-0-19-969932-2
                 (hardcover)",
  LCCN =         "QC174.45 .L36 2014",
  bibdate =      "Fri Oct 3 15:00:54 MDT 2014",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager",
  abstract =     "Quantum field theory is arguably the most far-reaching
                 and beautiful physical theory ever constructed, with
                 aspects more stringently tested and verified to greater
                 precision than any other theory in physics.
                 Unfortunately, the subject has gained a notorious
                 reputation for difficulty, with forbidding looking
                 mathematics and a peculiar diagrammatic language
                 described in an array of unforgiving, weighty textbooks
                 aimed firmly at aspiring professionals. However,
                 quantum field theory is too important, too beautiful,
                 and too engaging to be restricted to the professionals.
                 This book on quantum field theory is designed to be
                 different. It is written by experimental physicists and
                 aims to provide the interested amateur with a bridge
                 from undergraduate physics to quantum field theory. The
                 imagined reader is a gifted amateur, possessing a
                 curious and adaptable mind, looking to be told an
                 entertaining and intellectually stimulating story, but
                 who will not feel patronised if a few mathematical
                 niceties are spelled out in detail. Using numerous
                 worked examples, diagrams, and careful physically
                 motivated explanations, this book will smooth the path
                 towards understanding the radically different and
                 revolutionary view of the physical world that quantum
                 field theory provides, and which all physicists should
                 have the opportunity to experience.",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  subject =      "Quantum field theory; Amateurs' manuals; Problems,
                 exercises, etc; Quantum field theory;
                 Quantenfeldtheorie",
  tableofcontents = "Overture \\
                 I: The Universe as a Set of Harmonic Oscillators \\
                 1. Lagrangians \\
                 2. Simple harmonic oscillators \\
                 3. Occupation number representation \\
                 4. Making second quantization work \\
                 II: Writing Down Lagrangians \\
                 5. Continuous systems \\
                 6. A first stab at relativistic quantum mechanics \\
                 7. Examples of Lagrangians, or how to write down a
                 theory \\
                 III: The Need for Quantum Fields \\
                 8. The passage of time \\
                 9. Quantum mechanical transformations \\
                 10. Symmetry \\
                 11. Canonical quantization of fields \\
                 12. Examples of canonical quantization \\
                 13. Fields with many components and massive
                 electromagnetism \\
                 14. Gauge fields and gauge theory \\
                 15. Discrete transformations \\
                 IV: Propagators and Perturbations \\
                 16. Ways of doing quantum mechanics: propagators and
                 Green's functions \\
                 17. Propagators and Fields \\
                 18. The S-matrix \\
                 19. Expanding the S-matrix: Feynman diagrams \\
                 20. Scattering theory \\
                 V: Interlude: Wisdom from Statistical Physics \\
                 21. Statistical physics: a crash course \\
                 22. The generating functional for fields \\
                 VI: PATH INTEGRALS \\
                 23. Path Integrals: I said to him, ``You're crazy'' \\
                 24. Field Integrals \\
                 25. Statistical field theory \\
                 26. Broken symmetry \\
                 27. Coherent states \\
                 28. Grassmann numbers: coherent states and the path
                 integral for fermions \\
                 VII: Topological Ideas \\
                 29. Topological objects \\
                 30. Topological field theory \\
                 VIII: Renormalization: Taming the Infinite \\
                 31. Renormalization, quasiparticles and the Fermi
                 surface \\
                 32. Renormalization: the problem and its solution \\
                 33. Renormalization in action: propagators and Feynman
                 diagrams \\
                 34. The renormalization group \\
                 35. Ferromagnetism: a renormalization group tutorial
                 \\
                 IX: Putting a Spin on QFT \\
                 36. The Dirac equation \\
                 37. How to transform a spinor \\
                 38. The quantum Dirac field \\
                 39. A rough guide to quantum electrodynamics \\
                 40. QED scattering: three famous cross sections \\
                 41. The renormalization of QED and two great results
                 \\
                 X: Some Applications from the World of Condensed Matter
                 \\
                 42. Superfluids \\
                 43. The many-body problem and the metal \\
                 44. Superconductors \\
                 45. The fractional quantum Hall fluid \\
                 XI: Some Applications from the World of Particle
                 Physics \\
                 46. Non-abelian gauge theory \\
                 47. The Weinberg--Salam model \\
                 48. Majorana fermions \\
                 49. Magnetic monopoles \\
                 50. Instantons, tunnelling and the end of the world \\
                 Appendix A: Further reading \\
                 Appendix B: Useful complex analysis \\
                 Index",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Langenscheidt:2001:LPD
author: Langenscheidt Editorial
title: Langenscheidt's Pocket Dictionary Chinese / English, English / Chinese
publisher: Langenscheidt Publishers
address: New York, NY, USA
pages: 672
year: 2001
ISBN: 1-58573-057-2 OR 1585730572
ISBN13: 978-1-58573-057-5 OR 9781585730575
LCCN: PL1455 .L35 2001
bibdate: Sat Dec 24 11:53:05 MST 2005
bibsource: Amazon; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 2005.12.24 11:53:05 MST
series: Asian Language Pocket Dictionaries Series
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: {Langenscheidt Editorial}
rawtitle: {Langenscheidt}'s Pocket Dictionary {Chinese\slash English, English\slash Chinese}
entry:
@Book{Langenscheidt:2001:LPD,
  author =       "{Langenscheidt Editorial}",
  title =        "{Langenscheidt}'s Pocket Dictionary {Chinese\slash
                 English, English\slash Chinese}",
  publisher =    "Langenscheidt Publishers",
  address =      "New York, NY, USA",
  pages =        "672",
  year =         "2001",
  ISBN =         "1-58573-057-2",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-1-58573-057-5",
  LCCN =         "PL1455 .L35 2001",
  bibdate =      "Sat Dec 24 11:53:05 MST 2005",
  bibsource =    "Amazon;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  series =       "Asian Language Pocket Dictionaries Series",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  bookformat =   "Turtleback",
  category =     "Reference: Dictionaries \& Thesauruses: English
                 (British)",
  comments =     "Pocket Chinese--English, English--Chinese Dictionary
                 is a convenient reference for everyday use containing a
                 wealth of authentic idiomatic expressions and
                 up-to-date words, Pinyin romanization of all Chinese
                 characters, and a Chinese--English section arranged
                 alphabetically according to pronunciation. Over 40,000
                 references.",
  idnumber =     "507",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Langville:2006:GPB
author: Amy N. Langville and Carl D. (Carl Dean) Meyer
title: Google's PageRank and beyond: the science of search engine rankings
publisher: pub-PRINCETON
address: pub-PRINCETON:adr
pages: x + 224
year: 2006
ISBN: 0-691-12202-4 (hardcover) OR 0691122024 (hardcover)
ISBN13: 978-0-691-12202-1 (hardcover) OR 9780691122021 (hardcover)
LCCN: TK5105.885.G66 L36 2006
MRclass: 68-02 (00-01 00A05 15A18 68U35)
MRnumber: MR2262054 (2007h:68002)
MRreviewer: Jiu Ding
bibdate: Fri Oct 23 16:04:57 MDT 2009
bibtimestamp: 2009.10.23 16:04:57 MDT
ZMnumber: 1104.68042
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Amy N. Langville and Carl D. (Carl Dean) Meyer
rawtitle: {Google}'s {PageRank} and beyond: the science of search engine rankings
bibsource:
https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/pagerank.bib; z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager

URL:
http://www.loc.gov/catdir/enhancements/fy0654/2005938841-b.html; http://www.loc.gov/catdir/enhancements/fy0654/2005938841-d.html; http://www.loc.gov/catdir/enhancements/fy0668/2005938841-t.html

subject:
Google; Web search engines; Web sites; Ratings; Mathematics; Internet searching; World Wide Web; Subject access

TOC:
1: Introduction to Web Search Engines 2: Crawling, Indexing, and Query Processing 3: Ranking Webpages by Popularity 4: The Mathematics of Google's PageRank 5: Parameters in the PageRank Model 6: The Sensitivity of PageRank 7: The PageRank Problem as a Linear System 8: Issues in Large-Scale Implementation of PageRank 9: Accelerating the Computation of PageRank 10: Updating the PageRank Vector 11: The HITS Method for Ranking Webpages 12: Other Link Methods for Ranking Webpages 13: The Future of Web Information Retrieval 14: Resources for Web Information Retrieval 15: The Mathematics Guide

rawTOC:
1: Introduction to Web Search Engines \\ 2: Crawling, Indexing, and Query Processing \\ 3: Ranking Webpages by Popularity \\ 4: The Mathematics of Google's PageRank \\ 5: Parameters in the PageRank Model \\ 6: The Sensitivity of PageRank \\ 7: The PageRank Problem as a Linear System \\ 8: Issues in Large-Scale Implementation of PageRank \\ 9: Accelerating the Computation of PageRank \\ 10: Updating the PageRank Vector \\ 11: The HITS Method for Ranking Webpages \\ 12: Other Link Methods for Ranking Webpages \\ 13: The Future of Web Information Retrieval \\ 14: Resources for Web Information Retrieval \\ 15: The Mathematics Guide

entry:
@Book{Langville:2006:GPB,
  author =       "Amy N. Langville and Carl D. (Carl Dean) Meyer",
  title =        "{Google}'s {PageRank} and beyond: the science of
                 search engine rankings",
  publisher =    pub-PRINCETON,
  address =      pub-PRINCETON:adr,
  pages =        "x + 224",
  year =         "2006",
  ISBN =         "0-691-12202-4 (hardcover)",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-691-12202-1 (hardcover)",
  LCCN =         "TK5105.885.G66 L36 2006",
  MRclass =      "68-02 (00-01 00A05 15A18 68U35)",
  MRnumber =     "MR2262054 (2007h:68002)",
  MRreviewer =   "Jiu Ding",
  bibdate =      "Fri Oct 23 16:04:57 MDT 2009",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/pagerank.bib;
                 z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager",
  URL =          "http://www.loc.gov/catdir/enhancements/fy0654/2005938841-b.html;
                 http://www.loc.gov/catdir/enhancements/fy0654/2005938841-d.html;
                 http://www.loc.gov/catdir/enhancements/fy0668/2005938841-t.html",
  ZMnumber =     "1104.68042",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  libnote =      "Not in my library.",
  subject =      "Google; Web search engines; Web sites; Ratings;
                 Mathematics; Internet searching; World Wide Web;
                 Subject access",
  tableofcontents = "1: Introduction to Web Search Engines \\
                 2: Crawling, Indexing, and Query Processing \\
                 3: Ranking Webpages by Popularity \\
                 4: The Mathematics of Google's PageRank \\
                 5: Parameters in the PageRank Model \\
                 6: The Sensitivity of PageRank \\
                 7: The PageRank Problem as a Linear System \\
                 8: Issues in Large-Scale Implementation of PageRank \\
                 9: Accelerating the Computation of PageRank \\
                 10: Updating the PageRank Vector \\
                 11: The HITS Method for Ranking Webpages \\
                 12: Other Link Methods for Ranking Webpages \\
                 13: The Future of Web Information Retrieval \\
                 14: Resources for Web Information Retrieval \\
                 15: The Mathematics Guide",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: LaPaglia:1971:IQC
author: S. (Salvatore) R. La Paglia
title: Introductory Quantum Chemistry
publisher: pub-HARPER-ROW
address: pub-HARPER-ROW:adr
pages: xiii + 402
year: 1971
LCCN: QD462 .L35
bibdate: Sat Jul 25 13:55:27 1998
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1998.07.25 13:55:27 ???
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: S. (Salvatore) R. {La Paglia}
rawtitle: Introductory Quantum Chemistry
entry:
@Book{LaPaglia:1971:IQC,
  author =       "S. (Salvatore) R. {La Paglia}",
  title =        "Introductory Quantum Chemistry",
  publisher =    pub-HARPER-ROW,
  address =      pub-HARPER-ROW:adr,
  pages =        "xiii + 402",
  year =         "1971",
  LCCN =         "QD462 .L35",
  bibdate =      "Sat Jul 25 13:55:27 1998",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  xxISBN =       "none",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lapidus:2008:SRZ
author: Michel L. (Michel Laurent) Lapidus
title: In Search of the Riemann Zeros: Strings, Fractal Membranes and Noncommutative Spacetimes
publisher: pub-AMS
address: pub-AMS:adr
pages: xxix + 558
year: 2008
ISBN: 0-8218-4222-6 OR 0821842226
ISBN13: 978-0-8218-4222-5 OR 9780821842225
LCCN: QA333 .L37 2008
bibdate: Fri Aug 14 21:10:27 MDT 2009
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager
bibtimestamp: 2009.08.14 21:10:27 MDT
subject: Riemann surfaces; functions, zeta; string models; number theory; fractals; space and time; geometry
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Michel L. (Michel Laurent) Lapidus
rawtitle: In Search of the {Riemann} Zeros: Strings, Fractal Membranes and Noncommutative Spacetimes
TOC:
Dedication Quotes Contents Preface Acknowledgments Credits Overview About the cover Introduction String theory on a circle and T-duality: Analogy with the Riemann zeta function Fractal strings and fractal membranes Noncommutative models of fractal strings: Fractal membranes and beyond Towards an `arithmetic site': Moduli spaces of fractal strings and membranes Appendix A. Vertex algebras Appendix B. The Weil conjectures and the Riemann hypothesis Appendix C. The Poisson summation formula, with applications Appendix D. Generalized primes and Beurling zeta functions Appendix E. The Selberg class of zeta functions Appendix F. The noncommutative space of Penrose tilings and quasicrystals Bibliography Conventions Index of symbols Subject index Author index Back Cover

rawTOC:
Dedication \\ Quotes \\ Contents \\ Preface \\ Acknowledgments \\ Credits \\ Overview \\ About the cover \\ Introduction \\ String theory on a circle and T-duality: Analogy with the Riemann zeta function \\ Fractal strings and fractal membranes \\ Noncommutative models of fractal strings: Fractal membranes and beyond \\ Towards an `arithmetic site': Moduli spaces of fractal strings and membranes \\ Appendix A. Vertex algebras \\ Appendix B. The Weil conjectures and the Riemann hypothesis \\ Appendix C. The Poisson summation formula, with applications \\ Appendix D. Generalized primes and Beurling zeta functions \\ Appendix E. The Selberg class of zeta functions \\ Appendix F. The noncommutative space of Penrose tilings and quasicrystals \\ Bibliography \\ Conventions \\ Index of symbols \\ Subject index \\ Author index \\ Back Cover

entry:
@Book{Lapidus:2008:SRZ,
  author =       "Michel L. (Michel Laurent) Lapidus",
  title =        "In Search of the {Riemann} Zeros: Strings, Fractal
                 Membranes and Noncommutative Spacetimes",
  publisher =    pub-AMS,
  address =      pub-AMS:adr,
  pages =        "xxix + 558",
  year =         "2008",
  ISBN =         "0-8218-4222-6",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-8218-4222-5",
  LCCN =         "QA333 .L37 2008",
  bibdate =      "Fri Aug 14 21:10:27 MDT 2009",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  subject =      "Riemann surfaces; functions, zeta; string models;
                 number theory; fractals; space and time; geometry",
  tableofcontents = "Dedication \\
                 Quotes \\
                 Contents \\
                 Preface \\
                 Acknowledgments \\
                 Credits \\
                 Overview \\
                 About the cover \\
                 Introduction \\
                 String theory on a circle and T-duality: Analogy with
                 the Riemann zeta function \\
                 Fractal strings and fractal membranes \\
                 Noncommutative models of fractal strings: Fractal
                 membranes and beyond \\
                 Towards an `arithmetic site': Moduli spaces of fractal
                 strings and membranes \\
                 Appendix A. Vertex algebras \\
                 Appendix B. The Weil conjectures and the Riemann
                 hypothesis \\
                 Appendix C. The Poisson summation formula, with
                 applications \\
                 Appendix D. Generalized primes and Beurling zeta
                 functions \\
                 Appendix E. The Selberg class of zeta functions \\
                 Appendix F. The noncommutative space of Penrose tilings
                 and quasicrystals \\
                 Bibliography \\
                 Conventions \\
                 Index of symbols \\
                 Subject index \\
                 Author index \\
                 Back Cover",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lapin:1987:PCU
author: J. E. Lapin
title: Portable C and UNIX Programming
publisher: pub-PH
address: pub-PH:adr
pages: xiv + 249
year: 1987
ISBN: 0-13-686494-5 OR 0136864945
ISBN13: 978-0-13-686494-3 OR 9780136864943
LCCN: QA76.73.C15 L36 1987
bibdate: Wed Dec 15 10:38:06 1993
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1993.12.15 10:38:06 ???
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: J. E. Lapin
rawtitle: Portable {C} and {UNIX} Programming
entry:
@Book{Lapin:1987:PCU,
  author =       "J. E. Lapin",
  title =        "Portable {C} and {UNIX} Programming",
  publisher =    pub-PH,
  address =      pub-PH:adr,
  pages =        "xiv + 249",
  year =         "1987",
  ISBN =         "0-13-686494-5",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-13-686494-3",
  LCCN =         "QA76.73.C15 L36 1987",
  bibdate =      "Wed Dec 15 10:38:06 1993",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Larousse:2006:PLI
editor: Larousse
title: Le Petit Larousse Illustre
publisher: Larousse
address: 21, rue du Montparnasse, 75283 Paris Cedex 06, France
pages: 1918
year: 2006
ISBN: 2-03-582492-3 OR 2035824923
ISBN13: 978-2-03-582492-9 OR 9782035824929
LCCN: AG25 N75 2006
bibdate: Thu Nov 16 15:48:50 2006
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 2006.11.16 15:48:50 ???
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
raweditor: {Larousse}
rawtitle: Le Petit {Larousse} Illustr{\'e}
entry:
@Book{Larousse:2006:PLI,
  editor =       "{Larousse}",
  title =        "Le Petit {Larousse} Illustr{\'e}",
  publisher =    "Larousse",
  address =      "21, rue du Montparnasse, 75283 Paris Cedex 06,
                 France",
  pages =        "1918",
  year =         "2006",
  ISBN =         "2-03-582492-3",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-2-03-582492-9",
  LCCN =         "AG25 N75 2006",
  bibdate =      "Thu Nov 16 15:48:50 2006",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  price =        "US\$78.95",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Larsen:1989:LPD
author: Steen Larsen
title: LaTeX paa dansk
publisher: pub-UNIC
address: pub-UNIC:adr
pages: viii + 111
year: 1989
ISBN: 87-7252-089-2 OR 8772520892
ISBN13: 978-87-7252-089-6 OR 9788772520896
bibdate: Wed Dec 15 17:54:21 1993
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1993.12.15 17:54:21 ???
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Steen Larsen
rawtitle: {\LaTeX} p{\aa} dansk
entry:
@Book{Larsen:1989:LPD,
  author =       "Steen Larsen",
  title =        "{\LaTeX} p{\aa} dansk",
  publisher =    pub-UNIC,
  address =      pub-UNIC:adr,
  pages =        "viii + 111",
  year =         "1989",
  ISBN =         "87-7252-089-2",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-87-7252-089-6",
  bibdate =      "Wed Dec 15 17:54:21 1993",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Latimer:1952:OSE
author: Wendell M. Latimer
title: The oxidation states of the elements and their potentials in aqueous solutions
publisher: pub-PH
address: pub-PH:adr
edition: Second
pages: xvi + 392
year: 1952
LCCN: QD561 .L35 1952
bibdate: Sat Jul 25 13:55:27 1998
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1998.07.25 13:55:27 ???
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Wendell M. Latimer
rawtitle: The oxidation states of the elements and their potentials in aqueous solutions
entry:
@Book{Latimer:1952:OSE,
  author =       "Wendell M. Latimer",
  title =        "The oxidation states of the elements and their
                 potentials in aqueous solutions",
  publisher =    pub-PH,
  address =      pub-PH:adr,
  edition =      "Second",
  pages =        "xvi + 392",
  year =         "1952",
  LCCN =         "QD561 .L35 1952",
  bibdate =      "Sat Jul 25 13:55:27 1998",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  xxISBN =       "none",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Laurie:1997:ADG
author: Ben Laurie and Peter Laurie
title: Apache: The Definitive Guide
publisher: pub-ORA
address: pub-ORA:adr
pages: xvi + 255
year: 1997
ISBN: 1-56592-250-6 OR 1565922506
ISBN13: 978-1-56592-250-1 OR 9781565922501
LCCN: QA76.76.A7 L3 1997
bibdate: Wed Jul 23 14:54:43 MDT 1997
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1997.07.23 14:54:43 MDT
URL: http://www.ora.com/catalog/apache/; http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/apache
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Ben Laurie and Peter Laurie
rawtitle: {Apache}: The Definitive Guide
entry:
@Book{Laurie:1997:ADG,
  author =       "Ben Laurie and Peter Laurie",
  title =        "{Apache}: The Definitive Guide",
  publisher =    pub-ORA,
  address =      pub-ORA:adr,
  pages =        "xvi + 255",
  year =         "1997",
  ISBN =         "1-56592-250-6",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-1-56592-250-1",
  LCCN =         "QA76.76.A7 L3 1997",
  bibdate =      "Wed Jul 23 14:54:43 MDT 1997",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  price =        "US\$34.95",
  URL =          "http://www.ora.com/catalog/apache/;
                 http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/apache",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lawson:1974:SLS
author: Charles L. Lawson and Richard J. Hanson
title: Solving Least Squares Problems
publisher: pub-PH
address: pub-PH:adr
pages: xii + 340
year: 1974
ISBN: 0-13-822585-0 OR 0138225850
ISBN13: 978-0-13-822585-8 OR 9780138225858
LCCN: QA275 .L425 1974
bibdate: Wed Dec 15 10:38:07 1993
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1993.12.15 10:38:07 ???
series: Prentice-Hall Series in Automatic Computation
ZMnumber: 0860.65028
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Charles L. Lawson and Richard J. Hanson
rawtitle: Solving Least Squares Problems
subject:
Least squares; Data processing; Moindres carres; Informatique; Mathematiques; Traitement des donnees; Ordinateurs; Programmation informatique; Data processing; Niet-lineaire problemen; Kwadratische systemen; Kleinste-kwadratenmethode; Computers; Algorithmus; Ausgleichsrechnung; Datenverarbeitung; Methode der kleinsten Quadrate; informatique; Electronic Data Processing; Regression Analysis

TOC:
Analysis of the least squares problem Orthogonal decomposition by certain elementary orthogonal transformations Orthogonal decomposition by singular values Bounds for the condition number of a triangular matrix The pseudoinverse Pertubation bounds for the pseudoinverse Perturbation bounds for the solution of problem LS Numerical computations using elementary orthogonal transformations Computing the solution for the overdetermined or exactly determined full rank problem Computation of the covariance matrix of the solution parameters Computing the solution for the underdetermined full rank problem Computing the solution for problem LS with possibly deficient pseudorank Analysis of computing errors for the problem LS Analysis of computing errors for the problem LS using mixed precision arithmetic Computation of the singular value decomposition and the solution of problem LS Other methods for least squares problems Linear least squares with linear equality constraints using a basis of the null space Linear least squares with linear equality constraints by direct elimination Linear least squares with linear equality constraints by weighting Linear least squares with linear inequality constraints Modifying a $ Q R $ decomposition to add or remove column vectors Practical analysis of least squares problems Example of some methods of analyzing a least squares problem Modifying a $ Q R $ decomposition to add or remove row vectors with application to sequential processing of problems having a large or banded coefficient matrix Basic Linear Algebra Including Projections Proof of Global Quadratic Convergence of the $ Q R $ Algorithm Description and Use of FORTRAN Codes for Solving Problem LS Developments from 1974 to 1995 Bibliography Index

rawTOC:
Analysis of the least squares problem \\ Orthogonal decomposition by certain elementary orthogonal transformations \\ Orthogonal decomposition by singular values \\ Bounds for the condition number of a triangular matrix \\ The pseudoinverse \\ Pertubation bounds for the pseudoinverse \\ Perturbation bounds for the solution of problem LS \\ Numerical computations using elementary orthogonal transformations \\ Computing the solution for the overdetermined or exactly determined full rank problem \\ Computation of the covariance matrix of the solution parameters \\ Computing the solution for the underdetermined full rank problem \\ Computing the solution for problem LS with possibly deficient pseudorank \\ Analysis of computing errors for the problem LS \\ Analysis of computing errors for the problem LS using mixed precision arithmetic \\ Computation of the singular value decomposition and the solution of problem LS \\ Other methods for least squares problems \\ Linear least squares with linear equality constraints using a basis of the null space \\ Linear least squares with linear equality constraints by direct elimination \\ Linear least squares with linear equality constraints by weighting \\ Linear least squares with linear inequality constraints \\ Modifying a $ Q R $ decomposition to add or remove column vectors \\ Practical analysis of least squares problems \\ Example of some methods of analyzing a least squares problem \\ Modifying a $ Q R $ decomposition to add or remove row vectors with application to sequential processing of problems having a large or banded coefficient matrix \\ Basic Linear Algebra Including Projections \\ Proof of Global Quadratic Convergence of the $ Q R $ Algorithm \\ Description and Use of FORTRAN Codes for Solving Problem LS \\ Developments from 1974 to 1995 \\ Bibliography \\ Index

entry:
@Book{Lawson:1974:SLS,
  author =       "Charles L. Lawson and Richard J. Hanson",
  title =        "Solving Least Squares Problems",
  publisher =    pub-PH,
  address =      pub-PH:adr,
  pages =        "xii + 340",
  year =         "1974",
  ISBN =         "0-13-822585-0",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-13-822585-8",
  LCCN =         "QA275 .L425 1974",
  bibdate =      "Wed Dec 15 10:38:07 1993",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  series =       "Prentice-Hall Series in Automatic Computation",
  ZMnumber =     "0860.65028",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  subject =      "Least squares; Data processing; Moindres carr{\'e}s;
                 Informatique; Math{\'e}matiques; Traitement des
                 donn{\'e}es; Ordinateurs; Programmation informatique;
                 Data processing; Niet-lineaire problemen; Kwadratische
                 systemen; Kleinste-kwadratenmethode; Computers;
                 Algorithmus; Ausgleichsrechnung; Datenverarbeitung;
                 Methode der kleinsten Quadrate; informatique;
                 Electronic Data Processing; Regression Analysis",
  tableofcontents = "Analysis of the least squares problem \\
                 Orthogonal decomposition by certain elementary
                 orthogonal transformations \\
                 Orthogonal decomposition by singular values \\
                 Bounds for the condition number of a triangular matrix
                 \\
                 The pseudoinverse \\
                 Pertubation bounds for the pseudoinverse \\
                 Perturbation bounds for the solution of problem LS \\
                 Numerical computations using elementary orthogonal
                 transformations \\
                 Computing the solution for the overdetermined or
                 exactly determined full rank problem \\
                 Computation of the covariance matrix of the solution
                 parameters \\
                 Computing the solution for the underdetermined full
                 rank problem \\
                 Computing the solution for problem LS with possibly
                 deficient pseudorank \\
                 Analysis of computing errors for the problem LS \\
                 Analysis of computing errors for the problem LS using
                 mixed precision arithmetic \\
                 Computation of the singular value decomposition and the
                 solution of problem LS \\
                 Other methods for least squares problems \\
                 Linear least squares with linear equality constraints
                 using a basis of the null space \\
                 Linear least squares with linear equality constraints
                 by direct elimination \\
                 Linear least squares with linear equality constraints
                 by weighting \\
                 Linear least squares with linear inequality constraints
                 \\
                 Modifying a $ Q R $ decomposition to add or remove
                 column vectors \\
                 Practical analysis of least squares problems \\
                 Example of some methods of analyzing a least squares
                 problem \\
                 Modifying a $ Q R $ decomposition to add or remove row
                 vectors with application to sequential processing of
                 problems having a large or banded coefficient matrix
                 \\
                 Basic Linear Algebra Including Projections \\
                 Proof of Global Quadratic Convergence of the $ Q R $
                 Algorithm \\
                 Description and Use of FORTRAN Codes for Solving
                 Problem LS \\
                 Developments from 1974 to 1995 \\
                 Bibliography \\
                 Index",
}


bibtype: techreport
filename: master.bib
label: Lawson:sf3
author: C. L. Lawson and J. A. Flynn
title: SFTRAN3 Programmer's Reference Manual
number: 1846-98
institution: pub-JPL
address: pub-JPL:adr
pages: xii + 340
month: dec
monthnumber: 12
year: 1978
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: C. L. Lawson and J. A. Flynn
rawtitle: {SFTRAN3} Programmer's Reference Manual
entry:
@TechReport{Lawson:sf3,
  author =       "C. L. Lawson and J. A. Flynn",
  title =        "{SFTRAN3} Programmer's Reference Manual",
  number =       "1846-98",
  institution =  pub-JPL,
  address =      pub-JPL:adr,
  month =        dec,
  year =         "1978",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
}


bibtype: techreport
filename: master.bib
label: Lawson:sftran
author: C. L. Lawson
title: SFTRAN Language Constructs Supported by a Portable Preprocessor
number: JPL Section 366 Internal Computing Memorandum 437
institution: pub-JPL
address: pub-JPL:adr
pages: xii + 340
month: jan
monthnumber: 1
year: 1978
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: C. L. Lawson
rawtitle: {SFTRAN} Language Constructs Supported by a Portable Preprocessor
entry:
@TechReport{Lawson:sftran,
  author =       "C. L. Lawson",
  title =        "{SFTRAN} Language Constructs Supported by a Portable
                 Preprocessor",
  number =       "JPL Section 366 Internal Computing Memorandum 437",
  institution =  pub-JPL,
  address =      pub-JPL:adr,
  month =        jan,
  year =         "1978",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
}


bibtype: techreport
filename: master.bib
label: Lawson:sftran-conversion
author: C. L. Lawson and W. V. Snyder
title: Conversion of SFTRAN Programs to SFTRAN 3
number: 1846-99
institution: pub-JPL
address: pub-JPL:adr
pages: xii + 340
month: dec
monthnumber: 12
year: 1978
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: C. L. Lawson and W. V. Snyder
rawtitle: Conversion of {SFTRAN} Programs to {SFTRAN 3}
entry:
@TechReport{Lawson:sftran-conversion,
  author =       "C. L. Lawson and W. V. Snyder",
  title =        "Conversion of {SFTRAN} Programs to {SFTRAN 3}",
  number =       "1846-99",
  institution =  pub-JPL,
  address =      pub-JPL:adr,
  month =        dec,
  year =         "1978",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
}


bibtype: article
filename: master.bib
label: Le-Ngoc:1989:IPF
author: Tho Le-Ngoc and Minh Tue Vo
title: Implementation and Performance of the Fast Hartley Transform
journal: j-IEEE-MICRO
volume: 9
number: 5
pages: 20--27
month: sep
monthnumber: 9
year: 1989
CODEN: IEMIDZ
DOI: https://doi.org/10.1109/40.45824
ISSN: 0272-1732 (print), 1937-4143 (electronic) OR 02721732 (print), 19374143 (electronic)
ISSNL: 0272-1732 OR 02721732
bibdate: Thu Dec 14 06:08:58 MST 2000
bibtimestamp: 2000.12.14 06:08:58 MST
fjournal: IEEE Micro
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
affiliation: Concordia Univ, Montreal, Can
classcodes: C4190 (Other numerical methods); C5260 (Digital signal processing)
corpsource: Concordia Univ., Montreal, Que., Canada
treatment: P Practical; T Theoretical or Mathematical
rawauthor: Tho Le-Ngoc and Minh Tue Vo
rawtitle: Implementation and Performance of the {Fast Hartley Transform}
bibsource:
Compendex database; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/ieeemicro.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; Science Citation Index database (1980--2000)

keywords:
computerised signal processing; Computers, Digital; convolution; digital signal processors; execution time; fast Fourier; Fast Fourier Transform (FFT); fast Fourier transforms; fast Hartley transform; Fast Hartley Transform (FHT); hardware; Mathematical Transformations--Fast Fourier Transforms; memory storage requirements; microprocessors; power spectrum calculation; Signal Processing--Digital Techniques; software; Special Purpose Application; transform

entry:
@Article{Le-Ngoc:1989:IPF,
  author =       "Tho Le-Ngoc and Minh Tue Vo",
  title =        "Implementation and Performance of the {Fast Hartley
                 Transform}",
  journal =      j-IEEE-MICRO,
  volume =       "9",
  number =       "5",
  pages =        "20--27",
  month =        sep # "\slash " # oct,
  year =         "1989",
  CODEN =        "IEMIDZ",
  DOI =          "https://doi.org/10.1109/40.45824",
  ISSN =         "0272-1732 (print), 1937-4143 (electronic)",
  ISSN-L =       "0272-1732",
  bibdate =      "Thu Dec 14 06:08:58 MST 2000",
  bibsource =    "Compendex database;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/ieeemicro.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 Science Citation Index database (1980--2000)",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  affiliation =  "Concordia Univ, Montreal, Can",
  classcodes =   "C4190 (Other numerical methods); C5260 (Digital signal
                 processing)",
  classification = "721; 722; 723; 921",
  corpsource =   "Concordia Univ., Montreal, Que., Canada",
  fjournal =     "IEEE Micro",
  keywords =     "computerised signal processing; Computers, Digital;
                 convolution; digital signal processors; execution time;
                 fast Fourier; Fast Fourier Transform (FFT); fast
                 Fourier transforms; fast Hartley transform; Fast
                 Hartley Transform (FHT); hardware; Mathematical
                 Transformations--Fast Fourier Transforms; memory
                 storage requirements; microprocessors; power spectrum
                 calculation; Signal Processing--Digital Techniques;
                 software; Special Purpose Application; transform",
  treatment =    "P Practical; T Theoretical or Mathematical",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lebedev:1972:SFT
author: N. N. (Nikolai Nikolaevich) Lebedev
title: Special functions and their applications
publisher: pub-DOVER
address: pub-DOVER:adr
pages: xii + 308
year: 1972
ISBN: 0-486-60624-4 (paperback) OR 0486606244 (paperback)
ISBN13: 978-0-486-60624-8 (paperback) OR 9780486606248 (paperback)
LCCN: QA351 .L3613 1972
bibdate: Sat Oct 30 16:25:05 MDT 2010
bibtimestamp: 2010.10.30 16:25:05 MDT
note: Translated to English and edited by Richard A. Silverman.
URL: http://www.loc.gov/catdir/description/dover031/72086228.html
remark: Translation of Speetisialnye funketisii i ikh prilozhenieiia.
subject: Functions, Special; Mathematical physics
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: N. N. (Nikolai Nikolaevich) Lebedev
rawnote: Translated to English and edited by Richard A. Silverman.
rawtitle: Special functions and their applications
bibsource:
https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/elefunt.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager

TOC:
1 The Gamma Function 1.1. Definition of the Gamma Function 1.2. Some Relations Satisfied by the Gamma Function 1.3. The Logarithmic Derivative of the Gamma Function 1.4. Asymptotic Representation of the Gamma Function for Large $ |z| $ 1.5. Definite Integrals Related to the Gamma Function Problems 2 The Probability Integral and Related Functions 2.1. The Probability Integral and Its Basic Properties 2.2. Asymptotic Representation of the Probability Integral for Large $|z|$ 2.3. The Probability Integral of Imaginary Argument. The Function $F(z)$ 2.4. The Probability Integral of Argument $sqrt i x$. The Fresnel Integrals, 21. 2.5. Application to Probability Theory 2.6. Application to the Theory of Heat Conduction. Cooling of the Surface of a Heated Object 2.7. Application to the Theory of Vibrations. Transverse Vibrations of an Infinite Rod under the Action of a Suddenly Applied Concentrated Force Problems 3 The Exponential Integral and Related Functions 3.1. The Exponential Integral and its Basic Properties 3.2. Asymptotic Representation of the Exponential Integral for Large $|z|$ 3.3. The Exponential Integral of Imaginary Argument. The Sine and Cosine Integrals 3.4. The Logarithmic Integral 3.5. Application to Electromagnetic Theory, Radiation of a Linear Half-Wave Oscillator Problems 4 Orthogonal Polynomials 4.1. Introductory Remarks 4.2. Definition and Generating Function of the Legendre Polynomials 4.3. Recurrence Relations and Differential Equation for the Legendre Polynomials 4.4. Integral Representations of the Legendre Polynomials 4.5. Orthogonality of the Legendre Polynomials 4.6. Asymptotic Representation of the Legendre Polynomials for Large $n$ 4.7. Expansion of Functions in Series of Legendre Polynomials 4.8. Examples of Expansions in Series of Legendre Polynomials 4.9. Definition and Generating Function of the Hermite Polynomials 4.10. Recurrence Relations and Differential Equation for the Hermite Polynomials 4.11. Integral Representations of the Hermite Polynomials 4.12. Integral Equations Satisfied by the Hermite Polynomials 4.13. Orthogonality of the Hermite Polynomials 4.14. Asymptotic Representation of the Hermite Polynomials for Large n 4.15. Expansion of Functions in Series of Hermite Polynomials 4.16. Examples of Expansions in Series of Hermite Polynomials 4.17. Definition and Generating Function of the Laguerre Polynomials 4.18. Recurrence Relations and Differential Equation for the Laguerre Polynomials 4.19. An Integral Representation of the Laguerre Polynomials. Relation between the Laguerre and Hermite Polynomials 4.20. An Integral Equation Satisfied by the Laguerre Polynomials 4.21. Orthogonality of the Laguerre Polynomials 4.22. Asymptotic Representation of the Laguerre Polynomials for Large $n$ 4.23. Expansion of Functions in Series of Laguerre Polynomials 4.24. Examples of Expansions in Series of Laguerre Polynomials 4.25. Application to the Theory of Propagation of Electromagnetic Waves. Reflection from the End of a Long Transmission Line Terminated by a Lumped Inductance Problems 5 Cylinder Functions: Theory 5.1. Introductory Remarks 5.2. Bessel Functions of Nonnegative Integral Order 5.3. Bessel Functions of Arbitrary Order 5.4. General Cylinder Functions. Bessel Functions of the Second Kind 5.5. Series Expansion of the Function$ $Y_n(z)$ 5.6. Bessel Functions of the Third Kind 5.7. Bessel Functions of Imaginary Argument 5.8. Cylinder Functions of Half-Integral Order 5.9. Wronskians of Pairs of Solutions of Bessel s Equation 5.10. Integral Representations of the Cylinder Functions 5.11. Asymptotic Representations of the Cylinder Functions for Large $|z|$ 5.12. Addition Theorems for the Cylinder Functions, 124.Zeros of the Cylinder Functions 5.13. Expansions in Series and Integrals Involving Cylinder Functions 5.14. Definite Integrals Involving Cylinder Functions 5.15. Cylinder Functions of Nonnegative Argument and Order 5.16. Airy Functions Problems 6 Cylinder Functions: Applications 6.1. Introductory Remarks 6.2. Separation of Variables in Cylindrical Coordinates 6.3. The Boundary Value Problems of Potential Theory. The Dirichlet Problem for a Cylinder 6.4. The Dirichlet Problem for a Domain Bounded by Two Parallel Planes 6.5. The Dirichlet Problem for a Wedge 6.6. The Field of a Point Charge near the Edge of a Conducting Sheet 6.7. Cooling of a Heated Cylinder 6.8. Diffraction by a Cylinder Problems 7 Spherical Harmonics: Theory 7.1. Introductory Remarks 7.2. The Hypergeometric Equation and Its Series Solution 7.3. Legendre Functions 7.4. Integral Representations of the Legendre Functions 7.5. Some Relations Satisfied by the Legendre Functions 7.6. Series Representations of the Legendre Functions 7.7. Wronskians of Pairs of Solutions of Legend-re s Equation 7.8. Recurrence Relations for the Legendre Functions 7.9. Legendre Functions of Nonnegative Integral Degree and Their Relation to Legendre Polynomials 7.10. Legendre Functions of Half-Integral Degree 7.11. Asymptotic Representations of the Legendre Functions for Large $|v|$ 7.12. Associated Legendre Functions Problems 8 Spherical Harmonics: Applications 8.1. Introductory Remarks 8.2. Solution of Laplace's Equation in Spherical Coordinates 8.3. The Dirichlet Problem for a Sphere 8.4. The Field of a Point Charge Inside a Hollow Conducting Sphere 8.5. The Dirichlet Problem for a Cone 8.6. Solution of Laplace's Equation in Spheroidal Coordinates 8.7. The Dirichlet Problem for a Spheroid 8.8. The Gravitational Attraction of a Homogeneous Solid Spheroid 8.9. The Dirichlet Problem for a Hyperboloid of Revolution 8.10. Solution of Laplace's Equation in Toroidal Coordinates 8.11. The Dirichlet Problem for a Torus 8.12. The Dirichlet Problem for a Domain Bounded by Two Intersecting Spheres 8.13. Solution of Laplace's Equation in Bipolar Coordinates 8.14. Solution of Helmholtz's Equation in Spherical Coordinates Problems 9 Hypergeometric Functions 9.1. The Hypergeometric Series and Its Analytic Continuation 9.2. Elementary Properties of the Hypergeometric Function 9.3. Evaluation of $F(alpha , beta ; gamma ; z)$ for $Re (gamma alpha beta ) > 0$, 243. 9.4. $F(alpha , beta ; gamma ; z)$ as a Function of its Parameters 9.5. Linear Transformations of the Hypergeometric Function 9.6. Quadratic Transformations of the Hypergeometric Function 9.7. Formulas for Analytic Continuation of $F(alpha , beta ; gamma ; z)$ in Exceptional Cases 9.8. Representation of Various Functions in Terms of the Hypergeometric Function 9.9. The Confluent Hypergeometric Function 9.10. The Differential Equation for the Confluent Hypergeometric Function and Its Solution. The Confluent Hypergeometric Function of the Second Kind 9.11. Integral Representations of the Confluent Hypergeometric Functions 9.12. Asymptotic Representations of the Confluent Hypergeometric Functions for Large $|z|$ 9.13. Representation of Various Functions in Terms of the Confluent Hypergeometric Functions 9.14. Generalized Hypergeometric Functions Problems 10 Parabolic Cylinder Functions 10.1. Separation of Variables in Laplace's Equation in Parabolic Coordinates 10.2. Hermite Functions 10.3. Some Relations Satisfied by the Hermite Functions 10.4. Recurrence Relations for the Hermite Functions 10.5. Integral Representations of the Hermite Functions 10.6. Asymptotic Representations of the Hermite Functions for Large $|z|$ 10.7. The Dirichlet Problem for a Parabolic Cylinder 10.8. Application to Quantum Mechanics Problems Bibliography Index

rawTOC:
1 The Gamma Function \\ \\ 1.1. Definition of the Gamma Function \\ 1.2. Some Relations Satisfied by the Gamma Function \\ 1.3. The Logarithmic Derivative of the Gamma Function \\ 1.4. Asymptotic Representation of the Gamma Function for Large $ |z| $ \\ 1.5. Definite Integrals Related to the Gamma Function \\ Problems \\ \\ 2 The Probability Integral and Related Functions \\ \\ 2.1. The Probability Integral and Its Basic Properties \\ 2.2. Asymptotic Representation of the Probability Integral for Large $|z|$ \\ 2.3. The Probability Integral of Imaginary Argument. The Function $F(z)$ \\ 2.4. The Probability Integral of Argument $\sqrt{i} x$. The Fresnel Integrals, 21. \\ 2.5. Application to Probability Theory \\ 2.6. Application to the Theory of Heat Conduction. Cooling of the Surface of a Heated Object \\ 2.7. Application to the Theory of Vibrations. Transverse Vibrations of an Infinite Rod under the Action of a Suddenly Applied Concentrated Force \\ Problems \\ \\ 3 The Exponential Integral and Related Functions \\ \\ 3.1. The Exponential Integral and its Basic Properties \\ 3.2. Asymptotic Representation of the Exponential Integral for Large $|z|$ \\ 3.3. The Exponential Integral of Imaginary Argument. The Sine and Cosine Integrals \\ 3.4. The Logarithmic Integral \\ 3.5. Application to Electromagnetic Theory, Radiation of a Linear Half-Wave Oscillator Problems \\ \\ 4 Orthogonal Polynomials \\ \\ 4.1. Introductory Remarks \\ 4.2. Definition and Generating Function of the Legendre Polynomials \\ 4.3. Recurrence Relations and Differential Equation for the Legendre Polynomials \\ 4.4. Integral Representations of the Legendre Polynomials \\ 4.5. Orthogonality of the Legendre Polynomials \\ 4.6. Asymptotic Representation of the Legendre Polynomials for Large $n$ \\ 4.7. Expansion of Functions in Series of Legendre Polynomials \\ 4.8. Examples of Expansions in Series of Legendre Polynomials \\ 4.9. Definition and Generating Function of the Hermite Polynomials \\ 4.10. Recurrence Relations and Differential Equation for the Hermite Polynomials \\ 4.11. Integral Representations of the Hermite Polynomials \\ 4.12. Integral Equations Satisfied by the Hermite Polynomials \\ 4.13. Orthogonality of the Hermite Polynomials \\ 4.14. Asymptotic Representation of the Hermite Polynomials for Large n \\ 4.15. Expansion of Functions in Series of Hermite Polynomials \\ 4.16. Examples of Expansions in Series of Hermite Polynomials \\ 4.17. Definition and Generating Function of the Laguerre Polynomials \\ 4.18. Recurrence Relations and Differential Equation for the Laguerre Polynomials \\ 4.19. An Integral Representation of the Laguerre Polynomials. Relation between the Laguerre and Hermite Polynomials \\ 4.20. An Integral Equation Satisfied by the Laguerre Polynomials \\ 4.21. Orthogonality of the Laguerre Polynomials \\ 4.22. Asymptotic Representation of the Laguerre Polynomials for Large $n$ \\ 4.23. Expansion of Functions in Series of Laguerre Polynomials \\ 4.24. Examples of Expansions in Series of Laguerre Polynomials \\ 4.25. Application to the Theory of Propagation of Electromagnetic Waves. Reflection from the End of a Long Transmission Line Terminated by a Lumped Inductance \\ Problems \\ \\ 5 Cylinder Functions: Theory \\ \\ 5.1. Introductory Remarks \\ 5.2. Bessel Functions of Nonnegative Integral Order \\ 5.3. Bessel Functions of Arbitrary Order \\ 5.4. General Cylinder Functions. Bessel Functions of the Second Kind \\ 5.5. Series Expansion of the Function$ $Y_n(z)$ \\ 5.6. Bessel Functions of the Third Kind \\ 5.7. Bessel Functions of Imaginary Argument \\ 5.8. Cylinder Functions of Half-Integral Order \\ 5.9. Wronskians of Pairs of Solutions of Bessel s Equation \\ 5.10. Integral Representations of the Cylinder Functions \\ 5.11. Asymptotic Representations of the Cylinder Functions for Large $|z|$ \\ 5.12. Addition Theorems for the Cylinder Functions, 124.Zeros of the Cylinder Functions \\ 5.13. Expansions in Series and Integrals Involving Cylinder Functions \\ 5.14. Definite Integrals Involving Cylinder Functions \\ 5.15. Cylinder Functions of Nonnegative Argument and Order \\ 5.16. Airy Functions \\ Problems \\ \\ 6 Cylinder Functions: Applications \\ \\ 6.1. Introductory Remarks \\ 6.2. Separation of Variables in Cylindrical Coordinates \\ 6.3. The Boundary Value Problems of Potential Theory. The Dirichlet Problem for a Cylinder \\ 6.4. The Dirichlet Problem for a Domain Bounded by Two Parallel Planes \\ 6.5. The Dirichlet Problem for a Wedge \\ 6.6. The Field of a Point Charge near the Edge of a Conducting Sheet \\ 6.7. Cooling of a Heated Cylinder \\ 6.8. Diffraction by a Cylinder \\ Problems \\ \\ 7 Spherical Harmonics: Theory \\ \\ 7.1. Introductory Remarks \\ 7.2. The Hypergeometric Equation and Its Series Solution \\ 7.3. Legendre Functions \\ 7.4. Integral Representations of the Legendre Functions \\ 7.5. Some Relations Satisfied by the Legendre Functions \\ 7.6. Series Representations of the Legendre Functions \\ 7.7. Wronskians of Pairs of Solutions of Legend-re s Equation \\ 7.8. Recurrence Relations for the Legendre Functions \\ 7.9. Legendre Functions of Nonnegative Integral Degree and Their Relation to Legendre Polynomials \\ 7.10. Legendre Functions of Half-Integral Degree \\ 7.11. Asymptotic Representations of the Legendre Functions for Large $|v|$ \\ 7.12. Associated Legendre Functions \\ Problems \\ \\ 8 Spherical Harmonics: Applications \\ \\ 8.1. Introductory Remarks \\ 8.2. Solution of Laplace's Equation in Spherical Coordinates \\ 8.3. The Dirichlet Problem for a Sphere \\ 8.4. The Field of a Point Charge Inside a Hollow Conducting Sphere \\ 8.5. The Dirichlet Problem for a Cone \\ 8.6. Solution of Laplace's Equation in Spheroidal Coordinates \\ 8.7. The Dirichlet Problem for a Spheroid \\ 8.8. The Gravitational Attraction of a Homogeneous Solid Spheroid \\ 8.9. The Dirichlet Problem for a Hyperboloid of Revolution \\ 8.10. Solution of Laplace's Equation in Toroidal Coordinates \\ 8.11. The Dirichlet Problem for a Torus \\ 8.12. The Dirichlet Problem for a Domain Bounded by Two Intersecting Spheres \\ 8.13. Solution of Laplace's Equation in Bipolar Coordinates \\ 8.14. Solution of Helmholtz's Equation in Spherical Coordinates \\ Problems \\ \\ 9 Hypergeometric Functions \\ \\ 9.1. The Hypergeometric Series and Its Analytic Continuation \\ 9.2. Elementary Properties of the Hypergeometric Function \\ 9.3. Evaluation of $F(\alpha, \beta; \gamma; z)$ for $\Re(\gamma \alpha \beta) > 0$, 243. \\ 9.4. $F(\alpha, \beta; \gamma; z)$ as a Function of its Parameters \\ 9.5. Linear Transformations of the Hypergeometric Function \\ 9.6. Quadratic Transformations of the Hypergeometric Function \\ 9.7. Formulas for Analytic Continuation of $F(\alpha, \beta; \gamma; z)$ in Exceptional Cases \\ 9.8. Representation of Various Functions in Terms of the Hypergeometric Function \\ 9.9. The Confluent Hypergeometric Function \\ 9.10. The Differential Equation for the Confluent Hypergeometric Function and Its Solution. The Confluent Hypergeometric Function of the Second Kind \\ 9.11. Integral Representations of the Confluent Hypergeometric Functions \\ 9.12. Asymptotic Representations of the Confluent Hypergeometric Functions for Large $|z|$ \\ 9.13. Representation of Various Functions in Terms of the Confluent Hypergeometric Functions \\ 9.14. Generalized Hypergeometric Functions \\ Problems \\ \\ 10 Parabolic Cylinder Functions \\ \\ 10.1. Separation of Variables in Laplace's Equation in Parabolic Coordinates \\ 10.2. Hermite Functions \\ 10.3. Some Relations Satisfied by the Hermite Functions \\ 10.4. Recurrence Relations for the Hermite Functions \\ 10.5. Integral Representations of the Hermite Functions \\ 10.6. Asymptotic Representations of the Hermite Functions for Large $|z|$ \\ 10.7. The Dirichlet Problem for a Parabolic Cylinder \\ 10.8. Application to Quantum Mechanics \\ Problems \\ \\ Bibliography \\ \\ Index

entry:
@Book{Lebedev:1972:SFT,
  author =       "N. N. (Nikolai Nikolaevich) Lebedev",
  title =        "Special functions and their applications",
  publisher =    pub-DOVER,
  address =      pub-DOVER:adr,
  pages =        "xii + 308",
  year =         "1972",
  ISBN =         "0-486-60624-4 (paperback)",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-486-60624-8 (paperback)",
  LCCN =         "QA351 .L3613 1972",
  bibdate =      "Sat Oct 30 16:25:05 MDT 2010",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/elefunt.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager",
  note =         "Translated to English and edited by Richard A.
                 Silverman.",
  URL =          "http://www.loc.gov/catdir/description/dover031/72086228.html",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  remark =       "Translation of Spe{\"e}t{\`\i}sial\S{}nye
                 funk{\"e}t{\`\i}sii i ikh prilozheni{\"e}i{\`\i}a.",
  subject =      "Functions, Special; Mathematical physics",
  tableofcontents = "1 The Gamma Function \\
                 \\
                 1.1. Definition of the Gamma Function \\
                 1.2. Some Relations Satisfied by the Gamma Function \\
                 1.3. The Logarithmic Derivative of the Gamma Function
                 \\
                 1.4. Asymptotic Representation of the Gamma Function
                 for Large $ |z| $ \\
                 1.5. Definite Integrals Related to the Gamma Function
                 \\
                 Problems \\
                 \\
                 2 The Probability Integral and Related Functions \\
                 \\
                 2.1. The Probability Integral and Its Basic Properties
                 \\
                 2.2. Asymptotic Representation of the Probability
                 Integral for Large $|z|$ \\
                 2.3. The Probability Integral of Imaginary Argument.
                 The Function $F(z)$ \\
                 2.4. The Probability Integral of Argument $\sqrt{i} x$.
                 The Fresnel Integrals, 21. \\
                 2.5. Application to Probability Theory \\
                 2.6. Application to the Theory of Heat Conduction.
                 Cooling of the Surface of a Heated Object \\
                 2.7. Application to the Theory of Vibrations.
                 Transverse Vibrations of an Infinite Rod under the
                 Action of a Suddenly Applied Concentrated Force \\
                 Problems \\
                 \\
                 3 The Exponential Integral and Related Functions \\
                 \\
                 3.1. The Exponential Integral and its Basic Properties
                 \\
                 3.2. Asymptotic Representation of the Exponential
                 Integral for Large $|z|$ \\
                 3.3. The Exponential Integral of Imaginary Argument.
                 The Sine and Cosine Integrals \\
                 3.4. The Logarithmic Integral \\
                 3.5. Application to Electromagnetic Theory, Radiation
                 of a Linear Half-Wave Oscillator Problems \\
                 \\
                 4 Orthogonal Polynomials \\
                 \\
                 4.1. Introductory Remarks \\
                 4.2. Definition and Generating Function of the Legendre
                 Polynomials \\
                 4.3. Recurrence Relations and Differential Equation for
                 the Legendre Polynomials \\
                 4.4. Integral Representations of the Legendre
                 Polynomials \\
                 4.5. Orthogonality of the Legendre Polynomials \\
                 4.6. Asymptotic Representation of the Legendre
                 Polynomials for Large $n$ \\
                 4.7. Expansion of Functions in Series of Legendre
                 Polynomials \\
                 4.8. Examples of Expansions in Series of Legendre
                 Polynomials \\
                 4.9. Definition and Generating Function of the Hermite
                 Polynomials \\
                 4.10. Recurrence Relations and Differential Equation
                 for the Hermite Polynomials \\
                 4.11. Integral Representations of the Hermite
                 Polynomials \\
                 4.12. Integral Equations Satisfied by the Hermite
                 Polynomials \\
                 4.13. Orthogonality of the Hermite Polynomials \\
                 4.14. Asymptotic Representation of the Hermite
                 Polynomials for Large n \\
                 4.15. Expansion of Functions in Series of Hermite
                 Polynomials \\
                 4.16. Examples of Expansions in Series of Hermite
                 Polynomials \\
                 4.17. Definition and Generating Function of the
                 Laguerre Polynomials \\
                 4.18. Recurrence Relations and Differential Equation
                 for the Laguerre Polynomials \\
                 4.19. An Integral Representation of the Laguerre
                 Polynomials. Relation between the Laguerre and Hermite
                 Polynomials \\
                 4.20. An Integral Equation Satisfied by the Laguerre
                 Polynomials \\
                 4.21. Orthogonality of the Laguerre Polynomials \\
                 4.22. Asymptotic Representation of the Laguerre
                 Polynomials for Large $n$ \\
                 4.23. Expansion of Functions in Series of Laguerre
                 Polynomials \\
                 4.24. Examples of Expansions in Series of Laguerre
                 Polynomials \\
                 4.25. Application to the Theory of Propagation of
                 Electromagnetic Waves. Reflection from the End of a
                 Long Transmission Line Terminated by a Lumped
                 Inductance \\
                 Problems \\
                 \\
                 5 Cylinder Functions: Theory \\
                 \\
                 5.1. Introductory Remarks \\
                 5.2. Bessel Functions of Nonnegative Integral Order \\
                 5.3. Bessel Functions of Arbitrary Order \\
                 5.4. General Cylinder Functions. Bessel Functions of
                 the Second Kind \\
                 5.5. Series Expansion of the Function$ $Y_n(z)$ \\
                 5.6. Bessel Functions of the Third Kind \\
                 5.7. Bessel Functions of Imaginary Argument \\
                 5.8. Cylinder Functions of Half-Integral Order \\
                 5.9. Wronskians of Pairs of Solutions of Bessel s
                 Equation \\
                 5.10. Integral Representations of the Cylinder
                 Functions \\
                 5.11. Asymptotic Representations of the Cylinder
                 Functions for Large $|z|$ \\
                 5.12. Addition Theorems for the Cylinder Functions,
                 124.Zeros of the Cylinder Functions \\
                 5.13. Expansions in Series and Integrals Involving
                 Cylinder Functions \\
                 5.14. Definite Integrals Involving Cylinder Functions
                 \\
                 5.15. Cylinder Functions of Nonnegative Argument and
                 Order \\
                 5.16. Airy Functions \\
                 Problems \\
                 \\
                 6 Cylinder Functions: Applications \\
                 \\
                 6.1. Introductory Remarks \\
                 6.2. Separation of Variables in Cylindrical Coordinates
                 \\
                 6.3. The Boundary Value Problems of Potential Theory.
                 The Dirichlet Problem for a Cylinder \\
                 6.4. The Dirichlet Problem for a Domain Bounded by Two
                 Parallel Planes \\
                 6.5. The Dirichlet Problem for a Wedge \\
                 6.6. The Field of a Point Charge near the Edge of a
                 Conducting Sheet \\
                 6.7. Cooling of a Heated Cylinder \\
                 6.8. Diffraction by a Cylinder \\
                 Problems \\
                 \\
                 7 Spherical Harmonics: Theory \\
                 \\
                 7.1. Introductory Remarks \\
                 7.2. The Hypergeometric Equation and Its Series
                 Solution \\
                 7.3. Legendre Functions \\
                 7.4. Integral Representations of the Legendre Functions
                 \\
                 7.5. Some Relations Satisfied by the Legendre Functions
                 \\
                 7.6. Series Representations of the Legendre Functions
                 \\
                 7.7. Wronskians of Pairs of Solutions of Legend-re s
                 Equation \\
                 7.8. Recurrence Relations for the Legendre Functions
                 \\
                 7.9. Legendre Functions of Nonnegative Integral Degree
                 and Their Relation to Legendre Polynomials \\
                 7.10. Legendre Functions of Half-Integral Degree \\
                 7.11. Asymptotic Representations of the Legendre
                 Functions for Large $|v|$ \\
                 7.12. Associated Legendre Functions \\
                 Problems \\
                 \\
                 8 Spherical Harmonics: Applications \\
                 \\
                 8.1. Introductory Remarks \\
                 8.2. Solution of Laplace's Equation in Spherical
                 Coordinates \\
                 8.3. The Dirichlet Problem for a Sphere \\
                 8.4. The Field of a Point Charge Inside a Hollow
                 Conducting Sphere \\
                 8.5. The Dirichlet Problem for a Cone \\
                 8.6. Solution of Laplace's Equation in Spheroidal
                 Coordinates \\
                 8.7. The Dirichlet Problem for a Spheroid \\
                 8.8. The Gravitational Attraction of a Homogeneous
                 Solid Spheroid \\
                 8.9. The Dirichlet Problem for a Hyperboloid of
                 Revolution \\
                 8.10. Solution of Laplace's Equation in Toroidal
                 Coordinates \\
                 8.11. The Dirichlet Problem for a Torus \\
                 8.12. The Dirichlet Problem for a Domain Bounded by Two
                 Intersecting Spheres \\
                 8.13. Solution of Laplace's Equation in Bipolar
                 Coordinates \\
                 8.14. Solution of Helmholtz's Equation in Spherical
                 Coordinates \\
                 Problems \\
                 \\
                 9 Hypergeometric Functions \\
                 \\
                 9.1. The Hypergeometric Series and Its Analytic
                 Continuation \\
                 9.2. Elementary Properties of the Hypergeometric
                 Function \\
                 9.3. Evaluation of $F(\alpha, \beta; \gamma; z)$ for
                 $\Re(\gamma \alpha \beta) > 0$, 243. \\
                 9.4. $F(\alpha, \beta; \gamma; z)$ as a Function of its
                 Parameters \\
                 9.5. Linear Transformations of the Hypergeometric
                 Function \\
                 9.6. Quadratic Transformations of the Hypergeometric
                 Function \\
                 9.7. Formulas for Analytic Continuation of $F(\alpha,
                 \beta; \gamma; z)$ in Exceptional Cases \\
                 9.8. Representation of Various Functions in Terms of
                 the Hypergeometric Function \\
                 9.9. The Confluent Hypergeometric Function \\
                 9.10. The Differential Equation for the Confluent
                 Hypergeometric Function and Its Solution. The Confluent
                 Hypergeometric Function of the Second Kind \\
                 9.11. Integral Representations of the Confluent
                 Hypergeometric Functions \\
                 9.12. Asymptotic Representations of the Confluent
                 Hypergeometric Functions for Large $|z|$ \\
                 9.13. Representation of Various Functions in Terms of
                 the Confluent Hypergeometric Functions \\
                 9.14. Generalized Hypergeometric Functions \\
                 Problems \\
                 \\
                 10 Parabolic Cylinder Functions \\
                 \\
                 10.1. Separation of Variables in Laplace's Equation in
                 Parabolic Coordinates \\
                 10.2. Hermite Functions \\
                 10.3. Some Relations Satisfied by the Hermite Functions
                 \\
                 10.4. Recurrence Relations for the Hermite Functions
                 \\
                 10.5. Integral Representations of the Hermite Functions
                 \\
                 10.6. Asymptotic Representations of the Hermite
                 Functions for Large $|z|$ \\
                 10.7. The Dirichlet Problem for a Parabolic Cylinder
                 \\
                 10.8. Application to Quantum Mechanics \\
                 Problems \\
                 \\
                 Bibliography \\
                 \\
                 Index",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Ledgard:1979:PS
author: Henry F. Ledgard and John F. Hueras and Paul A. Nagin
title: Pascal with Style
publisher: pub-HAYDEN
address: pub-HAYDEN:adr
pages: 210
year: 1979
ISBN: 0-8104-5124-7 OR 0810451247
ISBN13: 978-0-8104-5124-7 OR 9780810451247
LCCN: QA76.73.P2 L4
bibdate: Wed Dec 15 10:38:08 1993
bibtimestamp: 1993.12.15 10:38:08 ???
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Henry F. Ledgard and John F. Hueras and Paul A. Nagin
rawtitle: {Pascal} with Style
bibsource:
https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/bibnet/authors/w/wirth-niklaus.bib

entry:
@Book{Ledgard:1979:PS,
  author =       "Henry F. Ledgard and John F. Hueras and Paul A.
                 Nagin",
  title =        "{Pascal} with Style",
  publisher =    pub-HAYDEN,
  address =      pub-HAYDEN:adr,
  pages =        "210",
  year =         "1979",
  ISBN =         "0-8104-5124-7",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-8104-5124-7",
  LCCN =         "QA76.73.P2 L4",
  bibdate =      "Wed Dec 15 10:38:08 1993",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/bibnet/authors/w/wirth-niklaus.bib",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Leech:1965:CM
author: J. W. Leech
title: Classical Mechanics
volume: 8
publisher: Science Paperbacks and Methuen & Co., Ltd.
address: London, England
edition: Second
pages: ix + 153
year: 1965
LCCN: QA807 .L4 1965
bibdate: Sat Jul 25 13:55:27 1998
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1998.07.25 13:55:27 ???
series: Methuen's Monographs on Physical Subjects
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: J. W. Leech
rawtitle: Classical Mechanics
entry:
@Book{Leech:1965:CM,
  author =       "J. W. Leech",
  title =        "Classical Mechanics",
  volume =       "8",
  publisher =    "Science Paperbacks and Methuen \& Co., Ltd.",
  address =      "London, England",
  edition =      "Second",
  pages =        "ix + 153",
  year =         "1965",
  LCCN =         "QA807 .L4 1965",
  bibdate =      "Sat Jul 25 13:55:27 1998",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  series =       "Methuen's Monographs on Physical Subjects",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  xxISBN =       "none",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Leffler:1989:DIU
author: Samuel J. Leffler and Marshall Kirk McKusick and Michael J. Karels and John S. Quarterman
title: The Design and Implementation of the 4.3BSD UNIX Operating System
publisher: pub-AW
address: pub-AW:adr
pages: xxii + 471
year: 1989
ISBN: 0-201-06196-1 OR 0201061961
ISBN13: 978-0-201-06196-3 OR 9780201061963
LCCN: QA76.76.O63 D4741 1989
bibdate: Wed Dec 15 10:38:09 1993
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/unix.bib
bibtimestamp: 1993.12.15 10:38:09 ???
ZMnumber: 0744.68006
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Samuel J. Leffler and Marshall Kirk McKusick and Michael J. Karels and John S. Quarterman
rawtitle: The Design and Implementation of the {4.3BSD UNIX} Operating System
TOC:
Part 1: Overview / 1 1: History and Goals / 3 1.1 History of the UNIX System / 3 Origins / 3 Research UNIX / 4 AT&T UNIX System III and System V / 6 Other Organizations / 7 Berkeley Software Distributions / 7 UNIX in the World / 8 1.2 BSD and Other Systems / 8 The Influence of the User Community / 9 1.3 Design Goals of 4BSD / 10 4.2BSD Design Goals / 11 4.3BSD Design Goals / 12 Future Berkeley Releases / 12 1.4 Release Engineering / 14 References / 15 2: Design Overview of 4.3BSD / 19 2.1 UNIX Facilities and the Kernel / 19 The Kernel / 20 2.2 Kernel Organization / 20 2.3 Kernel Services / 23 2.4 Process Management / 23 Signals / 25 Process Groups / 26 2.5 Memory Management / 26 BSD Memory-Management Design Decisions / 27 Memory Management Inside the Kernel / 28 2.6 I/O System / 29 Descriptors and I/O / 30 Descriptor Management / 31 Files / 32 Devices / 33 Socket IPC / 33 Scatter/Gather I/O / 34 2.7 Filesystem / 34 2.8 Devices / 37 2.9 Terminals / 38 2.10 Interprocess Communication / 38 2.11 Network Communication / 39 2.12 Network Implementation / 40 2.13 System Operation / 40 Exercises / 41 References / 41 3: Kernel Services / 43 3.1 Kernel Organization /43 System Activities / 43 Run-Time Organization / 44 System Processes / 45 Entry to the Kernel / 46 Return from the Kernel / 47 3.2 System Calls / 47 Result Handling / 47 Returning from a System Call / 48 3.3 Traps and Interrupts / 49 I/O Device Interrupts / 49 Software Interrupts / 50 3.4 Clock Interrupts / 50 Timeouts / 51 Process Scheduling / 53 3.5 Timing / 53 Real Time / 53 Adjusting the Time / 53 External Representation / 54 Interval Time / 55 Profiling / 55 3.6 Process Management / 55 3.7 User and Group Identifiers / 58 Host Identifier / 60 3.8 Resource Controls / 60 Process Priorities / 60 Resource Utilization / 61 Resource Limits / 61 Filesystem Quotas / 62 3.9 System Operation / 62 Accounting / 62 Exercises / 63 References / 64 Part 2: Processes / 67 4: Process Management / 69 4.1 Introduction / 69 Multiprogramming / 70 Scheduling / 71 4.2 Process State / 72 The Proc Structure / 72 The User Structure / 77 Memory / 79 The Text Structure / 79 4.3 Context Switching / 79 Process State / 80 Low-Level Context Switching / 80 Voluntary Context Switching / 81 Intraprocess Context Switching / 83 Synchronization / 84 4.4 Process Scheduling / 86 Calculations of Process Priority / 87 Process-Priority Routines / 88 Process Run Queues and Context Switching / 89 4.5 Process Creation / 91 4.6 Process Termination / 93 4.7 Signals / 94 Process Groups / 96 Comparison with Other Systems / 97 Changes to 4.3BSD Signals in POSIX / 99 Posting a Signal / 99 Delivering a Signal / 101 Job Control / 102 4.8 Process Debugging / 103 Exercises / 105 References / 107 5: Memory Management / 109 5.1 Terminology / 109 Processes and Memory / 110 Paging / 111 Replacement Algorithms / 112 Working-Set Model / 113 Swapping / 113 Secondary Storage / 114 Advantages of Virtual Memory / 114 Hardware Requirements for Virtual Memory / 114 5.2 Evolution of 4.3BSD Memory Management / 115 Version 7 UNIX / 115 UNIX 32V / 116 3BSD / 116 4.1BSD / 117 4.3BSD / 118 5.3 VAX Memory-Management Hardware / 118 VAX Virtual Address Space / 118 VAX Page Tables / 119 System-Address Translation / 120 User-Address Translation / 121 Page Faults / 122 Translation Buffers / 124 5.4 Management of Main Memory: The Core Map / 124 Physical-to-Virtual Translation / 126 Memory Free List / 126 Synchronization / 126 Text-Page Cache / 127 Core-Map Limits / 127 Memory-Allocation Routines / 127 5.5 Management of Swap Space / 128 5.6 Per-Process Resources / 129 4.3BSD Process Virtual Address Space / 129 Page Tables / 129 Types of Page-Table Entries / 131 Modified Pages / 134 Text Page Tables / 134 Swap Space / 134 5.7 Creation of a New Process / 136 Duplicating Kernel Resources / 136 Duplicating the User Address Space / 137 Implementation Issues / 138 Creating a New Process Without Copying / 138 5.8 Execution of a File / 140 5.9 Change Process Size / 142 5.10 Termination of a Process / 144 5.11 Demand Paging / 145 Fill-on-Demand Pages / 146 Fill-on-Demand Klustering / 146 Interaction with the Filesystem Cache / 147 Pagein of Swapped Pages / 147 5.12 Page Replacement / 149 Global CLOCK Algorithm / 150 The Paging Daemon. / 151 Paging Parameters / 151 Two-Handed Clock / 153 Operation of Pageout / 153 5.13 Swapping / 155 The Swapping Process / 156 Choosing a Process to Swap In / 156 Involuntary Swapping / 157 Choosing a Process to Swap Out / 158 Swapout / 158 Swapin / 159 Swapping of Text Images / 160 Exercises / 161 References / 163 Part 3: I/O System / 167 6: I/O System Overview / 169 6.1 I/O Mapping from User to Device / 169 Character Devices / 170 Block Devices / 171 Socket-Interface Buffering / 172 6.2 Descriptor Management and Services / 172 Open File Table / 173 Management of Descriptors / 175 Descriptor Locking / 177 Implementation of Locking / 178 Multiplexing I/O on Descriptors / 179 Implementation of Select / 181 Moving Data Inside the Kernel / 184 Exercises / 185 References / 186 7: The Filesystem / 187 7.1 Structure and Overview / 187 Directories / 187 Links / 189 Quotas / 191 7.2 Overview of the Internal Filesystem / 191 Allocating and Finding the Blocks on the Disk / 193 7.3 Internal Structure and Redesign / 195 New Filesystem Organization / 196 Optimizing Storage Utilization / 198 Filesystem Parameterization / 200 Layout Policies / 201 7.4 Filesystem Data Structures / 203 Inode Management / 205 Finding File Blocks / 206 File-Block Allocation / 207 7.5 Buffer Management / 208 Implementation of Buffer Management / 211 7.6 Quotas / 213 7.7 Allocation Mechanisms / 217 7.8 Translation of Filesystem Names / 219 Exercises / 221 References / 223 8: Device Drivers / 225 8.1 Overview / 225 8.2 Device Drivers / 227 I/O Queueing / 228 Interrupt Handling / 229 8.3 Block Devices / 229 8.4 Character Devices / 230 Raw Devices and Physical I/O / 231 Character-Oriented Devices / 233 Entry Points for Character Device Drivers / 233 8.5 Autoconfiguration / 234 Probing for Devices / 235 Attaching a Device / 236 Device Naming / 236 8.6 UNIBUS Devices / 237 The up Device Driver / 238 Autoconfiguration Support / 239 Logical-to-Device Mapping of I/O Requests / 242 I/O Strategy / 243 Disksort / 244 Drive-Positioning Algorithm / 245 Initiating an I/O Operation / 246 Interrupt Handling / 247 UNIBUS Adapter Support Routines / 249 8.7 MASSBUS Devices / 253 Autoconfiguration / 253 I/O Strategy / 253 Interrupt Handling / 254 Exercises / 256 9: Terminal Handling / 259 9.1 Terminal Processing Modes / 259 9.2 Line Disciplines / 260 9.3 User Interface / 262 9.4 The tty Structure / 263 9.5 Process Groups and Terminal Control / 265 9.6 C-lists / 266 9.7 RS-232 and Modem Control / 267 9.8 Terminal Operations / 268 Open / 268 Output Line Discipline / 268 Output Top Half / 270 Output Bottom Half / 271 Input Bottom Half / 271 Input Top Half / 273 The stop Routine / 273 The ioctl Routine / 274 Modem Transitions / 275 Closing Terminal Devices / 275 9.9 Other Line Disciplines / 276 Berknet / 276 Serial Line IP Discipline / 276 Graphics Tablet Discipline / 277 9.10 Summary / 277 Exercises / 277 References / 278 Part 4: Interprocess Communication / 279 10: Interprocess Communication / 281 10.1 Interprocess-Communication Model / 282 Using Sockets / 284 10.2 Implementation Structure and Overview / 288 10.3 Memory Management / 289 Mbufs / 289 Storage-Management Algorithms / 291 Mbuf Utility Routines / 292 10.4 Data Structures / 292 Communication Domains / 293 Sockets / 294 Socket Addresses / 296 10.5 Connection Setup / 298 10.6 Data Transfer / 300 Transmitting Data / 301 Receiving Data / 302 Passing Access Rights / 304 Access Rights in the UNIX Domain / 305 10.7 Socket Shutdown / 306 Exercises / 307 References / 309 11: Network Communication / 311 11.1 Internal Structure / 312 Data Flow / 312 Communication Protocols / 314 Network Interfaces / 315 11.2 Socket-to-Protocol Interface / 318 Protocol User-Request Routine / 318 Internal Requests / 321 Protocol Control-Output Routine / 322 11.3 Protocol-Protocol Interface / 322 proutput / 323 prinput / 323 prctlinput / 323 11.4 Protocol-Network-Interface Interface / 324 Packet Transmission / 324 Packet Reception / 325 11.5 Routing / 327 Routing Tables / 328 Routing Redirects / 329 Routing-Table Interface / 330 User-Level Routing Policies / 330 11.6 Buffering and Congestion Control / 331 Protocol Buffering Policies / 331 Queue Limiting / 332 11.7 Raw Sockets / 332 Control Blocks / 332 Input Processing / 333 Output Processing / 334 11.8 Additional Network Subsystem Topics / 334 Out-of-Band Data / 334 Address Resolution Protocol / 335 VAX UNIBUS Interfaces / 336 Trailer Protocols / 338 Exercises / 340 References / 341 12: Network Protocols / 343 12.1 DARPA Internet Network Protocols / 343 Internet Addresses / 345 Subnets / 346 Broadcast Addresses / 347 Internet Ports and Associations / 348 Protocol Control Blocks / 348 12.2 User Datagram Protocol (UDP) / 350 Initialization / 350 Output / 350 Input / 351 Control Operations / 352 12.3 Internet Protocol (IP) / 352 Output / 353 Input / 354 Forwarding / 356 12.4 Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) / 357 TCP Connection States / 358 Sequence Variables / 360 12.5 TCP Algorithms / 362 Timers / 363 Estimation of Round-Trip Time / 365 Connection Establishment / 366 Connection Shutdown / 367 12.6 TCP Input Processing / 368 12.7 TCP Output Processing / 371 Sending Data / 371 Avoidance of the Silly-Window Syndrome / 372 Avoidance of Small Packets / 373 Window Updates / 374 Retransmit State / 375 Source-Quench Processing and Congestion Control / 375 Slow Start / 376 Avoidance of Congestion with Slow Start / 377 12.8 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) / 378 12.9 ARPANET Host Interface / 380 12.10 Xerox Network Systems Communication Domain (XNS) / 381 XNS Control Operations / 383 12.11 Summary / 384 Creating a Communication Channel / 384 Sending and Receiving Data / 385 Terminating Data Transmission and/or Reception / 386 Exercises / 387 References / 389 Part 5: System Operation / 391 13: System Startup / 393 13.1 Overview / 393 13.2 Bootstrapping / 394 13.3 The boot Program / 394 VAX Console Media / 396 Kernel Initialization / 396 Assembly-Language Startup / 397 Machine-Dependent Initialization / 398 Message Buffer / 399 System Data Structures / 399 Memory Allocator / 400 Autoconfiguration / 400 Machine-Independent Initialization / 403 13.4 User-Level Initialization / 405 /etc/init / 406 /etc/rc / 406 /etc/getty / 407 /bin/login / 407 13.5 System Startup Topics / 407 Kernel Configuration / 408 System Shutdown and Autoreboot / 409 System Debugging / 410 Exercises / 410 References / 411 Glossary / 413 Index / 451

rawTOC:
Part 1: Overview / 1 \\ 1: History and Goals / 3 \\ 1.1 History of the UNIX System / 3 \\ Origins / 3 \\ Research UNIX / 4 \\ AT\&T UNIX System III and System V / 6 \\ Other Organizations / 7 \\ Berkeley Software Distributions / 7 \\ UNIX in the World / 8 \\ 1.2 BSD and Other Systems / 8 \\ The Influence of the User Community / 9 \\ 1.3 Design Goals of 4BSD / 10 \\ 4.2BSD Design Goals / 11 \\ 4.3BSD Design Goals / 12 \\ Future Berkeley Releases / 12 \\ 1.4 Release Engineering / 14 \\ References / 15 \\ 2: Design Overview of 4.3BSD / 19 \\ 2.1 UNIX Facilities and the Kernel / 19 \\ The Kernel / 20 \\ 2.2 Kernel Organization / 20 \\ 2.3 Kernel Services / 23 \\ 2.4 Process Management / 23 \\ Signals / 25 \\ Process Groups / 26 \\ 2.5 Memory Management / 26 \\ BSD Memory-Management Design Decisions / 27 \\ Memory Management Inside the Kernel / 28 \\ 2.6 I/O System / 29 \\ Descriptors and I/O / 30 \\ Descriptor Management / 31 \\ Files / 32 \\ Devices / 33 \\ Socket IPC / 33 \\ Scatter/Gather I/O / 34 \\ 2.7 Filesystem / 34 \\ 2.8 Devices / 37 \\ 2.9 Terminals / 38 \\ 2.10 Interprocess Communication / 38 \\ 2.11 Network Communication / 39 \\ 2.12 Network Implementation / 40 \\ 2.13 System Operation / 40 \\ Exercises / 41 \\ References / 41 \\ 3: Kernel Services / 43 \\ 3.1 Kernel Organization /43 \\ System Activities / 43 \\ Run-Time Organization / 44 \\ System Processes / 45 \\ Entry to the Kernel / 46 \\ Return from the Kernel / 47 \\ 3.2 System Calls / 47 \\ Result Handling / 47 \\ Returning from a System Call / 48 \\ 3.3 Traps and Interrupts / 49 \\ I/O Device Interrupts / 49 \\ Software Interrupts / 50 \\ 3.4 Clock Interrupts / 50 \\ Timeouts / 51 \\ Process Scheduling / 53 \\ 3.5 Timing / 53 \\ Real Time / 53 \\ Adjusting the Time / 53 \\ External Representation / 54 \\ Interval Time / 55 \\ Profiling / 55 \\ 3.6 Process Management / 55 \\ 3.7 User and Group Identifiers / 58 \\ Host Identifier / 60 \\ 3.8 Resource Controls / 60 \\ Process Priorities / 60 \\ Resource Utilization / 61 \\ Resource Limits / 61 \\ Filesystem Quotas / 62 \\ 3.9 System Operation / 62 \\ Accounting / 62 \\ Exercises / 63 \\ References / 64 \\ Part 2: Processes / 67 \\ 4: Process Management / 69 \\ 4.1 Introduction / 69 \\ Multiprogramming / 70 \\ Scheduling / 71 \\ 4.2 Process State / 72 \\ The Proc Structure / 72 \\ The User Structure / 77 \\ Memory / 79 \\ The Text Structure / 79 \\ 4.3 Context Switching / 79 \\ Process State / 80 \\ Low-Level Context Switching / 80 \\ Voluntary Context Switching / 81 \\ Intraprocess Context Switching / 83 \\ Synchronization / 84 \\ 4.4 Process Scheduling / 86 \\ Calculations of Process Priority / 87 \\ Process-Priority Routines / 88 \\ Process Run Queues and Context Switching / 89 \\ 4.5 Process Creation / 91 \\ 4.6 Process Termination / 93 \\ 4.7 Signals / 94 \\ Process Groups / 96 \\ Comparison with Other Systems / 97 \\ Changes to 4.3BSD Signals in POSIX / 99 \\ Posting a Signal / 99 \\ Delivering a Signal / 101 \\ Job Control / 102 \\ 4.8 Process Debugging / 103 \\ Exercises / 105 \\ References / 107 \\ 5: Memory Management / 109 \\ 5.1 Terminology / 109 \\ Processes and Memory / 110 \\ Paging / 111 \\ Replacement Algorithms / 112 \\ Working-Set Model / 113 \\ Swapping / 113 \\ Secondary Storage / 114 \\ Advantages of Virtual Memory / 114 \\ Hardware Requirements for Virtual Memory / 114 \\ 5.2 Evolution of 4.3BSD Memory Management / 115 \\ Version 7 UNIX / 115 \\ UNIX 32V / 116 \\ 3BSD / 116 \\ 4.1BSD / 117 \\ 4.3BSD / 118 \\ 5.3 VAX Memory-Management Hardware / 118 \\ VAX Virtual Address Space / 118 \\ VAX Page Tables / 119 \\ System-Address Translation / 120 \\ User-Address Translation / 121 \\ Page Faults / 122 \\ Translation Buffers / 124 \\ 5.4 Management of Main Memory: The Core Map / 124 \\ Physical-to-Virtual Translation / 126 \\ Memory Free List / 126 \\ Synchronization / 126 \\ Text-Page Cache / 127 \\ Core-Map Limits / 127 \\ Memory-Allocation Routines / 127 \\ 5.5 Management of Swap Space / 128 \\ 5.6 Per-Process Resources / 129 \\ 4.3BSD Process Virtual Address Space / 129 \\ Page Tables / 129 \\ Types of Page-Table Entries / 131 \\ Modified Pages / 134 \\ Text Page Tables / 134 \\ Swap Space / 134 \\ 5.7 Creation of a New Process / 136 \\ Duplicating Kernel Resources / 136 \\ Duplicating the User Address Space / 137 \\ Implementation Issues / 138 \\ Creating a New Process Without Copying / 138 \\ 5.8 Execution of a File / 140 \\ 5.9 Change Process Size / 142 \\ 5.10 Termination of a Process / 144 \\ 5.11 Demand Paging / 145 \\ Fill-on-Demand Pages / 146 \\ Fill-on-Demand Klustering / 146 \\ Interaction with the Filesystem Cache / 147 \\ Pagein of Swapped Pages / 147 \\ 5.12 Page Replacement / 149 \\ Global CLOCK Algorithm / 150 \\ The Paging Daemon. / 151 \\ Paging Parameters / 151 \\ Two-Handed Clock / 153 \\ Operation of Pageout / 153 \\ 5.13 Swapping / 155 \\ The Swapping Process / 156 \\ Choosing a Process to Swap In / 156 \\ Involuntary Swapping / 157 \\ Choosing a Process to Swap Out / 158 \\ Swapout / 158 \\ Swapin / 159 \\ Swapping of Text Images / 160 \\ Exercises / 161 \\ References / 163 \\ Part 3: I/O System / 167 \\ 6: I/O System Overview / 169 \\ 6.1 I/O Mapping from User to Device / 169 \\ Character Devices / 170 \\ Block Devices / 171 \\ Socket-Interface Buffering / 172 \\ 6.2 Descriptor Management and Services / 172 \\ Open File Table / 173 \\ Management of Descriptors / 175 \\ Descriptor Locking / 177 \\ Implementation of Locking / 178 \\ Multiplexing I/O on Descriptors / 179 \\ Implementation of Select / 181 \\ Moving Data Inside the Kernel / 184 \\ Exercises / 185 \\ References / 186 \\ 7: The Filesystem / 187 \\ 7.1 Structure and Overview / 187 \\ Directories / 187 \\ Links / 189 \\ Quotas / 191 \\ 7.2 Overview of the Internal Filesystem / 191 \\ Allocating and Finding the Blocks on the Disk / 193 \\ 7.3 Internal Structure and Redesign / 195 \\ New Filesystem Organization / 196 \\ Optimizing Storage Utilization / 198 \\ Filesystem Parameterization / 200 \\ Layout Policies / 201 \\ 7.4 Filesystem Data Structures / 203 \\ Inode Management / 205 \\ Finding File Blocks / 206 \\ File-Block Allocation / 207 \\ 7.5 Buffer Management / 208 \\ Implementation of Buffer Management / 211 \\ 7.6 Quotas / 213 \\ 7.7 Allocation Mechanisms / 217 \\ 7.8 Translation of Filesystem Names / 219 \\ Exercises / 221 \\ References / 223 \\ 8: Device Drivers / 225 \\ 8.1 Overview / 225 \\ 8.2 Device Drivers / 227 \\ I/O Queueing / 228 \\ Interrupt Handling / 229 \\ 8.3 Block Devices / 229 \\ 8.4 Character Devices / 230 \\ Raw Devices and Physical I/O / 231 \\ Character-Oriented Devices / 233 \\ Entry Points for Character Device Drivers / 233 \\ 8.5 Autoconfiguration / 234 \\ Probing for Devices / 235 \\ Attaching a Device / 236 \\ Device Naming / 236 \\ 8.6 UNIBUS Devices / 237 \\ The up Device Driver / 238 \\ Autoconfiguration Support / 239 \\ Logical-to-Device Mapping of I/O Requests / 242 \\ I/O Strategy / 243 \\ Disksort / 244 \\ Drive-Positioning Algorithm / 245 \\ Initiating an I/O Operation / 246 \\ Interrupt Handling / 247 \\ UNIBUS Adapter Support Routines / 249 \\ 8.7 MASSBUS Devices / 253 \\ Autoconfiguration / 253 \\ I/O Strategy / 253 \\ Interrupt Handling / 254 \\ Exercises / 256 \\ 9: Terminal Handling / 259 \\ 9.1 Terminal Processing Modes / 259 \\ 9.2 Line Disciplines / 260 \\ 9.3 User Interface / 262 \\ 9.4 The tty Structure / 263 \\ 9.5 Process Groups and Terminal Control / 265 \\ 9.6 C-lists / 266 \\ 9.7 RS-232 and Modem Control / 267 \\ 9.8 Terminal Operations / 268 \\ Open / 268 \\ Output Line Discipline / 268 \\ Output Top Half / 270 \\ Output Bottom Half / 271 \\ Input Bottom Half / 271 \\ Input Top Half / 273 \\ The stop Routine / 273 \\ The ioctl Routine / 274 \\ Modem Transitions / 275 \\ Closing Terminal Devices / 275 \\ 9.9 Other Line Disciplines / 276 \\ Berknet / 276 \\ Serial Line IP Discipline / 276 \\ Graphics Tablet Discipline / 277 \\ 9.10 Summary / 277 \\ Exercises / 277 \\ References / 278 \\ Part 4: Interprocess Communication / 279 \\ 10: Interprocess Communication / 281 \\ 10.1 Interprocess-Communication Model / 282 \\ Using Sockets / 284 \\ 10.2 Implementation Structure and Overview / 288 \\ 10.3 Memory Management / 289 \\ Mbufs / 289 \\ Storage-Management Algorithms / 291 \\ Mbuf Utility Routines / 292 \\ 10.4 Data Structures / 292 \\ Communication Domains / 293 \\ Sockets / 294 \\ Socket Addresses / 296 \\ 10.5 Connection Setup / 298 \\ 10.6 Data Transfer / 300 \\ Transmitting Data / 301 \\ Receiving Data / 302 \\ Passing Access Rights / 304 \\ Access Rights in the UNIX Domain / 305 \\ 10.7 Socket Shutdown / 306 \\ Exercises / 307 \\ References / 309 \\ 11: Network Communication / 311 \\ 11.1 Internal Structure / 312 \\ Data Flow / 312 \\ Communication Protocols / 314 \\ Network Interfaces / 315 \\ 11.2 Socket-to-Protocol Interface / 318 \\ Protocol User-Request Routine / 318 \\ Internal Requests / 321 \\ Protocol Control-Output Routine / 322 \\ 11.3 Protocol-Protocol Interface / 322 \\ proutput / 323 \\ prinput / 323 \\ prctlinput / 323 \\ 11.4 Protocol-Network-Interface Interface / 324 \\ Packet Transmission / 324 \\ Packet Reception / 325 \\ 11.5 Routing / 327 \\ Routing Tables / 328 \\ Routing Redirects / 329 \\ Routing-Table Interface / 330 \\ User-Level Routing Policies / 330 \\ 11.6 Buffering and Congestion Control / 331 \\ Protocol Buffering Policies / 331 \\ Queue Limiting / 332 \\ 11.7 Raw Sockets / 332 \\ Control Blocks / 332 \\ Input Processing / 333 \\ Output Processing / 334 \\ 11.8 Additional Network Subsystem Topics / 334 \\ Out-of-Band Data / 334 \\ Address Resolution Protocol / 335 \\ VAX UNIBUS Interfaces / 336 \\ Trailer Protocols / 338 \\ Exercises / 340 \\ References / 341 \\ 12: Network Protocols / 343 \\ 12.1 DARPA Internet Network Protocols / 343 \\ Internet Addresses / 345 \\ Subnets / 346 \\ Broadcast Addresses / 347 \\ Internet Ports and Associations / 348 \\ Protocol Control Blocks / 348 \\ 12.2 User Datagram Protocol (UDP) / 350 \\ Initialization / 350 \\ Output / 350 \\ Input / 351 \\ Control Operations / 352 \\ 12.3 Internet Protocol (IP) / 352 \\ Output / 353 \\ Input / 354 \\ Forwarding / 356 \\ 12.4 Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) / 357 \\ TCP Connection States / 358 \\ Sequence Variables / 360 \\ 12.5 TCP Algorithms / 362 \\ Timers / 363 \\ Estimation of Round-Trip Time / 365 \\ Connection Establishment / 366 \\ Connection Shutdown / 367 \\ 12.6 TCP Input Processing / 368 \\ 12.7 TCP Output Processing / 371 \\ Sending Data / 371 \\ Avoidance of the Silly-Window Syndrome / 372 \\ Avoidance of Small Packets / 373 \\ Window Updates / 374 \\ Retransmit State / 375 \\ Source-Quench Processing and Congestion Control / 375 \\ Slow Start / 376 \\ Avoidance of Congestion with Slow Start / 377 \\ 12.8 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) / 378 \\ 12.9 ARPANET Host Interface / 380 \\ 12.10 Xerox Network Systems Communication Domain (XNS) / 381 \\ XNS Control Operations / 383 \\ 12.11 Summary / 384 \\ Creating a Communication Channel / 384 \\ Sending and Receiving Data / 385 \\ Terminating Data Transmission and/or Reception / 386 \\ Exercises / 387 \\ References / 389 \\ Part 5: System Operation / 391 \\ 13: System Startup / 393 \\ 13.1 Overview / 393 \\ 13.2 Bootstrapping / 394 \\ 13.3 The boot Program / 394 \\ VAX Console Media / 396 \\ Kernel Initialization / 396 \\ Assembly-Language Startup / 397 \\ Machine-Dependent Initialization / 398 \\ Message Buffer / 399 \\ System Data Structures / 399 \\ Memory Allocator / 400 \\ Autoconfiguration / 400 \\ Machine-Independent Initialization / 403 \\ 13.4 User-Level Initialization / 405 \\ /etc/init / 406 \\ /etc/rc / 406 \\ /etc/getty / 407 \\ /bin/login / 407 \\ 13.5 System Startup Topics / 407 \\ Kernel Configuration / 408 \\ System Shutdown and Autoreboot / 409 \\ System Debugging / 410 \\ Exercises / 410 \\ References / 411 \\ Glossary / 413 \\ Index / 451

entry:
@Book{Leffler:1989:DIU,
  author =       "Samuel J. Leffler and Marshall Kirk McKusick and
                 Michael J. Karels and John S. Quarterman",
  title =        "The Design and Implementation of the {4.3BSD UNIX}
                 Operating System",
  publisher =    pub-AW,
  address =      pub-AW:adr,
  pages =        "xxii + 471",
  year =         "1989",
  ISBN =         "0-201-06196-1",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-201-06196-3",
  LCCN =         "QA76.76.O63 D4741 1989",
  bibdate =      "Wed Dec 15 10:38:09 1993",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/unix.bib",
  ZMnumber =     "0744.68006",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  tableofcontents = "Part 1: Overview / 1 \\
                 1: History and Goals / 3 \\
                 1.1 History of the UNIX System / 3 \\
                 Origins / 3 \\
                 Research UNIX / 4 \\
                 AT\&T UNIX System III and System V / 6 \\
                 Other Organizations / 7 \\
                 Berkeley Software Distributions / 7 \\
                 UNIX in the World / 8 \\
                 1.2 BSD and Other Systems / 8 \\
                 The Influence of the User Community / 9 \\
                 1.3 Design Goals of 4BSD / 10 \\
                 4.2BSD Design Goals / 11 \\
                 4.3BSD Design Goals / 12 \\
                 Future Berkeley Releases / 12 \\
                 1.4 Release Engineering / 14 \\
                 References / 15 \\
                 2: Design Overview of 4.3BSD / 19 \\
                 2.1 UNIX Facilities and the Kernel / 19 \\
                 The Kernel / 20 \\
                 2.2 Kernel Organization / 20 \\
                 2.3 Kernel Services / 23 \\
                 2.4 Process Management / 23 \\
                 Signals / 25 \\
                 Process Groups / 26 \\
                 2.5 Memory Management / 26 \\
                 BSD Memory-Management Design Decisions / 27 \\
                 Memory Management Inside the Kernel / 28 \\
                 2.6 I/O System / 29 \\
                 Descriptors and I/O / 30 \\
                 Descriptor Management / 31 \\
                 Files / 32 \\
                 Devices / 33 \\
                 Socket IPC / 33 \\
                 Scatter/Gather I/O / 34 \\
                 2.7 Filesystem / 34 \\
                 2.8 Devices / 37 \\
                 2.9 Terminals / 38 \\
                 2.10 Interprocess Communication / 38 \\
                 2.11 Network Communication / 39 \\
                 2.12 Network Implementation / 40 \\
                 2.13 System Operation / 40 \\
                 Exercises / 41 \\
                 References / 41 \\
                 3: Kernel Services / 43 \\
                 3.1 Kernel Organization /43 \\
                 System Activities / 43 \\
                 Run-Time Organization / 44 \\
                 System Processes / 45 \\
                 Entry to the Kernel / 46 \\
                 Return from the Kernel / 47 \\
                 3.2 System Calls / 47 \\
                 Result Handling / 47 \\
                 Returning from a System Call / 48 \\
                 3.3 Traps and Interrupts / 49 \\
                 I/O Device Interrupts / 49 \\
                 Software Interrupts / 50 \\
                 3.4 Clock Interrupts / 50 \\
                 Timeouts / 51 \\
                 Process Scheduling / 53 \\
                 3.5 Timing / 53 \\
                 Real Time / 53 \\
                 Adjusting the Time / 53 \\
                 External Representation / 54 \\
                 Interval Time / 55 \\
                 Profiling / 55 \\
                 3.6 Process Management / 55 \\
                 3.7 User and Group Identifiers / 58 \\
                 Host Identifier / 60 \\
                 3.8 Resource Controls / 60 \\
                 Process Priorities / 60 \\
                 Resource Utilization / 61 \\
                 Resource Limits / 61 \\
                 Filesystem Quotas / 62 \\
                 3.9 System Operation / 62 \\
                 Accounting / 62 \\
                 Exercises / 63 \\
                 References / 64 \\
                 Part 2: Processes / 67 \\
                 4: Process Management / 69 \\
                 4.1 Introduction / 69 \\
                 Multiprogramming / 70 \\
                 Scheduling / 71 \\
                 4.2 Process State / 72 \\
                 The Proc Structure / 72 \\
                 The User Structure / 77 \\
                 Memory / 79 \\
                 The Text Structure / 79 \\
                 4.3 Context Switching / 79 \\
                 Process State / 80 \\
                 Low-Level Context Switching / 80 \\
                 Voluntary Context Switching / 81 \\
                 Intraprocess Context Switching / 83 \\
                 Synchronization / 84 \\
                 4.4 Process Scheduling / 86 \\
                 Calculations of Process Priority / 87 \\
                 Process-Priority Routines / 88 \\
                 Process Run Queues and Context Switching / 89 \\
                 4.5 Process Creation / 91 \\
                 4.6 Process Termination / 93 \\
                 4.7 Signals / 94 \\
                 Process Groups / 96 \\
                 Comparison with Other Systems / 97 \\
                 Changes to 4.3BSD Signals in POSIX / 99 \\
                 Posting a Signal / 99 \\
                 Delivering a Signal / 101 \\
                 Job Control / 102 \\
                 4.8 Process Debugging / 103 \\
                 Exercises / 105 \\
                 References / 107 \\
                 5: Memory Management / 109 \\
                 5.1 Terminology / 109 \\
                 Processes and Memory / 110 \\
                 Paging / 111 \\
                 Replacement Algorithms / 112 \\
                 Working-Set Model / 113 \\
                 Swapping / 113 \\
                 Secondary Storage / 114 \\
                 Advantages of Virtual Memory / 114 \\
                 Hardware Requirements for Virtual Memory / 114 \\
                 5.2 Evolution of 4.3BSD Memory Management / 115 \\
                 Version 7 UNIX / 115 \\
                 UNIX 32V / 116 \\
                 3BSD / 116 \\
                 4.1BSD / 117 \\
                 4.3BSD / 118 \\
                 5.3 VAX Memory-Management Hardware / 118 \\
                 VAX Virtual Address Space / 118 \\
                 VAX Page Tables / 119 \\
                 System-Address Translation / 120 \\
                 User-Address Translation / 121 \\
                 Page Faults / 122 \\
                 Translation Buffers / 124 \\
                 5.4 Management of Main Memory: The Core Map / 124 \\
                 Physical-to-Virtual Translation / 126 \\
                 Memory Free List / 126 \\
                 Synchronization / 126 \\
                 Text-Page Cache / 127 \\
                 Core-Map Limits / 127 \\
                 Memory-Allocation Routines / 127 \\
                 5.5 Management of Swap Space / 128 \\
                 5.6 Per-Process Resources / 129 \\
                 4.3BSD Process Virtual Address Space / 129 \\
                 Page Tables / 129 \\
                 Types of Page-Table Entries / 131 \\
                 Modified Pages / 134 \\
                 Text Page Tables / 134 \\
                 Swap Space / 134 \\
                 5.7 Creation of a New Process / 136 \\
                 Duplicating Kernel Resources / 136 \\
                 Duplicating the User Address Space / 137 \\
                 Implementation Issues / 138 \\
                 Creating a New Process Without Copying / 138 \\
                 5.8 Execution of a File / 140 \\
                 5.9 Change Process Size / 142 \\
                 5.10 Termination of a Process / 144 \\
                 5.11 Demand Paging / 145 \\
                 Fill-on-Demand Pages / 146 \\
                 Fill-on-Demand Klustering / 146 \\
                 Interaction with the Filesystem Cache / 147 \\
                 Pagein of Swapped Pages / 147 \\
                 5.12 Page Replacement / 149 \\
                 Global CLOCK Algorithm / 150 \\
                 The Paging Daemon. / 151 \\
                 Paging Parameters / 151 \\
                 Two-Handed Clock / 153 \\
                 Operation of Pageout / 153 \\
                 5.13 Swapping / 155 \\
                 The Swapping Process / 156 \\
                 Choosing a Process to Swap In / 156 \\
                 Involuntary Swapping / 157 \\
                 Choosing a Process to Swap Out / 158 \\
                 Swapout / 158 \\
                 Swapin / 159 \\
                 Swapping of Text Images / 160 \\
                 Exercises / 161 \\
                 References / 163 \\
                 Part 3: I/O System / 167 \\
                 6: I/O System Overview / 169 \\
                 6.1 I/O Mapping from User to Device / 169 \\
                 Character Devices / 170 \\
                 Block Devices / 171 \\
                 Socket-Interface Buffering / 172 \\
                 6.2 Descriptor Management and Services / 172 \\
                 Open File Table / 173 \\
                 Management of Descriptors / 175 \\
                 Descriptor Locking / 177 \\
                 Implementation of Locking / 178 \\
                 Multiplexing I/O on Descriptors / 179 \\
                 Implementation of Select / 181 \\
                 Moving Data Inside the Kernel / 184 \\
                 Exercises / 185 \\
                 References / 186 \\
                 7: The Filesystem / 187 \\
                 7.1 Structure and Overview / 187 \\
                 Directories / 187 \\
                 Links / 189 \\
                 Quotas / 191 \\
                 7.2 Overview of the Internal Filesystem / 191 \\
                 Allocating and Finding the Blocks on the Disk / 193 \\
                 7.3 Internal Structure and Redesign / 195 \\
                 New Filesystem Organization / 196 \\
                 Optimizing Storage Utilization / 198 \\
                 Filesystem Parameterization / 200 \\
                 Layout Policies / 201 \\
                 7.4 Filesystem Data Structures / 203 \\
                 Inode Management / 205 \\
                 Finding File Blocks / 206 \\
                 File-Block Allocation / 207 \\
                 7.5 Buffer Management / 208 \\
                 Implementation of Buffer Management / 211 \\
                 7.6 Quotas / 213 \\
                 7.7 Allocation Mechanisms / 217 \\
                 7.8 Translation of Filesystem Names / 219 \\
                 Exercises / 221 \\
                 References / 223 \\
                 8: Device Drivers / 225 \\
                 8.1 Overview / 225 \\
                 8.2 Device Drivers / 227 \\
                 I/O Queueing / 228 \\
                 Interrupt Handling / 229 \\
                 8.3 Block Devices / 229 \\
                 8.4 Character Devices / 230 \\
                 Raw Devices and Physical I/O / 231 \\
                 Character-Oriented Devices / 233 \\
                 Entry Points for Character Device Drivers / 233 \\
                 8.5 Autoconfiguration / 234 \\
                 Probing for Devices / 235 \\
                 Attaching a Device / 236 \\
                 Device Naming / 236 \\
                 8.6 UNIBUS Devices / 237 \\
                 The up Device Driver / 238 \\
                 Autoconfiguration Support / 239 \\
                 Logical-to-Device Mapping of I/O Requests / 242 \\
                 I/O Strategy / 243 \\
                 Disksort / 244 \\
                 Drive-Positioning Algorithm / 245 \\
                 Initiating an I/O Operation / 246 \\
                 Interrupt Handling / 247 \\
                 UNIBUS Adapter Support Routines / 249 \\
                 8.7 MASSBUS Devices / 253 \\
                 Autoconfiguration / 253 \\
                 I/O Strategy / 253 \\
                 Interrupt Handling / 254 \\
                 Exercises / 256 \\
                 9: Terminal Handling / 259 \\
                 9.1 Terminal Processing Modes / 259 \\
                 9.2 Line Disciplines / 260 \\
                 9.3 User Interface / 262 \\
                 9.4 The tty Structure / 263 \\
                 9.5 Process Groups and Terminal Control / 265 \\
                 9.6 C-lists / 266 \\
                 9.7 RS-232 and Modem Control / 267 \\
                 9.8 Terminal Operations / 268 \\
                 Open / 268 \\
                 Output Line Discipline / 268 \\
                 Output Top Half / 270 \\
                 Output Bottom Half / 271 \\
                 Input Bottom Half / 271 \\
                 Input Top Half / 273 \\
                 The stop Routine / 273 \\
                 The ioctl Routine / 274 \\
                 Modem Transitions / 275 \\
                 Closing Terminal Devices / 275 \\
                 9.9 Other Line Disciplines / 276 \\
                 Berknet / 276 \\
                 Serial Line IP Discipline / 276 \\
                 Graphics Tablet Discipline / 277 \\
                 9.10 Summary / 277 \\
                 Exercises / 277 \\
                 References / 278 \\
                 Part 4: Interprocess Communication / 279 \\
                 10: Interprocess Communication / 281 \\
                 10.1 Interprocess-Communication Model / 282 \\
                 Using Sockets / 284 \\
                 10.2 Implementation Structure and Overview / 288 \\
                 10.3 Memory Management / 289 \\
                 Mbufs / 289 \\
                 Storage-Management Algorithms / 291 \\
                 Mbuf Utility Routines / 292 \\
                 10.4 Data Structures / 292 \\
                 Communication Domains / 293 \\
                 Sockets / 294 \\
                 Socket Addresses / 296 \\
                 10.5 Connection Setup / 298 \\
                 10.6 Data Transfer / 300 \\
                 Transmitting Data / 301 \\
                 Receiving Data / 302 \\
                 Passing Access Rights / 304 \\
                 Access Rights in the UNIX Domain / 305 \\
                 10.7 Socket Shutdown / 306 \\
                 Exercises / 307 \\
                 References / 309 \\
                 11: Network Communication / 311 \\
                 11.1 Internal Structure / 312 \\
                 Data Flow / 312 \\
                 Communication Protocols / 314 \\
                 Network Interfaces / 315 \\
                 11.2 Socket-to-Protocol Interface / 318 \\
                 Protocol User-Request Routine / 318 \\
                 Internal Requests / 321 \\
                 Protocol Control-Output Routine / 322 \\
                 11.3 Protocol-Protocol Interface / 322 \\
                 proutput / 323 \\
                 prinput / 323 \\
                 prctlinput / 323 \\
                 11.4 Protocol-Network-Interface Interface / 324 \\
                 Packet Transmission / 324 \\
                 Packet Reception / 325 \\
                 11.5 Routing / 327 \\
                 Routing Tables / 328 \\
                 Routing Redirects / 329 \\
                 Routing-Table Interface / 330 \\
                 User-Level Routing Policies / 330 \\
                 11.6 Buffering and Congestion Control / 331 \\
                 Protocol Buffering Policies / 331 \\
                 Queue Limiting / 332 \\
                 11.7 Raw Sockets / 332 \\
                 Control Blocks / 332 \\
                 Input Processing / 333 \\
                 Output Processing / 334 \\
                 11.8 Additional Network Subsystem Topics / 334 \\
                 Out-of-Band Data / 334 \\
                 Address Resolution Protocol / 335 \\
                 VAX UNIBUS Interfaces / 336 \\
                 Trailer Protocols / 338 \\
                 Exercises / 340 \\
                 References / 341 \\
                 12: Network Protocols / 343 \\
                 12.1 DARPA Internet Network Protocols / 343 \\
                 Internet Addresses / 345 \\
                 Subnets / 346 \\
                 Broadcast Addresses / 347 \\
                 Internet Ports and Associations / 348 \\
                 Protocol Control Blocks / 348 \\
                 12.2 User Datagram Protocol (UDP) / 350 \\
                 Initialization / 350 \\
                 Output / 350 \\
                 Input / 351 \\
                 Control Operations / 352 \\
                 12.3 Internet Protocol (IP) / 352 \\
                 Output / 353 \\
                 Input / 354 \\
                 Forwarding / 356 \\
                 12.4 Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) / 357 \\
                 TCP Connection States / 358 \\
                 Sequence Variables / 360 \\
                 12.5 TCP Algorithms / 362 \\
                 Timers / 363 \\
                 Estimation of Round-Trip Time / 365 \\
                 Connection Establishment / 366 \\
                 Connection Shutdown / 367 \\
                 12.6 TCP Input Processing / 368 \\
                 12.7 TCP Output Processing / 371 \\
                 Sending Data / 371 \\
                 Avoidance of the Silly-Window Syndrome / 372 \\
                 Avoidance of Small Packets / 373 \\
                 Window Updates / 374 \\
                 Retransmit State / 375 \\
                 Source-Quench Processing and Congestion Control / 375
                 \\
                 Slow Start / 376 \\
                 Avoidance of Congestion with Slow Start / 377 \\
                 12.8 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) / 378 \\
                 12.9 ARPANET Host Interface / 380 \\
                 12.10 Xerox Network Systems Communication Domain (XNS)
                 / 381 \\
                 XNS Control Operations / 383 \\
                 12.11 Summary / 384 \\
                 Creating a Communication Channel / 384 \\
                 Sending and Receiving Data / 385 \\
                 Terminating Data Transmission and/or Reception / 386
                 \\
                 Exercises / 387 \\
                 References / 389 \\
                 Part 5: System Operation / 391 \\
                 13: System Startup / 393 \\
                 13.1 Overview / 393 \\
                 13.2 Bootstrapping / 394 \\
                 13.3 The boot Program / 394 \\
                 VAX Console Media / 396 \\
                 Kernel Initialization / 396 \\
                 Assembly-Language Startup / 397 \\
                 Machine-Dependent Initialization / 398 \\
                 Message Buffer / 399 \\
                 System Data Structures / 399 \\
                 Memory Allocator / 400 \\
                 Autoconfiguration / 400 \\
                 Machine-Independent Initialization / 403 \\
                 13.4 User-Level Initialization / 405 \\
                 /etc/init / 406 \\
                 /etc/rc / 406 \\
                 /etc/getty / 407 \\
                 /bin/login / 407 \\
                 13.5 System Startup Topics / 407 \\
                 Kernel Configuration / 408 \\
                 System Shutdown and Autoreboot / 409 \\
                 System Debugging / 410 \\
                 Exercises / 410 \\
                 References / 411 \\
                 Glossary / 413 \\
                 Index / 451",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lehey:2003:CFD
author: Greg Lehey
title: The Complete FreeBSD: Documentation from the Source
publisher: pub-ORCP
address: pub-ORCP:adr
edition: Fourth
pages: xxxiii + 679
year: 2003
ISBN: 0-596-00516-4 (paperback), 0-596-80213-7 (e-book) OR 0596005164 (paperback), 0596802137 (ebook)
LCCN: QA76.76.O63 L43 2003
bibdate: Tue May 13 15:31:58 2003
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/unix.bib
bibtimestamp: 2003.05.13 15:31:58 ???
URL: http://press.oreilly.com/commpress.html; http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/cfreebsd/desc.html
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Greg Lehey
rawtitle: The Complete {FreeBSD}: Documentation from the Source
ISBN13:
978-0-596-00516-0 (paperback), 978-0-596-80213-4 (e-book) OR 9780596005160 (paperback), 9780596802134 (ebook)

abstract:
FreeBSD is by far the most popular version of BSD, the legendary operating system that has contributed a great deal to every version of Unix in use today (including Mac OS X). Originally a community effort by the University of California at Berkeley, FreeBSD was aimed at making Unix a little friendlier and easier to use. By the time other free operating systems came along, BSD was firmly established and very reliable. And it continues to be today. For seven years, the FreeBSD community has relied on Greg Lehey's classic, booktitle The Complete FreeBSD, to guide them through its configuration and ldots 

TOC:
Foreword / xxv Preface / xxvii 1. Introduction / 1 2: Before you install / 25 3: Quick installation / 47 4: Shared OS installation / 51 5: Installing FreeBSD / 59 6: Post-installation configuration / 91 7: The tools of the trade / 111 8: Taking control / 143 9: The Ports Collection / 167 10: File systems and devices / 181 11: Disks / 199 12: The Vinum Volume Manager / 221 13: Writing CD-Rs / 243 14: Tapes, backups and floppy disks / 251 15: Printers / 263 16: Networks and the Internet / 277 17: Configuring the local network / 297 18: Connecting to the Internet / 315 19: Serial communications / 325 20: Configuring PPP / 339 21: The Domain Name Service / 363 22: Firewalls, IP aliasing and proxies / 385 23: Network debugging / 401 24: Basic network access: clients / 417 25: Basic network access: servers / 447 26: Electronic mail: clients / 471 27: Electronic mail: servers / 491 28: XFree86 in depth / 507 29: Starting and stopping the system / 527 30: FreeBSD configuration files / 551 31: Keeping up to date / 581 32: Updating the system software / 593 33: Custom kernels / 607 A: Bibliography / 627 B: The evolution of FreeBSD / 633 Index

rawabstract:
FreeBSD is by far the most popular version of BSD, the legendary operating system that has contributed a great deal to every version of Unix in use today (including Mac OS X). Originally a community effort by the University of California at Berkeley, FreeBSD was aimed at making Unix a little friendlier and easier to use. By the time other free operating systems came along, BSD was firmly established and very reliable. And it continues to be today. For seven years, the FreeBSD community has relied on Greg Lehey's classic, \booktitle{The Complete FreeBSD}, to guide them through its configuration and \ldots{}

rawTOC:
Foreword / xxv \\ Preface / xxvii \\ 1. Introduction / 1 \\ 2: Before you install / 25 \\ 3: Quick installation / 47 \\ 4: Shared OS installation / 51 \\ 5: Installing FreeBSD / 59 \\ 6: Post-installation configuration / 91 \\ 7: The tools of the trade / 111 \\ 8: Taking control / 143 \\ 9: The Ports Collection / 167 \\ 10: File systems and devices / 181 \\ 11: Disks / 199 \\ 12: The Vinum Volume Manager / 221 \\ 13: Writing CD-Rs / 243 \\ 14: Tapes, backups and floppy disks / 251 \\ 15: Printers / 263 \\ 16: Networks and the Internet / 277 \\ 17: Configuring the local network / 297 \\ 18: Connecting to the Internet / 315 \\ 19: Serial communications / 325 \\ 20: Configuring PPP / 339 \\ 21: The Domain Name Service / 363 \\ 22: Firewalls, IP aliasing and proxies / 385 \\ 23: Network debugging / 401 \\ 24: Basic network access: clients / 417 \\ 25: Basic network access: servers / 447 \\ 26: Electronic mail: clients / 471 \\ 27: Electronic mail: servers / 491 \\ 28: XFree86 in depth / 507 \\ 29: Starting and stopping the system / 527 \\ 30: FreeBSD configuration files / 551 \\ 31: Keeping up to date / 581 \\ 32: Updating the system software / 593 \\ 33: Custom kernels / 607 \\ A: Bibliography / 627 \\ B: The evolution of FreeBSD / 633 \\ Index

entry:
@Book{Lehey:2003:CFD,
  author =       "Greg Lehey",
  title =        "The Complete {FreeBSD}: Documentation from the
                 Source",
  publisher =    pub-ORCP,
  address =      pub-ORCP:adr,
  edition =      "Fourth",
  pages =        "xxxiii + 679",
  year =         "2003",
  ISBN =         "0-596-00516-4 (paperback), 0-596-80213-7 (e-book)",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-596-00516-0 (paperback), 978-0-596-80213-4
                 (e-book)",
  LCCN =         "QA76.76.O63 L43 2003",
  bibdate =      "Tue May 13 15:31:58 2003",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/unix.bib",
  price =        "US\$44.09, CAN\$69.95, UK\pounds 31.95",
  URL =          "http://press.oreilly.com/commpress.html;
                 http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/cfreebsd/desc.html",
  abstract =     "FreeBSD is by far the most popular version of BSD, the
                 legendary operating system that has contributed a great
                 deal to every version of Unix in use today (including
                 Mac OS X). Originally a community effort by the
                 University of California at Berkeley, FreeBSD was aimed
                 at making Unix a little friendlier and easier to use.
                 By the time other free operating systems came along,
                 BSD was firmly established and very reliable. And it
                 continues to be today. For seven years, the FreeBSD
                 community has relied on Greg Lehey's classic,
                 \booktitle{The Complete FreeBSD}, to guide them through
                 its configuration and \ldots{}",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  tableofcontents = "Foreword / xxv \\
                 Preface / xxvii \\
                 1. Introduction / 1 \\
                 2: Before you install / 25 \\
                 3: Quick installation / 47 \\
                 4: Shared OS installation / 51 \\
                 5: Installing FreeBSD / 59 \\
                 6: Post-installation configuration / 91 \\
                 7: The tools of the trade / 111 \\
                 8: Taking control / 143 \\
                 9: The Ports Collection / 167 \\
                 10: File systems and devices / 181 \\
                 11: Disks / 199 \\
                 12: The Vinum Volume Manager / 221 \\
                 13: Writing CD-Rs / 243 \\
                 14: Tapes, backups and floppy disks / 251 \\
                 15: Printers / 263 \\
                 16: Networks and the Internet / 277 \\
                 17: Configuring the local network / 297 \\
                 18: Connecting to the Internet / 315 \\
                 19: Serial communications / 325 \\
                 20: Configuring PPP / 339 \\
                 21: The Domain Name Service / 363 \\
                 22: Firewalls, IP aliasing and proxies / 385 \\
                 23: Network debugging / 401 \\
                 24: Basic network access: clients / 417 \\
                 25: Basic network access: servers / 447 \\
                 26: Electronic mail: clients / 471 \\
                 27: Electronic mail: servers / 491 \\
                 28: XFree86 in depth / 507 \\
                 29: Starting and stopping the system / 527 \\
                 30: FreeBSD configuration files / 551 \\
                 31: Keeping up to date / 581 \\
                 32: Updating the system software / 593 \\
                 33: Custom kernels / 607 \\
                 A: Bibliography / 627 \\
                 B: The evolution of FreeBSD / 633 \\
                 Index",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lehto:1998:MBH
author: Olli Lehto
title: Mathematics Without Borders: a History of the International Mathematical Union
publisher: pub-SV
address: pub-SV:adr
pages: xvi + 399
year: 1998
ISBN: 0-387-98358-9 OR 0387983589
ISBN13: 978-0-387-98358-5 OR 9780387983585
LCCN: QA1 .L42 1998
bibdate: Mon Dec 06 18:24:16 1999
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1999.12.06 18:24:16 ???
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Olli Lehto
rawtitle: Mathematics Without Borders: a History of the {International Mathematical Union}
abstract:
The history of international mathematical co-operation over the last hundred years --- from the first international congress in 1897 to plans for the World Mathematical Year 2000 --- is a surprisingly compelling story. For reflected in the history of the International Mathematical Union (IMU) is all the strife among world powers, as well as aspirations for co-operation among nations in an increasingly interdependent world. As early as the 1920s, the IMU embraced principles of political neutrality, inviting every national mathematical organisation to join, and this principle of non-discrimination, while sometimes sorely tried, has held the IMU in good stead. A number of issues --- the Cold War, the conflict between the Peoples Republic of China and Taiwan, a divided Germany, problems in the emerging nations of Africa --- at times led to attempts to influence the IMU Executive Committee in its decisions regarding membership, location of international congresses, committee assignments, handling of protests, and awarding the coveted Fields Medals. Yet throughout, the IMU has sponsored international congresses around the world, and Professor Lehtos gripping story is one of individuals, among them many of the great mathematicians of our century, united in the common purpose of advancing their science, told against the backdrop of world events.

TOC:
1 Prologue to the History of the IMU 1.1 Ideas of International Mathematical Cooperation Awaken 1.2 Formation of Institutionalized Congresses in 1.3 International Mathematical Activities Before World War I 1.4 Politics Enters into International Cooperation in Science 2 The Old IMU (1920--1932) 2.1 The Foundation of the IMU in the Aftermath of World War I 2.2 Mounting Opposition Against the IMU's Policy of Exclusion 2.3 Transformation of the International Research Council into the International Council of Scientific Unions 2.4 The IMU Separates from the Congresses 2.5 The IMU Adrift 2.6 Suspension of the IMU 3 Mathematical Cooperation Without the IMU (1933--1939) 3.1 The Fields Medals 3.2 Collaboration in Mathematical Education 3.3 A Failed Attempt to Found a New IMU 3.4 The Oslo Congress in 4 Foundation of the New IMU (1945--1951) 73 4.1 American Declaration of Universality 4.2 Preparation of the IMU Statutes 4.3 The Rebirth of the IMU 4.4 ICM--1950 at Harvard: American Tour de Force 5 The IMU Takes Shape (1952--1954) 5.1 The First General Assembly in Rome in 5.2 The Secretariat of the IMU 5.3 Starting the IMU's Activities 5.4 ICMI Becomes Attached to the Union 5.5 The 1954 General Assembly in the Netherlands 5.6 ICM--1954 in Amsterdam: Comeback of the Old World 6 Expansion of the IMU (1955--1958) 121 6.1 Membership of Socialist Countries 6.2 The Chinese Problem Emerges 6.3 The World Directory of Mathematicians 6.4 Extension of Mathematical Activities 7 The IMU and International Congresses (1958--1962) 7.1 The 1958 General Assembly in Scotland 7.2 ICM--1958 in Edinburgh 7.3 Why Organize Large ICMs? 7.4 The IMU Becomes a Partner of the ICMs 7.5 The 1962 General Assembly in Sweden 7.6 ICM-1962 in Stockholm: An IMU Breakthrough 8 Consolidation of the IMU (1963--1970) 8.1 The USSR Hosts the 1966 General Assembly 8.2 ICM-1966 in Moscow: East and West Meet 8.3 The 1970 General Assembly in France 8.4 ICM-1970 in Nice 9 North-South and East-West Connections (1971--1978) 9.1 New Programs and Trends 9.2 The 1974 General Assembly in Canada 9.3 ICM-1974 in Vancouver: Disagreement About the Program 9.4 How to Make an ICM 9.5 The 1978 General Assembly in Finland 9.6 ICM-1978 in Helsinki 10 Politics Interferes with the IMU (1979--1986) 10.1 The IMU and the Soviet National Committee 10.2 Martial Law in the Host Country of the Congress 10.3 The 1982 General Assembly in Poland 10.4 ICM-1983 in Warsaw: Mathematics Above Politics 10.5 The 1986 Presidential Election 10.6 China Joins the IMU 11 The IMU and Related Organizations 11.1 The IMU as a Member of ICSU 11.2 ICMI as a Subcommission of the IMU 11.3 Commission on Development and Exchange 11.4 Problems in Africa 11.5 The IMU and the History of Mathematics 11.6 The IMU and Applied Mathematics 12 The IMU in a Changing World (1986--1990) 12.1 The 1986 General Assembly in California 12.2 ICM-1986 at Berkeley 12.3 Japan Hosts the 1990 General Assembly 12.4 ICM-1990 in Kyoto 12.5 World Mathematical Year 2000 1 Members of the IMU 2 General Assemblies of the IMU 3 Executive Committees of the IMU 4 Meetings of the IMU Executive Committees 5 Central Committees of the International Commission on the Teaching of Mathematics 6 Executive Committees of ICMI 7 Commissions on Development and Exchange 8 International Congresses of Mathematicians 9 Fields Medals 10 Rolf Nevanlinna Prizes 11 Union Lectures 12 Finances 13 Archives (as of June 1996) Notes

rawabstract:
The history of international mathematical co-operation over the last hundred years --- from the first international congress in 1897 to plans for the World Mathematical Year 2000 --- is a surprisingly compelling story. For reflected in the history of the International Mathematical Union (IMU) is all the strife among world powers, as well as aspirations for co-operation among nations in an increasingly interdependent world. As early as the 1920s, the IMU embraced principles of political neutrality, inviting every national mathematical organisation to join, and this principle of non-discrimination, while sometimes sorely tried, has held the IMU in good stead. A number of issues --- the Cold War, the conflict between the Peoples Republic of China and Taiwan, a divided Germany, problems in the emerging nations of Africa --- at times led to attempts to influence the IMU Executive Committee in its decisions regarding membership, location of international congresses, committee assignments, handling of protests, and awarding the coveted Fields Medals. Yet throughout, the IMU has sponsored international congresses around the world, and Professor Lehtos gripping story is one of individuals, among them many of the great mathematicians of our century, united in the common purpose of advancing their science, told against the backdrop of world events.

rawTOC:
1 Prologue to the History of the IMU \\ 1.1 Ideas of International Mathematical Cooperation Awaken \\ 1.2 Formation of Institutionalized Congresses in \\ 1.3 International Mathematical Activities Before World War I \\ 1.4 Politics Enters into International Cooperation in Science \\ 2 The Old IMU (1920--1932) \\ 2.1 The Foundation of the IMU in the Aftermath of World War I \\ 2.2 Mounting Opposition Against the IMU's Policy of Exclusion \\ 2.3 Transformation of the International Research Council into the International Council of Scientific Unions \\ 2.4 The IMU Separates from the Congresses \\ 2.5 The IMU Adrift \\ 2.6 Suspension of the IMU \\ 3 Mathematical Cooperation Without the IMU (1933--1939) \\ 3.1 The Fields Medals \\ 3.2 Collaboration in Mathematical Education \\ 3.3 A Failed Attempt to Found a New IMU \\ 3.4 The Oslo Congress in \\ 4 Foundation of the New IMU (1945--1951) 73 \\ 4.1 American Declaration of Universality \\ 4.2 Preparation of the IMU Statutes \\ 4.3 The Rebirth of the IMU \\ 4.4 ICM--1950 at Harvard: American Tour de Force \\ 5 The IMU Takes Shape (1952--1954) \\ 5.1 The First General Assembly in Rome in \\ 5.2 The Secretariat of the IMU \\ 5.3 Starting the IMU's Activities \\ 5.4 ICMI Becomes Attached to the Union \\ 5.5 The 1954 General Assembly in the Netherlands \\ 5.6 ICM--1954 in Amsterdam: Comeback of the Old World \\ 6 Expansion of the IMU (1955--1958) 121 \\ 6.1 Membership of Socialist Countries \\ 6.2 The Chinese Problem Emerges \\ 6.3 The World Directory of Mathematicians \\ 6.4 Extension of Mathematical Activities \\ 7 The IMU and International Congresses (1958--1962) \\ 7.1 The 1958 General Assembly in Scotland \\ 7.2 ICM--1958 in Edinburgh \\ 7.3 Why Organize Large ICMs? \\ 7.4 The IMU Becomes a Partner of the ICMs \\ 7.5 The 1962 General Assembly in Sweden \\ 7.6 ICM-1962 in Stockholm: An IMU Breakthrough \\ 8 Consolidation of the IMU (1963--1970) \\ 8.1 The USSR Hosts the 1966 General Assembly \\ 8.2 ICM-1966 in Moscow: East and West Meet \\ 8.3 The 1970 General Assembly in France \\ 8.4 ICM-1970 in Nice \\ 9 North-South and East-West Connections (1971--1978) \\ 9.1 New Programs and Trends \\ 9.2 The 1974 General Assembly in Canada \\ 9.3 ICM-1974 in Vancouver: Disagreement About the Program \\ 9.4 How to Make an ICM \\ 9.5 The 1978 General Assembly in Finland \\ 9.6 ICM-1978 in Helsinki \\ 10 Politics Interferes with the IMU (1979--1986) \\ 10.1 The IMU and the Soviet National Committee \\ 10.2 Martial Law in the Host Country of the Congress \\ 10.3 The 1982 General Assembly in Poland \\ 10.4 ICM-1983 in Warsaw: Mathematics Above Politics \\ 10.5 The 1986 Presidential Election \\ 10.6 China Joins the IMU \\ 11 The IMU and Related Organizations \\ 11.1 The IMU as a Member of ICSU \\ 11.2 ICMI as a Subcommission of the IMU \\ 11.3 Commission on Development and Exchange \\ 11.4 Problems in Africa \\ 11.5 The IMU and the History of Mathematics \\ 11.6 The IMU and Applied Mathematics \\ 12 The IMU in a Changing World (1986--1990) \\ 12.1 The 1986 General Assembly in California \\ 12.2 ICM-1986 at Berkeley \\ 12.3 Japan Hosts the 1990 General Assembly \\ 12.4 ICM-1990 in Kyoto \\ 12.5 World Mathematical Year 2000 \\ 1 Members of the IMU \\ 2 General Assemblies of the IMU \\ 3 Executive Committees of the IMU \\ 4 Meetings of the IMU Executive Committees \\ 5 Central Committees of the International Commission on the Teaching of Mathematics \\ 6 Executive Committees of ICMI \\ 7 Commissions on Development and Exchange \\ 8 International Congresses of Mathematicians \\ 9 Fields Medals \\ 10 Rolf Nevanlinna Prizes \\ 11 Union Lectures \\ 12 Finances \\ 13 Archives (as of June 1996) \\ Notes

entry:
@Book{Lehto:1998:MBH,
  author =       "Olli Lehto",
  title =        "Mathematics Without Borders: a History of the
                 {International Mathematical Union}",
  publisher =    pub-SV,
  address =      pub-SV:adr,
  pages =        "xvi + 399",
  year =         "1998",
  ISBN =         "0-387-98358-9",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-387-98358-5",
  LCCN =         "QA1 .L42 1998",
  bibdate =      "Mon Dec 06 18:24:16 1999",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  price =        "US\$35.00",
  abstract =     "The history of international mathematical co-operation
                 over the last hundred years --- from the first
                 international congress in 1897 to plans for the World
                 Mathematical Year 2000 --- is a surprisingly compelling
                 story. For reflected in the history of the
                 International Mathematical Union (IMU) is all the
                 strife among world powers, as well as aspirations for
                 co-operation among nations in an increasingly
                 interdependent world. As early as the 1920s, the IMU
                 embraced principles of political neutrality, inviting
                 every national mathematical organisation to join, and
                 this principle of non-discrimination, while sometimes
                 sorely tried, has held the IMU in good stead. A number
                 of issues --- the Cold War, the conflict between the
                 Peoples Republic of China and Taiwan, a divided
                 Germany, problems in the emerging nations of Africa ---
                 at times led to attempts to influence the IMU Executive
                 Committee in its decisions regarding membership,
                 location of international congresses, committee
                 assignments, handling of protests, and awarding the
                 coveted Fields Medals. Yet throughout, the IMU has
                 sponsored international congresses around the world,
                 and Professor Lehtos gripping story is one of
                 individuals, among them many of the great
                 mathematicians of our century, united in the common
                 purpose of advancing their science, told against the
                 backdrop of world events.",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  libnote =      "Not yet in my library.",
  tableofcontents = "1 Prologue to the History of the IMU \\
                 1.1 Ideas of International Mathematical Cooperation
                 Awaken \\
                 1.2 Formation of Institutionalized Congresses in \\
                 1.3 International Mathematical Activities Before World
                 War I \\
                 1.4 Politics Enters into International Cooperation in
                 Science \\
                 2 The Old IMU (1920--1932) \\
                 2.1 The Foundation of the IMU in the Aftermath of World
                 War I \\
                 2.2 Mounting Opposition Against the IMU's Policy of
                 Exclusion \\
                 2.3 Transformation of the International Research
                 Council into the International Council of Scientific
                 Unions \\
                 2.4 The IMU Separates from the Congresses \\
                 2.5 The IMU Adrift \\
                 2.6 Suspension of the IMU \\
                 3 Mathematical Cooperation Without the IMU (1933--1939)
                 \\
                 3.1 The Fields Medals \\
                 3.2 Collaboration in Mathematical Education \\
                 3.3 A Failed Attempt to Found a New IMU \\
                 3.4 The Oslo Congress in \\
                 4 Foundation of the New IMU (1945--1951) 73 \\
                 4.1 American Declaration of Universality \\
                 4.2 Preparation of the IMU Statutes \\
                 4.3 The Rebirth of the IMU \\
                 4.4 ICM--1950 at Harvard: American Tour de Force \\
                 5 The IMU Takes Shape (1952--1954) \\
                 5.1 The First General Assembly in Rome in \\
                 5.2 The Secretariat of the IMU \\
                 5.3 Starting the IMU's Activities \\
                 5.4 ICMI Becomes Attached to the Union \\
                 5.5 The 1954 General Assembly in the Netherlands \\
                 5.6 ICM--1954 in Amsterdam: Comeback of the Old World
                 \\
                 6 Expansion of the IMU (1955--1958) 121 \\
                 6.1 Membership of Socialist Countries \\
                 6.2 The Chinese Problem Emerges \\
                 6.3 The World Directory of Mathematicians \\
                 6.4 Extension of Mathematical Activities \\
                 7 The IMU and International Congresses (1958--1962) \\
                 7.1 The 1958 General Assembly in Scotland \\
                 7.2 ICM--1958 in Edinburgh \\
                 7.3 Why Organize Large ICMs? \\
                 7.4 The IMU Becomes a Partner of the ICMs \\
                 7.5 The 1962 General Assembly in Sweden \\
                 7.6 ICM-1962 in Stockholm: An IMU Breakthrough \\
                 8 Consolidation of the IMU (1963--1970) \\
                 8.1 The USSR Hosts the 1966 General Assembly \\
                 8.2 ICM-1966 in Moscow: East and West Meet \\
                 8.3 The 1970 General Assembly in France \\
                 8.4 ICM-1970 in Nice \\
                 9 North-South and East-West Connections (1971--1978)
                 \\
                 9.1 New Programs and Trends \\
                 9.2 The 1974 General Assembly in Canada \\
                 9.3 ICM-1974 in Vancouver: Disagreement About the
                 Program \\
                 9.4 How to Make an ICM \\
                 9.5 The 1978 General Assembly in Finland \\
                 9.6 ICM-1978 in Helsinki \\
                 10 Politics Interferes with the IMU (1979--1986) \\
                 10.1 The IMU and the Soviet National Committee \\
                 10.2 Martial Law in the Host Country of the Congress
                 \\
                 10.3 The 1982 General Assembly in Poland \\
                 10.4 ICM-1983 in Warsaw: Mathematics Above Politics \\
                 10.5 The 1986 Presidential Election \\
                 10.6 China Joins the IMU \\
                 11 The IMU and Related Organizations \\
                 11.1 The IMU as a Member of ICSU \\
                 11.2 ICMI as a Subcommission of the IMU \\
                 11.3 Commission on Development and Exchange \\
                 11.4 Problems in Africa \\
                 11.5 The IMU and the History of Mathematics \\
                 11.6 The IMU and Applied Mathematics \\
                 12 The IMU in a Changing World (1986--1990) \\
                 12.1 The 1986 General Assembly in California \\
                 12.2 ICM-1986 at Berkeley \\
                 12.3 Japan Hosts the 1990 General Assembly \\
                 12.4 ICM-1990 in Kyoto \\
                 12.5 World Mathematical Year 2000 \\
                 1 Members of the IMU \\
                 2 General Assemblies of the IMU \\
                 3 Executive Committees of the IMU \\
                 4 Meetings of the IMU Executive Committees \\
                 5 Central Committees of the International Commission on
                 the Teaching of Mathematics \\
                 6 Executive Committees of ICMI \\
                 7 Commissions on Development and Exchange \\
                 8 International Congresses of Mathematicians \\
                 9 Fields Medals \\
                 10 Rolf Nevanlinna Prizes \\
                 11 Union Lectures \\
                 12 Finances \\
                 13 Archives (as of June 1996) \\
                 Notes",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Leighton:2000:TBR
author: Ralph Leighton
title: Tuva Or Bust!: Richard Feynman's Last Journey
publisher: pub-NORTON
address: pub-NORTON:adr
pages: 260
year: 2000
ISBN: 0-393-32069-3 (paperback), 0-393-02953-0 OR 0393320693 (paperback), 0393029530
ISBN13: 978-0-393-32069-5 (paperback), 978-0-393-02953-6 OR 9780393320695 (paperback), 9780393029536
LCCN: QC16.F49 L45 2000
bibdate: Mon Dec 12 15:40:26 MST 2005
bibtimestamp: 2005.12.12 15:40:26 MST
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Ralph Leighton
rawtitle: {Tuva} Or Bust!: {Richard Feynman}'s Last Journey
bibsource:
https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/bibnet/authors/f/feynman-richard-p.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/einstein.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager

abstract:
In 1930s, a young stamp collector named Richard Feynman coveted the unusually exotic stamps from a land called Tannu Tuva, ringed by mountains deep in Siberia, just beyond Outer Mongolia.Forty years later, the maverick Nobel Prize-winning physicist challenged his side-kick, fellow drummer and geography enthusiast Ralph Leighton: ``Whatever happened to Tannu Tuva?'' Thus began a poignant and funny decade-long adventure. When the pair found Tuvas capital on the map,they were hooked. ``Any place that's spelled K-Y-Z-Y-L,'' Feynman exclaimed, ``has just got to be interesting!'' In their efforts to reach Tuva, Leighton and Feynman learned of its resident shamanic shepherds who revere the Dalai Lama, discovered the wonders of ``throat-singing'',and brought to the United States the largest archaeological exhibition ever from the Soviet Union.

subject:
Feynman, Richard Phillips; Travel; Russia (Federation); Tuva; Tuva (Russia); Description and travel; Physicists; United States; Biography

TOC:
To the Reader / 7 1: There is no such country / 13 2: Forty-five snowy I / 18 3: Mysterious melodies / 39 4: Hail to the chief! / 62 5: We appear in the center of Asia / 74 6: Three Americans reach Tuva / 90 7: Meeting in Moscow / 104 8: Amateur ambassadors / 130 9: Clowns or con men? / 148 10: The Keller accord / 168 11: The trip is arranged / 185 12: Catalina cowboys / 203 13: The invitation arrives / 214 14: Epilogue / 221 Reflections 2000 / 231 Painting of Richard Feynman / 236 Appendix A: Protocol / 237 Appendix B: Welcome by Richard Feynman / 247 Appendix C: Friends of Tuva / 251 Index / 253

rawabstract:
In 1930s, a young stamp collector named Richard Feynman coveted the unusually exotic stamps from a land called Tannu Tuva, ringed by mountains deep in Siberia, just beyond Outer Mongolia.Forty years later, the maverick Nobel Prize-winning physicist challenged his side-kick, fellow drummer and geography enthusiast Ralph Leighton: ``Whatever happened to Tannu Tuva?'' Thus began a poignant and funny decade-long adventure. When the pair found Tuvas capital on the map,they were hooked. ``Any place that's spelled K-Y-Z-Y-L,'' Feynman exclaimed, ``has just got to be interesting!'' In their efforts to reach Tuva, Leighton and Feynman learned of its resident shamanic shepherds who revere the Dalai Lama, discovered the wonders of ``throat-singing'',and brought to the United States the largest archaeological exhibition ever from the Soviet Union.

rawTOC:
To the Reader / 7 \\ 1: There is no such country / 13 \\ 2: Forty-five snowy I / 18 \\ 3: Mysterious melodies / 39 \\ 4: Hail to the chief! / 62 \\ 5: We appear in the center of Asia / 74 \\ 6: Three Americans reach Tuva / 90 \\ 7: Meeting in Moscow / 104 \\ 8: Amateur ambassadors / 130 \\ 9: Clowns or con men? / 148 \\ 10: The Keller accord / 168 \\ 11: The trip is arranged / 185 \\ 12: Catalina cowboys / 203 \\ 13: The invitation arrives / 214 \\ 14: Epilogue / 221 Reflections 2000 / 231 \\ Painting of Richard Feynman / 236 \\ Appendix A: Protocol / 237 \\ Appendix B: Welcome by Richard Feynman / 247 \\ Appendix C: Friends of Tuva / 251 \\ Index / 253

entry:
@Book{Leighton:2000:TBR,
  author =       "Ralph Leighton",
  title =        "{Tuva} Or Bust!: {Richard Feynman}'s Last Journey",
  publisher =    pub-NORTON,
  address =      pub-NORTON:adr,
  pages =        "260",
  year =         "2000",
  ISBN =         "0-393-32069-3 (paperback), 0-393-02953-0",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-393-32069-5 (paperback), 978-0-393-02953-6",
  LCCN =         "QC16.F49 L45 2000",
  bibdate =      "Mon Dec 12 15:40:26 MST 2005",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/bibnet/authors/f/feynman-richard-p.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/einstein.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager",
  abstract =     "In 1930s, a young stamp collector named Richard
                 Feynman coveted the unusually exotic stamps from a land
                 called Tannu Tuva, ringed by mountains deep in Siberia,
                 just beyond Outer Mongolia.Forty years later, the
                 maverick Nobel Prize-winning physicist challenged his
                 side-kick, fellow drummer and geography enthusiast
                 Ralph Leighton: ``Whatever happened to Tannu Tuva?''
                 Thus began a poignant and funny decade-long adventure.
                 When the pair found Tuvas capital on the map,they were
                 hooked. ``Any place that's spelled K-Y-Z-Y-L,'' Feynman
                 exclaimed, ``has just got to be interesting!'' In their
                 efforts to reach Tuva, Leighton and Feynman learned of
                 its resident shamanic shepherds who revere the Dalai
                 Lama, discovered the wonders of ``throat-singing'',and
                 brought to the United States the largest archaeological
                 exhibition ever from the Soviet Union.",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  libnote =      "Not yet in my library.",
  subject =      "Feynman, Richard Phillips; Travel; Russia
                 (Federation); Tuva; Tuva (Russia); Description and
                 travel; Physicists; United States; Biography",
  tableofcontents = "To the Reader / 7 \\
                 1: There is no such country / 13 \\
                 2: Forty-five snowy I / 18 \\
                 3: Mysterious melodies / 39 \\
                 4: Hail to the chief! / 62 \\
                 5: We appear in the center of Asia / 74 \\
                 6: Three Americans reach Tuva / 90 \\
                 7: Meeting in Moscow / 104 \\
                 8: Amateur ambassadors / 130 \\
                 9: Clowns or con men? / 148 \\
                 10: The Keller accord / 168 \\
                 11: The trip is arranged / 185 \\
                 12: Catalina cowboys / 203 \\
                 13: The invitation arrives / 214 \\
                 14: Epilogue / 221 Reflections 2000 / 231 \\
                 Painting of Richard Feynman / 236 \\
                 Appendix A: Protocol / 237 \\
                 Appendix B: Welcome by Richard Feynman / 247 \\
                 Appendix C: Friends of Tuva / 251 \\
                 Index / 253",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lesk:1997:PDL
author: Michael Lesk
title: Practical Digital Libraries: Books, Bytes, and Bucks
publisher: pub-MORGAN-KAUFMANN
address: pub-MORGAN-KAUFMANN:adrnew
pages: xxii + 297 + 11
year: 1997
ISBN: 1-55860-459-6 (paperback) OR 1558604596 (paperback)
ISBN13: 978-1-55860-459-9 (paperback) OR 9781558604599 (paperback)
LCCN: Z692.C65 L47 1997
bibdate: Thu Sep 11 07:09:14 1997
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1997.09.11 07:09:14 ???
series: The Morgan Kaufmann series in multimedia information and systems
subject: Libraries; United States; Special collections; Computer files; Digital libraries
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Michael Lesk
rawtitle: Practical Digital Libraries: Books, Bytes, and Bucks
URL:
http://www.loc.gov/catdir/description/els032/97022069.html; http://www.loc.gov/catdir/toc/els032/97022069.html

abstract:
Offers a wide ranging overview of digital libraries currently available; analyzes economic and intellectual property issues in the emerging digital environment and show how text, images and audio and video can be represented, distributed, used and collected as forms of knowledge.

TOC:
1: Evolution of Libraries 2: Text Access Methods 3: Images of Pages 4: Multimedia Storage and Access 5: Knowledge Representation Methods 6: Distribution 7: Usability and Retrieval Evaluation 8: Collections and Preservation 9: Economics 10: Intellectual Property Rights 11: International Activities 12: Future: Ubiquity, Diversity, Creativity, and Public Policy

rawabstract:
Offers a wide ranging overview of digital libraries currently available; analyzes economic and intellectual property issues in the emerging digital environment and show how text, images and audio and video can be represented, distributed, used and collected as forms of knowledge.

rawTOC:
1: Evolution of Libraries \\ 2: Text Access Methods \\ 3: Images of Pages \\ 4: Multimedia Storage and Access \\ 5: Knowledge Representation Methods \\ 6: Distribution \\ 7: Usability and Retrieval Evaluation \\ 8: Collections and Preservation \\ 9: Economics \\ 10: Intellectual Property Rights \\ 11: International Activities \\ 12: Future: Ubiquity, Diversity, Creativity, and Public Policy

entry:
@Book{Lesk:1997:PDL,
  author =       "Michael Lesk",
  title =        "Practical Digital Libraries: Books, Bytes, and Bucks",
  publisher =    pub-MORGAN-KAUFMANN,
  address =      pub-MORGAN-KAUFMANN:adrnew,
  pages =        "xxii + 297 + 11",
  year =         "1997",
  ISBN =         "1-55860-459-6 (paperback)",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-1-55860-459-9 (paperback)",
  LCCN =         "Z692.C65 L47 1997",
  bibdate =      "Thu Sep 11 07:09:14 1997",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  price =        "US\$49.95",
  series =       "The Morgan Kaufmann series in multimedia information
                 and systems",
  URL =          "http://www.loc.gov/catdir/description/els032/97022069.html;
                 http://www.loc.gov/catdir/toc/els032/97022069.html",
  abstract =     "Offers a wide ranging overview of digital libraries
                 currently available; analyzes economic and intellectual
                 property issues in the emerging digital environment and
                 show how text, images and audio and video can be
                 represented, distributed, used and collected as forms
                 of knowledge.",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  libnote =      "Not yet in my library.",
  subject =      "Libraries; United States; Special collections;
                 Computer files; Digital libraries",
  tableofcontents = "1: Evolution of Libraries \\
                 2: Text Access Methods \\
                 3: Images of Pages \\
                 4: Multimedia Storage and Access \\
                 5: Knowledge Representation Methods \\
                 6: Distribution \\
                 7: Usability and Retrieval Evaluation \\
                 8: Collections and Preservation \\
                 9: Economics \\
                 10: Intellectual Property Rights \\
                 11: International Activities \\
                 12: Future: Ubiquity, Diversity, Creativity, and Public
                 Policy",
}


bibtype: incollection
filename: master.bib
label: Lesk:lex
author: Michael E. Lesk and Eric Schmidt
booktitle: UNIX Programmer's Manual
title: Lex: A Lexical Analyzer Generator
volume: 2
publisher: pub-HRW
address: pub-HRW:adr
pages: 388--400
year: 1979
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
note: AT&T Bell Laboratories Technical Report in 1975.
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Michael E. Lesk and Eric Schmidt
rawbooktitle: {UNIX} Programmer's Manual
rawnote: AT\&T Bell Laboratories Technical Report in 1975.
rawtitle: Lex: {A} Lexical Analyzer Generator
entry:
@InCollection{Lesk:lex,
  author =       "Michael E. Lesk and Eric Schmidt",
  booktitle =    "{UNIX} Programmer's Manual",
  title =        "Lex: {A} Lexical Analyzer Generator",
  volume =       "2",
  publisher =    pub-HRW,
  address =      pub-HRW:adr,
  pages =        "388--400",
  year =         "1979",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  note =         "AT\&T Bell Laboratories Technical Report in 1975.",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Level:1995:PTF
author: Jeff Level and Bruce Newman and Brenda Newman
title: Precision Type Font Reference Guide, Version 5.0
publisher: Precision Type
address: Commack, NY, USA
pages: xxv + 653
year: 1995
ISBN: 0-9646252-0-2 OR 0964625202
ISBN13: 978-0-9646252-0-4 OR 9780964625204
LCCN: Z250.7 .P74 1995
bibdate: Wed Feb 28 15:00:20 MST 1996
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/font.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1996.02.28 15:00:20 MST
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Jeff Level and Bruce Newman and Brenda Newman
rawtitle: Precision Type Font Reference Guide, Version 5.0
keywords:
Printing --- Specimens --- Handbooks, manuals, etc.; Type and type-founding --- Handbooks, manuals, etc.

entry:
@Book{Level:1995:PTF,
  author =       "Jeff Level and Bruce Newman and Brenda Newman",
  title =        "Precision Type Font Reference Guide, Version 5.0",
  publisher =    "Precision Type",
  address =      "Commack, NY, USA",
  pages =        "xxv + 653",
  year =         "1995",
  ISBN =         "0-9646252-0-2",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-9646252-0-4",
  LCCN =         "Z250.7 .P74 1995",
  bibdate =      "Wed Feb 28 15:00:20 MST 1996",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/font.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  keywords =     "Printing --- Specimens --- Handbooks, manuals, etc.;
                 Type and type-founding --- Handbooks, manuals, etc.",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Level:2000:PTF
author: Jeff Level and Bruce Newman and Brenda Newman
title: Precision Type Font Reference Guide, Version 5.0
publisher: pub-HARTLEY-MARKS
address: pub-HARTLEY-MARKS:adr
pages: xxv + 653
year: 2000
ISBN: 0-88179-182-2 OR 0881791822
ISBN13: 978-0-88179-182-2 OR 9780881791822
LCCN: Z250.7 .P74 2000
bibdate: Thu Apr 12 10:59:49 2001
bibtimestamp: 2001.04.12 10:59:49 ???
note: Republication of cite Level:1995:PTF.
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Jeff Level and Bruce Newman and Brenda Newman
rawnote: Republication of \cite{Level:1995:PTF}.
rawtitle: Precision Type Font Reference Guide, Version 5.0
bibsource:
https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/font.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/texbook3.bib

keywords:
Printing --- Specimens --- Handbooks, manuals, etc.; Type and type-founding --- Handbooks, manuals, etc.

entry:
@Book{Level:2000:PTF,
  author =       "Jeff Level and Bruce Newman and Brenda Newman",
  title =        "Precision Type Font Reference Guide, Version 5.0",
  publisher =    pub-HARTLEY-MARKS,
  address =      pub-HARTLEY-MARKS:adr,
  pages =        "xxv + 653",
  year =         "2000",
  ISBN =         "0-88179-182-2",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-88179-182-2",
  LCCN =         "Z250.7 .P74 2000",
  bibdate =      "Thu Apr 12 10:59:49 2001",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/font.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/texbook3.bib",
  note =         "Republication of \cite{Level:1995:PTF}.",
  price =        "US\$39.95, CDN\$59.95",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  keywords =     "Printing --- Specimens --- Handbooks, manuals, etc.;
                 Type and type-founding --- Handbooks, manuals, etc.",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Levin:2016:BHB
author: Janna Levin
title: Black hole blues: and other songs from outer space
publisher: pub-KNOPF
address: pub-KNOPF:adr
pages: 241
year: 2016
LCCN: QC179 .L48 2016
bibdate: Thu Jan 18 11:19:16 MST 2018
bibtimestamp: 2018.01.18 11:19:16 MST
subject: Gravitational waves; Black holes (Astronomy)
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Janna Levin
rawtitle: Black hole blues: and other songs from outer space
ISBN:
0-307-95819-1 (hardcover), 0-307-94848-X (paperback) OR 0307958191 (hardcover), 030794848X (paperback)

ISBN13:
978-0-307-95819-8 (hardcover), 978-0-307-94848-9 (paperback) OR 9780307958198 (hardcover), 9780307948489 (paperback)

URL:
http://www.loc.gov/catdir/enhancements/fy1605/2015046692-b.html; http://www.loc.gov/catdir/enhancements/fy1605/2015046692-d.html

abstract:
In 1916, Einstein became the first to predict the existence of gravitational waves: sounds without a material medium generated by the unfathomably energy-producing collision of black holes. Now, Janna Levin, herself an astrophysicist, recounts the story of the search, over the last fifty years, for these elusive waves --- a quest that has culminated in the creation of the most expensive project ever funded by the National Science Foundation ($1 billion-plus). She makes clear how the waves are created in the cosmic collision of black holes, and why the waves can never be detected by telescope. And, most revealingly, she delves into the lives and fates of the four scientists currently engaged in --- and obsessed with --- discerning this soundtrack of the universe's history. Levin's account of the surprises, disappointments, achievements, and risks of this unfolding story provides us with a uniquely compelling and intimate portrait of the people and processes of modern science.

TOC:
When black holes collide High fidelity Natural resources Culture shock Joe Weber Prototypes The Troika The climb Weber and Trimble LHO Skunkworks Gambling Rashomon LLO Little cave on Figueroa The race is on

rawabstract:
In 1916, Einstein became the first to predict the existence of gravitational waves: sounds without a material medium generated by the unfathomably energy-producing collision of black holes. Now, Janna Levin, herself an astrophysicist, recounts the story of the search, over the last fifty years, for these elusive waves --- a quest that has culminated in the creation of the most expensive project ever funded by the National Science Foundation (\$1 billion-plus). She makes clear how the waves are created in the cosmic collision of black holes, and why the waves can never be detected by telescope. And, most revealingly, she delves into the lives and fates of the four scientists currently engaged in --- and obsessed with --- discerning this soundtrack of the universe's history. Levin's account of the surprises, disappointments, achievements, and risks of this unfolding story provides us with a uniquely compelling and intimate portrait of the people and processes of modern science.

rawTOC:
When black holes collide \\ High fidelity \\ Natural resources \\ Culture shock \\ Joe Weber \\ Prototypes \\ The Troika \\ The climb \\ Weber and Trimble \\ LHO \\ Skunkworks \\ Gambling \\ Rashomon \\ LLO \\ Little cave on Figueroa \\ The race is on

entry:
@Book{Levin:2016:BHB,
  author =       "Janna Levin",
  title =        "Black hole blues: and other songs from outer space",
  publisher =    pub-KNOPF,
  address =      pub-KNOPF:adr,
  pages =        "241",
  year =         "2016",
  ISBN =         "0-307-95819-1 (hardcover), 0-307-94848-X (paperback)",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-307-95819-8 (hardcover), 978-0-307-94848-9
                 (paperback)",
  LCCN =         "QC179 .L48 2016",
  bibdate =      "Thu Jan 18 11:19:16 MST 2018",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/einstein.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager",
  URL =          "http://www.loc.gov/catdir/enhancements/fy1605/2015046692-b.html;
                 http://www.loc.gov/catdir/enhancements/fy1605/2015046692-d.html",
  abstract =     "In 1916, Einstein became the first to predict the
                 existence of gravitational waves: sounds without a
                 material medium generated by the unfathomably
                 energy-producing collision of black holes. Now, Janna
                 Levin, herself an astrophysicist, recounts the story of
                 the search, over the last fifty years, for these
                 elusive waves --- a quest that has culminated in the
                 creation of the most expensive project ever funded by
                 the National Science Foundation (\$1 billion-plus). She
                 makes clear how the waves are created in the cosmic
                 collision of black holes, and why the waves can never
                 be detected by telescope. And, most revealingly, she
                 delves into the lives and fates of the four scientists
                 currently engaged in --- and obsessed with ---
                 discerning this soundtrack of the universe's history.
                 Levin's account of the surprises, disappointments,
                 achievements, and risks of this unfolding story
                 provides us with a uniquely compelling and intimate
                 portrait of the people and processes of modern
                 science.",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  subject =      "Gravitational waves; Black holes (Astronomy)",
  tableofcontents = "When black holes collide \\
                 High fidelity \\
                 Natural resources \\
                 Culture shock \\
                 Joe Weber \\
                 Prototypes \\
                 The Troika \\
                 The climb \\
                 Weber and Trimble \\
                 LHO \\
                 Skunkworks \\
                 Gambling \\
                 Rashomon \\
                 LLO \\
                 Little cave on Figueroa \\
                 The race is on",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Levine:1992:LY
author: John R. Levine and Tony Mason and Doug Brown
title: tt lex & tt yacc
publisher: pub-ORA
address: pub-ORA:adr
edition: Second
pages: xxii + 366
year: 1992
ISBN: 1-56592-000-7 OR 1565920007
ISBN13: 978-1-56592-000-2 OR 9781565920002
LCCN: QA76.76.U84M37 1992
bibdate: Wed Dec 15 10:38:13 1993
bibtimestamp: 1993.12.15 10:38:13 ???
URL: http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/9781565920002; http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/lex
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: John R. Levine and Tony Mason and Doug Brown
rawtitle: {\tt lex} \& {\tt yacc}
TOC:
Preface Lex and Yacc Using Lex Using Yacc A Menu Generation Language Parsing SQL A Reference for Lex Specifications A Reference for Yacc Grammars Yacc Ambiguities and Conflicts Error Reporting and Recovery AT&T; Lex AT&T; Yacc Berkeley Yacc GNU Bison Flex MKS lex and yacc Abraxas lex and yacc POSIX lex and yacc MGL Compiler Code SQL Parser Code SQL Parser Code Glossary Bibliography

rawTOC:
Preface \\ Lex and Yacc \\ Using Lex \\ Using Yacc \\ A Menu Generation Language \\ Parsing SQL \\ A Reference for Lex Specifications \\ A Reference for Yacc Grammars \\ Yacc Ambiguities and Conflicts \\ Error Reporting and Recovery \\ AT\&T; Lex \\ AT\&T; Yacc \\ Berkeley Yacc \\ GNU Bison \\ Flex \\ MKS lex and yacc \\ Abraxas lex and yacc \\ POSIX lex and yacc \\ MGL Compiler Code \\ SQL Parser Code \\ SQL Parser Code \\ Glossary \\ Bibliography

entry:
@Book{Levine:1992:LY,
  author =       "John R. Levine and Tony Mason and Doug Brown",
  title =        "{\tt lex} \& {\tt yacc}",
  publisher =    pub-ORA,
  address =      pub-ORA:adr,
  edition =      "Second",
  pages =        "xxii + 366",
  year =         "1992",
  ISBN =         "1-56592-000-7",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-1-56592-000-2",
  LCCN =         "QA76.76.U84M37 1992",
  bibdate =      "Wed Dec 15 10:38:13 1993",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/ora.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/unix.bib",
  price =        "US\$29.95",
  URL =          "http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/9781565920002;
                 http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/lex",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  tableofcontents = "Preface \\
                 Lex and Yacc \\
                 Using Lex \\
                 Using Yacc \\
                 A Menu Generation Language \\
                 Parsing SQL \\
                 A Reference for Lex Specifications \\
                 A Reference for Yacc Grammars \\
                 Yacc Ambiguities and Conflicts \\
                 Error Reporting and Recovery \\
                 AT\&T; Lex \\
                 AT\&T; Yacc \\
                 Berkeley Yacc \\
                 GNU Bison \\
                 Flex \\
                 MKS lex and yacc \\
                 Abraxas lex and yacc \\
                 POSIX lex and yacc \\
                 MGL Compiler Code \\
                 SQL Parser Code \\
                 SQL Parser Code \\
                 Glossary \\
                 Bibliography",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Levy:1980:CPA
author: Henry M. Levy and Richard H. Eckhouse, Jr.
title: Computer Programming and Architecture --- the VAX-11
publisher: pub-DP
address: pub-DP:adr
pages: xxi + 407
year: 1980
ISBN: 0-932376-07-X OR 093237607X
ISBN13: 978-0-932376-07-7 OR 9780932376077
LCCN: QA76.8 .V37 L48 1980
bibdate: Wed Dec 15 10:38:14 1993
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1993.12.15 10:38:14 ???
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Henry M. Levy and Richard H. {Eckhouse, Jr.}
rawtitle: Computer Programming and Architecture --- the {VAX-11}
subject:
VAX-11 (Computer); Programming; Assembly languages (Electronic computers); Computer architecture; VAX-11 (Ordinateur); Programmation; Langage assembleur (Langage de programmation); Ordinateurs; Architecture; Assembly languages (Electronic computers); Computer architecture; Programming; Programmeren (computers); Computerarchitectuur; Computerarchitektur; Programmierung; VAX 11; VAX-11 (Computer) --- Programming; Assembler language (Computer program language)

TOC:
Part 1: The user architecture Architecture and implementation Computer structures and elementary VAX-11 programming Instruction and addressing fundamentals More advanced programming techniques Data types and data structures Comparative architectures Part 2: The system architecture Physical input and output The support of an operating system The structure of a VAX-11 operating system The operating system interface The efficient implementation of an architecture

rawTOC:
Part 1: The user architecture \\ Architecture and implementation \\ Computer structures and elementary VAX-11 programming \\ Instruction and addressing fundamentals \\ More advanced programming techniques \\ Data types and data structures \\ Comparative architectures \\ Part 2: The system architecture \\ Physical input and output \\ The support of an operating system \\ The structure of a VAX-11 operating system \\ The operating system interface \\ The efficient implementation of an architecture

entry:
@Book{Levy:1980:CPA,
  author =       "Henry M. Levy and Richard H. {Eckhouse, Jr.}",
  title =        "Computer Programming and Architecture --- the
                 {VAX-11}",
  publisher =    pub-DP,
  address =      pub-DP:adr,
  pages =        "xxi + 407",
  year =         "1980",
  ISBN =         "0-932376-07-X",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-932376-07-7",
  LCCN =         "QA76.8 .V37 L48 1980",
  bibdate =      "Wed Dec 15 10:38:14 1993",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  subject =      "VAX-11 (Computer); Programming; Assembly languages
                 (Electronic computers); Computer architecture; VAX-11
                 (Ordinateur); Programmation; Langage assembleur
                 (Langage de programmation); Ordinateurs; Architecture;
                 Assembly languages (Electronic computers); Computer
                 architecture; Programming; Programmeren (computers);
                 Computerarchitectuur; Computerarchitektur;
                 Programmierung; VAX 11; VAX-11 (Computer) ---
                 Programming; Assembler language (Computer program
                 language)",
  tableofcontents = "Part 1: The user architecture \\
                 Architecture and implementation \\
                 Computer structures and elementary VAX-11 programming
                 \\
                 Instruction and addressing fundamentals \\
                 More advanced programming techniques \\
                 Data types and data structures \\
                 Comparative architectures \\
                 Part 2: The system architecture \\
                 Physical input and output \\
                 The support of an operating system \\
                 The structure of a VAX-11 operating system \\
                 The operating system interface \\
                 The efficient implementation of an architecture",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Levy:2019:LIT
author: Buddy Levy
title: Labyrinth of Ice: the Triumphant and Tragic Greely Polar Expedition
publisher: St. Martin's Press
address: New York, NY, USA
pages: xviii + 376 + 16
year: 2019
ISBN: 1-250-18219-0 (hardcover), 1-250-18220-4 (e-book) OR 1250182190 (hardcover), 1250182204 (ebook)
LCCN: G670 1881 .L48 2019
bibdate: Sat Apr 25 16:56:37 MDT 2020
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager
bibtimestamp: 2020.04.25 16:56:37 MDT
subject: Greely, A. W; (Adolphus Washington); Arctic regions; Discovery and exploration; American
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
authordates: 1960--
subjectdates: 1844--1935
rawauthor: Buddy Levy
rawtitle: Labyrinth of Ice: the Triumphant and Tragic {Greely} Polar Expedition
ISBN13:
978-1-250-18219-7 (hardcover), 978-1-250-18220-3 (e-book) OR 9781250182197 (hardcover), 9781250182203 (ebook)

abstract:
Based on the author's exhaustive research, the incredible true story of the Greely Expedition, one of the most harrowing adventures in the annals of polar exploration. In July 1881, Lt. A. W. Greely and his crew of 24 scientists and explorers were bound for the last region unmarked on global maps. Their goal: Farthest North. What would follow was one of the most extraordinary and terrible voyages ever made. Greely and his men confronted every possible challenge-vicious wolves, sub-zero temperatures, and months of total darkness-as they set about exploring one of the most remote, unrelenting environments on the planet. In May 1882, they broke the 300-year-old record, and returned to camp to eagerly await the resupply ship scheduled to return at the end of the year. Only nothing came. 250 miles south, a wall of ice prevented any rescue from reaching them. Provisions thinned and a second winter descended. Back home, Greely's wife worked tirelessly against government resistance to rally a rescue mission. Months passed, and Greely made a drastic choice: he and his men loaded the remaining provisions and tools onto their five small boats, and pushed off into the treacherous waters. After just two weeks, dangerous floes surrounded them. Now new dangers awaited: insanity, threats of mutiny, and cannibalism. As food dwindled and the men weakened, Greely's expedition clung desperately to life. Labyrinth of Ice tells the true story of the heroic lives and deaths of these voyagers hell-bent on fame and fortune --- at any cost --- and how their journey changed the world.

rawabstract:
Based on the author's exhaustive research, the incredible true story of the Greely Expedition, one of the most harrowing adventures in the annals of polar exploration. In July 1881, Lt. A. W. Greely and his crew of 24 scientists and explorers were bound for the last region unmarked on global maps. Their goal: Farthest North. What would follow was one of the most extraordinary and terrible voyages ever made. Greely and his men confronted every possible challenge-vicious wolves, sub-zero temperatures, and months of total darkness-as they set about exploring one of the most remote, unrelenting environments on the planet. In May 1882, they broke the 300-year-old record, and returned to camp to eagerly await the resupply ship scheduled to return at the end of the year. Only nothing came. 250 miles south, a wall of ice prevented any rescue from reaching them. Provisions thinned and a second winter descended. Back home, Greely's wife worked tirelessly against government resistance to rally a rescue mission. Months passed, and Greely made a drastic choice: he and his men loaded the remaining provisions and tools onto their five small boats, and pushed off into the treacherous waters. After just two weeks, dangerous floes surrounded them. Now new dangers awaited: insanity, threats of mutiny, and cannibalism. As food dwindled and the men weakened, Greely's expedition clung desperately to life. Labyrinth of Ice tells the true story of the heroic lives and deaths of these voyagers hell-bent on fame and fortune --- at any cost --- and how their journey changed the world.

entry:
@Book{Levy:2019:LIT,
  author =       "Buddy Levy",
  title =        "Labyrinth of Ice: the Triumphant and Tragic {Greely}
                 Polar Expedition",
  publisher =    "St. Martin's Press",
  address =      "New York, NY, USA",
  pages =        "xviii + 376 + 16",
  year =         "2019",
  ISBN =         "1-250-18219-0 (hardcover), 1-250-18220-4 (e-book)",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-1-250-18219-7 (hardcover), 978-1-250-18220-3
                 (e-book)",
  LCCN =         "G670 1881 .L48 2019",
  bibdate =      "Sat Apr 25 16:56:37 MDT 2020",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager",
  abstract =     "Based on the author's exhaustive research, the
                 incredible true story of the Greely Expedition, one of
                 the most harrowing adventures in the annals of polar
                 exploration. In July 1881, Lt. A. W. Greely and his
                 crew of 24 scientists and explorers were bound for the
                 last region unmarked on global maps. Their goal:
                 Farthest North. What would follow was one of the most
                 extraordinary and terrible voyages ever made. Greely
                 and his men confronted every possible challenge-vicious
                 wolves, sub-zero temperatures, and months of total
                 darkness-as they set about exploring one of the most
                 remote, unrelenting environments on the planet. In May
                 1882, they broke the 300-year-old record, and returned
                 to camp to eagerly await the resupply ship scheduled to
                 return at the end of the year. Only nothing came. 250
                 miles south, a wall of ice prevented any rescue from
                 reaching them. Provisions thinned and a second winter
                 descended. Back home, Greely's wife worked tirelessly
                 against government resistance to rally a rescue
                 mission. Months passed, and Greely made a drastic
                 choice: he and his men loaded the remaining provisions
                 and tools onto their five small boats, and pushed off
                 into the treacherous waters. After just two weeks,
                 dangerous floes surrounded them. Now new dangers
                 awaited: insanity, threats of mutiny, and cannibalism.
                 As food dwindled and the men weakened, Greely's
                 expedition clung desperately to life. Labyrinth of Ice
                 tells the true story of the heroic lives and deaths of
                 these voyagers hell-bent on fame and fortune --- at any
                 cost --- and how their journey changed the world.",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  author-dates = "1960--",
  subject =      "Greely, A. W; (Adolphus Washington); Arctic regions;
                 Discovery and exploration; American",
  subject-dates = "1844--1935",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lewine:1991:PPG
author: Donald A. Lewine
title: POSIX programmer's guide: writing portable UNIX programs with the POSIX.1 standard
publisher: pub-ORA
address: pub-ORA:adr
pages: xxvii + 607
year: 1991
ISBN: 0-937175-73-0 OR 0937175730
ISBN13: 978-0-937175-73-6 OR 9780937175736
LCCN: QA76.76.O63 L487 1991b
bibdate: Wed Nov 13 14:58:22 1996
bibtimestamp: 1996.11.13 14:58:22 ???
note: March 1994 printing with corrections, updates, and December 1991 Appendix G.
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Donald A. Lewine
rawnote: March 1994 printing with corrections, updates, and December 1991 Appendix G.
rawtitle: {POSIX} programmer's guide: writing portable {UNIX} programs with the {POSIX.1} standard
bibsource:
https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/ora.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/standard.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/unix.bib

abstract:
Most UNIX systems today are POSIX compliant because the federal government requires it for its purchases. Given the manufacturer's documentation, however, it can be difficult to distinguish system-specific features from those features defined by POSIX. The POSIX Programmer's Guide, intended as an explanation of the POSIX standard and as a reference for the POSIX.1 programming library, helps you write more portable programs.

TOC:
Introduction to POSIX and portability Developing POSIX applications Standard file and terminal I/O Files and directories Advanced file operations Working with processes Obtaining information at run-time Terminal I/O POSIX and standard C Porting to far-off lands Library functions

rawabstract:
Most UNIX systems today are POSIX compliant because the federal government requires it for its purchases. Given the manufacturer's documentation, however, it can be difficult to distinguish system-specific features from those features defined by POSIX. The POSIX Programmer's Guide, intended as an explanation of the POSIX standard and as a reference for the POSIX.1 programming library, helps you write more portable programs.

rawTOC:
Introduction to POSIX and portability \\ Developing POSIX applications \\ Standard file and terminal I/O \\ Files and directories \\ Advanced file operations \\ Working with processes \\ Obtaining information at run-time \\ Terminal I/O \\ POSIX and standard C \\ Porting to far-off lands \\ Library functions

entry:
@Book{Lewine:1991:PPG,
  author =       "Donald A. Lewine",
  title =        "{POSIX} programmer's guide: writing portable {UNIX}
                 programs with the {POSIX.1} standard",
  publisher =    pub-ORA,
  address =      pub-ORA:adr,
  pages =        "xxvii + 607",
  year =         "1991",
  ISBN =         "0-937175-73-0",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-937175-73-6",
  LCCN =         "QA76.76.O63 L487 1991b",
  bibdate =      "Wed Nov 13 14:58:22 1996",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/ora.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/standard.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/unix.bib",
  note =         "March 1994 printing with corrections, updates, and
                 December 1991 Appendix G.",
  price =        "US\$34.95",
  abstract =     "Most UNIX systems today are POSIX compliant because
                 the federal government requires it for its purchases.
                 Given the manufacturer's documentation, however, it can
                 be difficult to distinguish system-specific features
                 from those features defined by POSIX. The POSIX
                 Programmer's Guide, intended as an explanation of the
                 POSIX standard and as a reference for the POSIX.1
                 programming library, helps you write more portable
                 programs.",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  tableofcontents = "Introduction to POSIX and portability \\
                 Developing POSIX applications \\
                 Standard file and terminal I/O \\
                 Files and directories \\
                 Advanced file operations \\
                 Working with processes \\
                 Obtaining information at run-time \\
                 Terminal I/O \\
                 POSIX and standard C \\
                 Porting to far-off lands \\
                 Library functions",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lewis:1961:T
author: Gilbert Newton Lewis and Merle Randall
title: Thermodynamics
publisher: pub-MCGRAW-HILL
address: pub-MCGRAW-HILL:adr
edition: Second
pages: xii + 723
year: 1961
LCCN: QC311 .L4 1961
bibdate: Sat Jul 25 13:55:27 1998
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1998.07.25 13:55:27 ???
note: Revised by Kenneth S. Pitzer and Leo Brewer
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Gilbert Newton Lewis and Merle Randall
rawnote: Revised by Kenneth S. Pitzer and Leo Brewer
rawtitle: Thermodynamics
entry:
@Book{Lewis:1961:T,
  author =       "Gilbert Newton Lewis and Merle Randall",
  title =        "Thermodynamics",
  publisher =    pub-MCGRAW-HILL,
  address =      pub-MCGRAW-HILL:adr,
  edition =      "Second",
  pages =        "xii + 723",
  year =         "1961",
  LCCN =         "QC311 .L4 1961",
  bibdate =      "Sat Jul 25 13:55:27 1998",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  note =         "Revised by Kenneth S. Pitzer and Leo Brewer",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  xxISBN =       "none",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lewis:2017:FUL
author: Geraint F. Lewis and Luke A. Barnes and Brian Schmidt
title: A fortunate universe: life in a finely-tuned cosmos
publisher: pub-CAMBRIDGE
address: pub-CAMBRIDGE:adr
pages: xvii + 373
year: 2017
DOI: https://doi.org/10.1017/CBO9781316661413
ISBN: 1-107-15661-0 (hardcover), 1-316-66141-5 (e-book) OR 1107156610 (hardcover), 1316661415 (ebook)
LCCN: Q172.5.C45 L4845 2017
bibdate: Sat Apr 1 16:47:01 MDT 2017
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager
bibtimestamp: 2017.04.01 16:47:01 MDT
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Geraint F. Lewis and Luke A. Barnes and Brian Schmidt
rawtitle: A fortunate universe: life in a finely-tuned cosmos
ISBN13:
978-1-107-15661-6 (hardcover), 978-1-316-66141-3 (e-book) OR 9781107156616 (hardcover), 9781316661413 (ebook)

abstract:
Over the last forty years, scientists have uncovered evidence that if the Universe had been forged with even slightly different properties, life as we know it --- and life as we can imagine it --- would be impossible. Join us on a journey through how we understand the Universe, from its most basic particles and forces, to planets, stars and galaxies, and back through cosmic history to the birth of the cosmos. Conflicting notions about our place in the Universe are defined, defended and critiqued from scientific, philosophical and religious viewpoints. The authors' engaging and witty style addresses what fine-tuning might mean for the future of physics and the search for the ultimate laws of nature. Tackling difficult questions and providing thought-provoking answers, this volumes challenges us to consider our place in the cosmos, regardless of our initial convictions.

subject:
Pattern formation (Physical sciences); Pattern formation (Biology); Life; Origin; Universe; Cosmology; Philosophy

TOC:
A conversation on fine-tuning I'm only human! Can you feel the force? Energy and entropy The universe is expanding All bets are off! A dozen (or so) reactions to fine-tuning A conversation continued

rawabstract:
Over the last forty years, scientists have uncovered evidence that if the Universe had been forged with even slightly different properties, life as we know it --- and life as we can imagine it --- would be impossible. Join us on a journey through how we understand the Universe, from its most basic particles and forces, to planets, stars and galaxies, and back through cosmic history to the birth of the cosmos. Conflicting notions about our place in the Universe are defined, defended and critiqued from scientific, philosophical and religious viewpoints. The authors' engaging and witty style addresses what fine-tuning might mean for the future of physics and the search for the ultimate laws of nature. Tackling difficult questions and providing thought-provoking answers, this volumes challenges us to consider our place in the cosmos, regardless of our initial convictions.

rawTOC:
A conversation on fine-tuning \\ I'm only human! \\ Can you feel the force? \\ Energy and entropy \\ The universe is expanding \\ All bets are off! \\ A dozen (or so) reactions to fine-tuning \\ A conversation continued

entry:
@Book{Lewis:2017:FUL,
  author =       "Geraint F. Lewis and Luke A. Barnes and Brian
                 Schmidt",
  title =        "A fortunate universe: life in a finely-tuned cosmos",
  publisher =    pub-CAMBRIDGE,
  address =      pub-CAMBRIDGE:adr,
  pages =        "xvii + 373",
  year =         "2017",
  DOI =          "https://doi.org/10.1017/CBO9781316661413",
  ISBN =         "1-107-15661-0 (hardcover), 1-316-66141-5 (e-book)",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-1-107-15661-6 (hardcover), 978-1-316-66141-3
                 (e-book)",
  LCCN =         "Q172.5.C45 L4845 2017",
  bibdate =      "Sat Apr 1 16:47:01 MDT 2017",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager",
  abstract =     "Over the last forty years, scientists have uncovered
                 evidence that if the Universe had been forged with even
                 slightly different properties, life as we know it ---
                 and life as we can imagine it --- would be impossible.
                 Join us on a journey through how we understand the
                 Universe, from its most basic particles and forces, to
                 planets, stars and galaxies, and back through cosmic
                 history to the birth of the cosmos. Conflicting notions
                 about our place in the Universe are defined, defended
                 and critiqued from scientific, philosophical and
                 religious viewpoints. The authors' engaging and witty
                 style addresses what fine-tuning might mean for the
                 future of physics and the search for the ultimate laws
                 of nature. Tackling difficult questions and providing
                 thought-provoking answers, this volumes challenges us
                 to consider our place in the cosmos, regardless of our
                 initial convictions.",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  libnote =      "Not in my library.",
  review-url =   "http://mathscholar.org/is-the-universe-fine-tuned-for-intelligent-life",
  subject =      "Pattern formation (Physical sciences); Pattern
                 formation (Biology); Life; Origin; Universe; Cosmology;
                 Philosophy",
  tableofcontents = "A conversation on fine-tuning \\
                 I'm only human! \\
                 Can you feel the force? \\
                 Energy and entropy \\
                 The universe is expanding \\
                 All bets are off! \\
                 A dozen (or so) reactions to fine-tuning \\
                 A conversation continued",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Libes:1989:LU
author: Don Libes and Sandy Ressler
title: Life with UNIX
publisher: pub-PH
address: pub-PH:adr
pages: xx + 346
year: 1989
ISBN: 0-13-536657-7 OR 0135366577
ISBN13: 978-0-13-536657-8 OR 9780135366578
LCCN: QA76.76.O63 L52 1989
bibdate: Wed Dec 15 10:38:15 1993
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/unix.bib
bibtimestamp: 1993.12.15 10:38:15 ???
URL: http://minnie.tuhs.org/Archive/Documentation/Books/
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Don Libes and Sandy Ressler
rawtitle: Life with {UNIX}
TOC:
UNIX history UNIX present UNIX future Printed information Nonprinted information The user's environment The programmer's environment The administrator's environment UNIX underground UNIX services UNIX applications UNIX meets the real world

rawTOC:
UNIX history \\ UNIX present \\ UNIX future \\ Printed information \\ Nonprinted information \\ The user's environment \\ The programmer's environment \\ The administrator's environment \\ UNIX underground \\ UNIX services \\ UNIX applications \\ UNIX meets the real world

entry:
@Book{Libes:1989:LU,
  author =       "Don Libes and Sandy Ressler",
  title =        "Life with {UNIX}",
  publisher =    pub-PH,
  address =      pub-PH:adr,
  pages =        "xx + 346",
  year =         "1989",
  ISBN =         "0-13-536657-7",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-13-536657-8",
  LCCN =         "QA76.76.O63 L52 1989",
  bibdate =      "Wed Dec 15 10:38:15 1993",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/unix.bib",
  URL =          "http://minnie.tuhs.org/Archive/Documentation/Books/",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  tableofcontents = "UNIX history \\
                 UNIX present \\
                 UNIX future \\
                 Printed information \\
                 Nonprinted information \\
                 The user's environment \\
                 The programmer's environment \\
                 The administrator's environment \\
                 UNIX underground \\
                 UNIX services \\
                 UNIX applications \\
                 UNIX meets the real world",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Libes:1994:EET
author: Don Libes
title: Exploring Expect: A Tcl-based Toolkit for Automating Interactive Programs
publisher: pub-ORA
address: pub-ORA:adr
pages: xxxiii + 566
month: dec
monthnumber: 12
year: 1994
ISBN: 1-56592-090-2 OR 1565920902
ISBN13: 978-1-56592-090-3 OR 9781565920903
LCCN: QA76.755 .L52 1995
bibdate: Sat Dec 02 17:04:17 1995
bibtimestamp: 1995.12.02 17:04:17 ???
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Don Libes
rawtitle: Exploring Expect: {A Tcl}-based Toolkit for Automating Interactive Programs
bibsource:
ftp://ftp.ora.com/pub/book.catalog; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/ora.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/unix.bib

URL:
http://www.ora.com/gnn/bus/ora/item/expect.html; http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/9781565920903; http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/expect

abstract:
Written by the author of Expect, this is the first book to explain how this new part of the UNIX toolbox can be used to automate Telnet, FTP, passwd, rlogin, and hundreds of other interactive applications. Based on Tcl (Tool Command Language), Expect lets you automate interactive applications that have previously been extremely difficult to handle with any scripting language.

TOC:
Dedication Preface How To Read This Book 1: Intro --- What Is Expect? 2: Tcl --- Introduction And Overview 3: Getting Started With Expect 4: Glob Patterns And Other Basics 5: Regular Expressions 6: Patterns, Actions, And Limits 7: Debugging Patterns And Controlling Output 8: Handling A Process And A User 9: The Expect Program 10: Handling Multiple Processes 11: Handling Multiple Processes Simultaneously 12: Send 13: Spawn 14: Signals 15: Interact 16: Interacting With Multiple Processes 17: Background Processing 18: Debugging Scripts 19: Expect + Tk = Expectk 20: Extended Examples 21: Expect, C, And C++ 22: Expect As Just Another Tcl Extension 23: Miscellaneous Appendix --- Commands and Variables

rawabstract:
Written by the author of Expect, this is the first book to explain how this new part of the UNIX toolbox can be used to automate Telnet, FTP, passwd, rlogin, and hundreds of other interactive applications. Based on Tcl (Tool Command Language), Expect lets you automate interactive applications that have previously been extremely difficult to handle with any scripting language.

rawTOC:
Dedication \\ Preface \\ How To Read This Book \\ 1: Intro --- What Is Expect? \\ 2: Tcl --- Introduction And Overview \\ 3: Getting Started With Expect \\ 4: Glob Patterns And Other Basics \\ 5: Regular Expressions \\ 6: Patterns, Actions, And Limits \\ 7: Debugging Patterns And Controlling Output \\ 8: Handling A Process And A User \\ 9: The Expect Program \\ 10: Handling Multiple Processes \\ 11: Handling Multiple Processes Simultaneously \\ 12: Send \\ 13: Spawn \\ 14: Signals \\ 15: Interact \\ 16: Interacting With Multiple Processes \\ 17: Background Processing \\ 18: Debugging Scripts \\ 19: Expect + Tk = Expectk \\ 20: Extended Examples \\ 21: Expect, C, And C++ \\ 22: Expect As Just Another Tcl Extension \\ 23: Miscellaneous \\ Appendix --- Commands and Variables

entry:
@Book{Libes:1994:EET,
  author =       "Don Libes",
  title =        "Exploring Expect: {A Tcl}-based Toolkit for Automating
                 Interactive Programs",
  publisher =    pub-ORA,
  address =      pub-ORA:adr,
  pages =        "xxxiii + 566",
  month =        dec,
  year =         "1994",
  ISBN =         "1-56592-090-2",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-1-56592-090-3",
  LCCN =         "QA76.755 .L52 1995",
  bibdate =      "Sat Dec 02 17:04:17 1995",
  bibsource =    "ftp://ftp.ora.com/pub/book.catalog;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/ora.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/unix.bib",
  price =        "US\$29.95",
  URL =          "http://www.ora.com/gnn/bus/ora/item/expect.html;
                 http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/9781565920903;
                 http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/expect",
  abstract =     "Written by the author of Expect, this is the first
                 book to explain how this new part of the UNIX toolbox
                 can be used to automate Telnet, FTP, passwd, rlogin,
                 and hundreds of other interactive applications. Based
                 on Tcl (Tool Command Language), Expect lets you
                 automate interactive applications that have previously
                 been extremely difficult to handle with any scripting
                 language.",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  tableofcontents = "Dedication \\
                 Preface \\
                 How To Read This Book \\
                 1: Intro --- What Is Expect? \\
                 2: Tcl --- Introduction And Overview \\
                 3: Getting Started With Expect \\
                 4: Glob Patterns And Other Basics \\
                 5: Regular Expressions \\
                 6: Patterns, Actions, And Limits \\
                 7: Debugging Patterns And Controlling Output \\
                 8: Handling A Process And A User \\
                 9: The Expect Program \\
                 10: Handling Multiple Processes \\
                 11: Handling Multiple Processes Simultaneously \\
                 12: Send \\
                 13: Spawn \\
                 14: Signals \\
                 15: Interact \\
                 16: Interacting With Multiple Processes \\
                 17: Background Processing \\
                 18: Debugging Scripts \\
                 19: Expect + Tk = Expectk \\
                 20: Extended Examples \\
                 21: Expect, C, And C++ \\
                 22: Expect As Just Another Tcl Extension \\
                 23: Miscellaneous \\
                 Appendix --- Commands and Variables",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Linderberg:1973:PQC
author: Jan Linderberg and Yngve Ohrn
title: Propagators in Quantum Chemistry
volume: 3
publisher: pub-ACADEMIC
address: pub-ACADEMIC:adr
pages: v + 151
year: 1973
ISBN: 0-12-450350-0 OR 0124503500
ISBN13: 978-0-12-450350-2 OR 9780124503502
LCCN: QD462.L56
bibdate: Sat Jul 25 13:55:27 1998
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1998.07.25 13:55:27 ???
series: Monographs in Theoretical Chemistry
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Jan Linderberg and Yngve {\"O}hrn
rawtitle: Propagators in Quantum Chemistry
TOC:
Preface / v 1: The Purpose of Propagators in Quantum Chemistry / 1 2: Differential Equations and their Green's Functions / 3 3: Schrodinger's Equations and their Green's Functions / 10 4: Fermion Operators / 18 5: Double-time Green's Functions / 26 6: Simple Applications / 31 7: Aspects of the Hartree--Fock Approximation / 39 8: The Atomic Central Field Problem / 50 9: Atomic and Molecular Orbitals / 74 10: The Model Hamiltonian of Pariser, Parr and Pople / 90 11: Diagrammatic Expansions. Temperature Dependent Perturbation Theory / 113 12: Description of Some Processes Involving Photons / 129 13: Nuclear Displacements, Nuclear Spins and Magnetic Fields / 137 Subject Index / 149

rawTOC:
Preface / v \\ 1: The Purpose of Propagators in Quantum Chemistry / 1 \\ 2: Differential Equations and their Green's Functions / 3 \\ 3: Schr{\"o}dinger's Equations and their Green's Functions / 10 \\ 4: Fermion Operators / 18 \\ 5: Double-time Green's Functions / 26 \\ 6: Simple Applications / 31 \\ 7: Aspects of the Hartree--Fock Approximation / 39 \\ 8: The Atomic Central Field Problem / 50 \\ 9: Atomic and Molecular Orbitals / 74 \\ 10: The Model Hamiltonian of Pariser, Parr and Pople / 90 \\ 11: Diagrammatic Expansions. Temperature Dependent Perturbation Theory / 113 \\ 12: Description of Some Processes Involving Photons / 129 \\ 13: Nuclear Displacements, Nuclear Spins and Magnetic Fields / 137 \\ Subject Index / 149

entry:
@Book{Linderberg:1973:PQC,
  author =       "Jan Linderberg and Yngve {\"O}hrn",
  title =        "Propagators in Quantum Chemistry",
  volume =       "3",
  publisher =    pub-ACADEMIC,
  address =      pub-ACADEMIC:adr,
  pages =        "v + 151",
  year =         "1973",
  ISBN =         "0-12-450350-0",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-12-450350-2",
  LCCN =         "QD462.L56",
  bibdate =      "Sat Jul 25 13:55:27 1998",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  series =       "Monographs in Theoretical Chemistry",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  tableofcontents = "Preface / v \\
                 1: The Purpose of Propagators in Quantum Chemistry / 1
                 \\
                 2: Differential Equations and their Green's Functions /
                 3 \\
                 3: Schr{\"o}dinger's Equations and their Green's
                 Functions / 10 \\
                 4: Fermion Operators / 18 \\
                 5: Double-time Green's Functions / 26 \\
                 6: Simple Applications / 31 \\
                 7: Aspects of the Hartree--Fock Approximation / 39 \\
                 8: The Atomic Central Field Problem / 50 \\
                 9: Atomic and Molecular Orbitals / 74 \\
                 10: The Model Hamiltonian of Pariser, Parr and Pople /
                 90 \\
                 11: Diagrammatic Expansions. Temperature Dependent
                 Perturbation Theory / 113 \\
                 12: Description of Some Processes Involving Photons /
                 129 \\
                 13: Nuclear Displacements, Nuclear Spins and Magnetic
                 Fields / 137 \\
                 Subject Index / 149",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Linderberg:2004:PQC
author: Jan Linderberg and Yngve Ohrn
title: Propagators in Quantum Chemistry
publisher: pub-WILEY
address: pub-WILEY:adr
edition: Second
pages: vii + 267
year: 2004
DOI: https://doi.org/10.1002/0471721549
ISBN: 0-471-66257-7 OR 0471662577
ISBN13: 978-0-471-66257-0 OR 9780471662570
LCCN: QD462 L56 2004
bibdate: Mon Feb 4 08:40:38 MST 2019
bibsource: fsz3950.oclc.org:210/WorldCat; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 2019.02.04 08:40:38 MST
series: Theoretical chemistry
remark: Previous edition: London: Academic Press, 1973.
subject: Quantum chemistry; Many-body problem; Many-body problem; Quantum chemistry
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Jan Linderberg and Yngve {\"O}hrn
rawtitle: Propagators in Quantum Chemistry
URL:
http://catdir.loc.gov/catdir/description/wiley041/2003069509.html; http://catdir.loc.gov/catdir/toc/wiley041/2003069509.html; https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/book/10.1002/0471721549

abstract:
The authors offer a general introduction to the concept of propagators, how they can be used to study atomic and molecular properties and spectra, and provide examples and technical details of their use in various common approximate treatments as well as some illustrative applications.

TOC:
1: Introduction 2: Differential Equations 3: Propagators and Second Quantization 3.1 The Huckel Model 3.2 Electron Field Operators 3.3 Angular Momentum 4: Double-Time Green's Functions 4.1 The Electron Propagator 4.2 Electrons in a Central Potential 4.3 The Atomic Central Field Problem 4.4 Complex Spectra 4.5 Single Subshell Approximation 4.6 Approximate Atomic Transition Amplitudes 5: The Excitation Propagator 5.1 Antisymmetrized Geminal Power 6: Interaction of Radiation and Matter 6.1 A Charged Particle in an Electromagnetic Field 6.2 Quantization of the Radiation Field 6.3 Absorption Spectroscopy 6.4 RPA Transition Moments 6.5 Optical Rotatory Dispersion and Circular Dichroism 7: Temperature-Dependent Perturbation Theory 8: Molecules in Magnetic Fields 8.1 Nuclear Spins 8.2 Magnetic Susceptibility 8.3 NMR-Spectra 8.4 Magnetic Properties of Molecules 8.5 Diamagnetic Molecules 8.6 Units and Magnitude of Magnetic Susceptibilities 8.7 Paramagnetic Molecules 8.8 NMR Spectra and Shielding 8.9 NMR Spectra and Spin--Spin Coupling 8.10 The Origin Problem 8.11 The Gauge Problem 8.12 An Elementary Example of NMR Spectra 8.13 Paramagnetic Molecules 9: The Electron Propagator in Higher Orders 9.1 Renormalization of the Electron Propagator 9.2 Partitioning and Inner Projections 9.3 Recipe for Diagrams 9.4 Photoelectron Spectra 9.5 Photoionization Cross Sections 10: Atomic and Molecular Orbitals 10.1 Nonorthogonal Basis Sets 10.2 Green's Function Considerations 10.3 A Simple Model Hamiltonian 10.4 Electronic Indices from Green's Functions 10.5 Orthogonalized Atomic Orbitals 11: The Pariser--Parr--Pople Model 11.1 Introduction 11.2 Reduction to the Pariser--Parr--Pople Model 11.3 Limit of Separated Atoms 11.4 Interacting Atoms 11.5 Calculation of Expectation Values 11.6 Application to Linear Chains 12: The Excitation Propagator in Higher Orders 12.1 Auger Spectroscopy 13: Propagators and Chemical Reaction Rate A: Complex Calculus Primer A.1 Continuity A.2 Differentiability A.3 Analytic Functions A.4 Complex Integration A.5 Cauchy's Theorem A.6 Laurent Series A.7 Isolated Singularities A.8 Residue at a Singularity A.9 Expansion of a Meromorphic Function B: First and Second Quantization C: Stability of Hartree--Fock Solutions D: Third-Order Self-Energy E: Temperature-Dependent Propagators E.1 Preliminaries E.2 Wick's Theorem E.3 Diagrams F: The Eckart Potential and its Propagator Index

rawabstract:
The authors offer a general introduction to the concept of propagators, how they can be used to study atomic and molecular properties and spectra, and provide examples and technical details of their use in various common approximate treatments as well as some illustrative applications.

shortTOC:
1: Introduction 2: Differential Equations and their Green's Functions 3: Green's Functions or Propagators and Second Quantization 4: Electron Interaction and Double-Time Green's Functions 5: The Excitation Propagator 6: Interaction of Radiation and Matter 7: Temperature Dependent Perturbation Theory 8: Molecules in Magnetic Fields 9: The Electron Propagator in Higher Order Treatments 10: Atomic and Molecular Orbitals 11: The Pariser--Parr--Pople Model 12: The Excitation Propagator in Higher Order Treatments 13: Propagators and Chemical Reaction Rate Appendix A: Complex Differential and Integral Calculus Primer Appendix B: First and Second Quantization Appendix C: Stability of Hartree--Fock Solutions Appendix D: Third-Order Self-Energy of the Electron Propagator Appendix E: Temperatures Dependent Propagators Appendix F: The Eckart Potential and its Propagator

rawshortTOC:
1: Introduction \\ 2: Differential Equations and their Green's Functions \\ 3: Green's Functions or Propagators and Second Quantization \\ 4: Electron Interaction and Double-Time Green's Functions \\ 5: The Excitation Propagator \\ 6: Interaction of Radiation and Matter \\ 7: Temperature Dependent Perturbation Theory \\ 8: Molecules in Magnetic Fields \\ 9: The Electron Propagator in Higher Order Treatments \\ 10: Atomic and Molecular Orbitals \\ 11: The Pariser--Parr--Pople Model \\ 12: The Excitation Propagator in Higher Order Treatments \\ 13: Propagators and Chemical Reaction Rate \\ Appendix A: Complex Differential and Integral Calculus Primer \\ Appendix B: First and Second Quantization \\ Appendix C: Stability of Hartree--Fock Solutions \\ Appendix D: Third-Order Self-Energy of the Electron Propagator \\ Appendix E: Temperatures Dependent Propagators \\ Appendix F: The Eckart Potential and its Propagator

rawTOC:
1: Introduction \\ 2: Differential Equations \\ 3: Propagators and Second Quantization \\ 3.1 The H{\"u}ckel Model \\ 3.2 Electron Field Operators \\ 3.3 Angular Momentum \\ 4: Double-Time Green's Functions \\ 4.1 The Electron Propagator \\ 4.2 Electrons in a Central Potential \\ 4.3 The Atomic Central Field Problem \\ 4.4 Complex Spectra \\ 4.5 Single Subshell Approximation \\ 4.6 Approximate Atomic Transition Amplitudes \\ 5: The Excitation Propagator \\ 5.1 Antisymmetrized Geminal Power \\ 6: Interaction of Radiation and Matter \\ 6.1 A Charged Particle in an Electromagnetic Field \\ 6.2 Quantization of the Radiation Field \\ 6.3 Absorption Spectroscopy \\ 6.4 RPA Transition Moments \\ 6.5 Optical Rotatory Dispersion and Circular Dichroism \\ 7: Temperature-Dependent Perturbation Theory \\ 8: Molecules in Magnetic Fields \\ 8.1 Nuclear Spins \\ 8.2 Magnetic Susceptibility \\ 8.3 NMR-Spectra \\ 8.4 Magnetic Properties of Molecules \\ 8.5 Diamagnetic Molecules \\ 8.6 Units and Magnitude of Magnetic Susceptibilities \\ 8.7 Paramagnetic Molecules \\ 8.8 NMR Spectra and Shielding \\ 8.9 NMR Spectra and Spin--Spin Coupling \\ 8.10 The Origin Problem \\ 8.11 The Gauge Problem \\ 8.12 An Elementary Example of NMR Spectra \\ 8.13 Paramagnetic Molecules \\ 9: The Electron Propagator in Higher Orders \\ 9.1 Renormalization of the Electron Propagator \\ 9.2 Partitioning and Inner Projections \\ 9.3 Recipe for Diagrams \\ 9.4 Photoelectron Spectra \\ 9.5 Photoionization Cross Sections \\ 10: Atomic and Molecular Orbitals \\ 10.1 Nonorthogonal Basis Sets \\ 10.2 Green's Function Considerations \\ 10.3 A Simple Model Hamiltonian \\ 10.4 Electronic Indices from Green's Functions \\ 10.5 Orthogonalized Atomic Orbitals \\ 11: The Pariser--Parr--Pople Model \\ 11.1 Introduction \\ 11.2 Reduction to the Pariser--Parr--Pople Model \\ 11.3 Limit of Separated Atoms \\ 11.4 Interacting Atoms \\ 11.5 Calculation of Expectation Values \\ 11.6 Application to Linear Chains \\ 12: The Excitation Propagator in Higher Orders \\ 12.1 Auger Spectroscopy \\ 13: Propagators and Chemical Reaction Rate \\ A: Complex Calculus Primer \\ A.1 Continuity \\ A.2 Differentiability \\ A.3 Analytic Functions \\ A.4 Complex Integration \\ A.5 Cauchy's Theorem \\ A.6 Laurent Series \\ A.7 Isolated Singularities \\ A.8 Residue at a Singularity \\ A.9 Expansion of a Meromorphic Function \\ B: First and Second Quantization \\ C: Stability of Hartree--Fock Solutions \\ D: Third-Order Self-Energy \\ E: Temperature-Dependent Propagators \\ E.1 Preliminaries \\ E.2 Wick's Theorem \\ E.3 Diagrams \\ F: The Eckart Potential and its Propagator \\ Index

entry:
@Book{Linderberg:2004:PQC,
  author =       "Jan Linderberg and Yngve {\"O}hrn",
  title =        "Propagators in Quantum Chemistry",
  publisher =    pub-WILEY,
  address =      pub-WILEY:adr,
  edition =      "Second",
  pages =        "vii + 267",
  year =         "2004",
  DOI =          "https://doi.org/10.1002/0471721549",
  ISBN =         "0-471-66257-7",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-471-66257-0",
  LCCN =         "QD462 L56 2004",
  bibdate =      "Mon Feb 4 08:40:38 MST 2019",
  bibsource =    "fsz3950.oclc.org:210/WorldCat;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  series =       "Theoretical chemistry",
  URL =          "http://catdir.loc.gov/catdir/description/wiley041/2003069509.html;
                 http://catdir.loc.gov/catdir/toc/wiley041/2003069509.html;
                 https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/book/10.1002/0471721549",
  abstract =     "The authors offer a general introduction to the
                 concept of propagators, how they can be used to study
                 atomic and molecular properties and spectra, and
                 provide examples and technical details of their use in
                 various common approximate treatments as well as some
                 illustrative applications.",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  libnote =      "Not in my library.",
  remark =       "Previous edition: London: Academic Press, 1973.",
  shorttableofcontents = "1: Introduction \\
                 2: Differential Equations and their Green's Functions
                 \\
                 3: Green's Functions or Propagators and Second
                 Quantization \\
                 4: Electron Interaction and Double-Time Green's
                 Functions \\
                 5: The Excitation Propagator \\
                 6: Interaction of Radiation and Matter \\
                 7: Temperature Dependent Perturbation Theory \\
                 8: Molecules in Magnetic Fields \\
                 9: The Electron Propagator in Higher Order Treatments
                 \\
                 10: Atomic and Molecular Orbitals \\
                 11: The Pariser--Parr--Pople Model \\
                 12: The Excitation Propagator in Higher Order
                 Treatments \\
                 13: Propagators and Chemical Reaction Rate \\
                 Appendix A: Complex Differential and Integral Calculus
                 Primer \\
                 Appendix B: First and Second Quantization \\
                 Appendix C: Stability of Hartree--Fock Solutions \\
                 Appendix D: Third-Order Self-Energy of the Electron
                 Propagator \\
                 Appendix E: Temperatures Dependent Propagators \\
                 Appendix F: The Eckart Potential and its Propagator",
  subject =      "Quantum chemistry; Many-body problem; Many-body
                 problem; Quantum chemistry",
  tableofcontents = "1: Introduction \\
                 2: Differential Equations \\
                 3: Propagators and Second Quantization \\
                 3.1 The H{\"u}ckel Model \\
                 3.2 Electron Field Operators \\
                 3.3 Angular Momentum \\
                 4: Double-Time Green's Functions \\
                 4.1 The Electron Propagator \\
                 4.2 Electrons in a Central Potential \\
                 4.3 The Atomic Central Field Problem \\
                 4.4 Complex Spectra \\
                 4.5 Single Subshell Approximation \\
                 4.6 Approximate Atomic Transition Amplitudes \\
                 5: The Excitation Propagator \\
                 5.1 Antisymmetrized Geminal Power \\
                 6: Interaction of Radiation and Matter \\
                 6.1 A Charged Particle in an Electromagnetic Field \\
                 6.2 Quantization of the Radiation Field \\
                 6.3 Absorption Spectroscopy \\
                 6.4 RPA Transition Moments \\
                 6.5 Optical Rotatory Dispersion and Circular Dichroism
                 \\
                 7: Temperature-Dependent Perturbation Theory \\
                 8: Molecules in Magnetic Fields \\
                 8.1 Nuclear Spins \\
                 8.2 Magnetic Susceptibility \\
                 8.3 NMR-Spectra \\
                 8.4 Magnetic Properties of Molecules \\
                 8.5 Diamagnetic Molecules \\
                 8.6 Units and Magnitude of Magnetic Susceptibilities
                 \\
                 8.7 Paramagnetic Molecules \\
                 8.8 NMR Spectra and Shielding \\
                 8.9 NMR Spectra and Spin--Spin Coupling \\
                 8.10 The Origin Problem \\
                 8.11 The Gauge Problem \\
                 8.12 An Elementary Example of NMR Spectra \\
                 8.13 Paramagnetic Molecules \\
                 9: The Electron Propagator in Higher Orders \\
                 9.1 Renormalization of the Electron Propagator \\
                 9.2 Partitioning and Inner Projections \\
                 9.3 Recipe for Diagrams \\
                 9.4 Photoelectron Spectra \\
                 9.5 Photoionization Cross Sections \\
                 10: Atomic and Molecular Orbitals \\
                 10.1 Nonorthogonal Basis Sets \\
                 10.2 Green's Function Considerations \\
                 10.3 A Simple Model Hamiltonian \\
                 10.4 Electronic Indices from Green's Functions \\
                 10.5 Orthogonalized Atomic Orbitals \\
                 11: The Pariser--Parr--Pople Model \\
                 11.1 Introduction \\
                 11.2 Reduction to the Pariser--Parr--Pople Model \\
                 11.3 Limit of Separated Atoms \\
                 11.4 Interacting Atoms \\
                 11.5 Calculation of Expectation Values \\
                 11.6 Application to Linear Chains \\
                 12: The Excitation Propagator in Higher Orders \\
                 12.1 Auger Spectroscopy \\
                 13: Propagators and Chemical Reaction Rate \\
                 A: Complex Calculus Primer \\
                 A.1 Continuity \\
                 A.2 Differentiability \\
                 A.3 Analytic Functions \\
                 A.4 Complex Integration \\
                 A.5 Cauchy's Theorem \\
                 A.6 Laurent Series \\
                 A.7 Isolated Singularities \\
                 A.8 Residue at a Singularity \\
                 A.9 Expansion of a Meromorphic Function \\
                 B: First and Second Quantization \\
                 C: Stability of Hartree--Fock Solutions \\
                 D: Third-Order Self-Energy \\
                 E: Temperature-Dependent Propagators \\
                 E.1 Preliminaries \\
                 E.2 Wick's Theorem \\
                 E.3 Diagrams \\
                 F: The Eckart Potential and its Propagator \\
                 Index",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lindholm:1997:JVM
author: Tim Lindholm and Frank Yellin
title: The Java Virtual Machine Specification
publisher: pub-AW
address: pub-AW:adr
pages: xvi + 475
year: 1997
ISBN: 0-201-63452-X OR 020163452X
ISBN13: 978-0-201-63452-5 OR 9780201634525
LCCN: QA76.73.J38L56 1997
bibdate: Tue Mar 04 15:04:45 1997
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1997.03.04 15:04:45 ???
series: The Java Series
URL: http://www.aw.com/cp/javaseries.html
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Tim Lindholm and Frank Yellin
rawtitle: The {Java} Virtual Machine Specification
keywords:
Internet (Computer network); Java (Computer program language); Java (computer program language); programming languages (electronic computers); systems; virtual computer; Virtual computer systems

TOC:
1. Introduction 2. Java Concepts 3. Structure of the Java Virtual Machine 4. The class File Format 5. Constant Pool Resolution 6. Java Virtual Machine Instruction Set 7. Compiling for the Java Virtual Machine 8. Threads and Locks 9. An Optimization 10. Opcode Mnemonics by Opcode

rawTOC:
1. Introduction\\ 2. Java Concepts\\ 3. Structure of the Java Virtual Machine\\ 4. The class File Format\\ 5. Constant Pool Resolution\\ 6. Java Virtual Machine Instruction Set\\ 7. Compiling for the Java Virtual Machine\\ 8. Threads and Locks\\ 9. An Optimization \\ 10. Opcode Mnemonics by Opcode

entry:
@Book{Lindholm:1997:JVM,
  author =       "Tim Lindholm and Frank Yellin",
  title =        "The {Java} Virtual Machine Specification",
  publisher =    pub-AW,
  address =      pub-AW:adr,
  pages =        "xvi + 475",
  year =         "1997",
  ISBN =         "0-201-63452-X",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-201-63452-5",
  LCCN =         "QA76.73.J38L56 1997",
  bibdate =      "Tue Mar 04 15:04:45 1997",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  price =        "US\$36.53",
  series =       "The Java Series",
  URL =          "http://www.aw.com/cp/javaseries.html",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  keywords =     "Internet (Computer network); Java (Computer program
                 language); Java (computer program language);
                 programming languages (electronic computers); systems;
                 virtual computer; Virtual computer systems",
  lccnalt =      "96-015897",
  tableofcontents = "1. Introduction\\
                 2. Java Concepts\\
                 3. Structure of the Java Virtual Machine\\
                 4. The class File Format\\
                 5. Constant Pool Resolution\\
                 6. Java Virtual Machine Instruction Set\\
                 7. Compiling for the Java Virtual Machine\\
                 8. Threads and Locks\\
                 9. An Optimization \\
                 10. Opcode Mnemonics by Opcode",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lindholm:1999:JVM
author: Tim Lindholm and Frank Yellin
title: The Java Virtual Machine Specification
publisher: pub-AW
address: pub-AW:adr
edition: Second
pages: xv + 473
year: 1999
ISBN: 0-201-43294-3 (paperback) OR 0201432943 (paperback)
ISBN13: 978-0-201-43294-7 (paperback) OR 9780201432947 (paperback)
LCCN: QA76.73.J38L56 1999
bibdate: Tue May 11 07:30:11 1999
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/java.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1999.05.11 07:30:11 ???
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Tim Lindholm and Frank Yellin
rawtitle: The {Java} Virtual Machine Specification
abstract:
The nucleus of the Java 2 platform, the Java Virtual Machine is the technology that enables the Java 2 platform to host applications on any computer or operating system without rewriting or recompiling. This book was written by those directly responsible for the design and implementation of the Java Virtual Machine, and is the complete and definitive specification for the technology. It is an essential reference for writers of compilers for the Java programming language and implementors of the Java Virtual Machine. This second edition specifies the newest version of the Java Virtual Machine and provides a fascinating view into the inner workings of the Java 2 platform.

TOC:
1: Introduction 2: Java Programming Language Concepts 3: The Structure of the Java Virtual Machine 4: The class File Format 5: Loading, Linking, and Initializing 6: The Java Virtual Machine Instruction Set 7: Compiling for the Java Virtual Machine 8: Threads and Locks 9: Opcode Mnemonics by Opcode Appendix: Summary of Clarifications and Amendments

rawabstract:
The nucleus of the Java 2 platform, the Java Virtual Machine is the technology that enables the Java 2 platform to host applications on any computer or operating system without rewriting or recompiling. This book was written by those directly responsible for the design and implementation of the Java Virtual Machine, and is the complete and definitive specification for the technology. It is an essential reference for writers of compilers for the Java programming language and implementors of the Java Virtual Machine. This second edition specifies the newest version of the Java Virtual Machine and provides a fascinating view into the inner workings of the Java 2 platform.

rawTOC:
1: Introduction \\ 2: Java Programming Language Concepts \\ 3: The Structure of the Java Virtual Machine \\ 4: The class File Format \\ 5: Loading, Linking, and Initializing \\ 6: The Java Virtual Machine Instruction Set \\ 7: Compiling for the Java Virtual Machine \\ 8: Threads and Locks \\ 9: Opcode Mnemonics by Opcode \\ Appendix: Summary of Clarifications and Amendments

entry:
@Book{Lindholm:1999:JVM,
  author =       "Tim Lindholm and Frank Yellin",
  title =        "The {Java} Virtual Machine Specification",
  publisher =    pub-AW,
  address =      pub-AW:adr,
  edition =      "Second",
  pages =        "xv + 473",
  year =         "1999",
  ISBN =         "0-201-43294-3 (paperback)",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-201-43294-7 (paperback)",
  LCCN =         "QA76.73.J38L56 1999",
  bibdate =      "Tue May 11 07:30:11 1999",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/java.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  price =        "US\$42.95",
  abstract =     "The nucleus of the Java 2 platform, the Java Virtual
                 Machine is the technology that enables the Java 2
                 platform to host applications on any computer or
                 operating system without rewriting or recompiling. This
                 book was written by those directly responsible for the
                 design and implementation of the Java Virtual Machine,
                 and is the complete and definitive specification for
                 the technology. It is an essential reference for
                 writers of compilers for the Java programming language
                 and implementors of the Java Virtual Machine. This
                 second edition specifies the newest version of the Java
                 Virtual Machine and provides a fascinating view into
                 the inner workings of the Java 2 platform.",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  tableofcontents = "1: Introduction \\
                 2: Java Programming Language Concepts \\
                 3: The Structure of the Java Virtual Machine \\
                 4: The class File Format \\
                 5: Loading, Linking, and Initializing \\
                 6: The Java Virtual Machine Instruction Set \\
                 7: Compiling for the Java Virtual Machine \\
                 8: Threads and Locks \\
                 9: Opcode Mnemonics by Opcode \\
                 Appendix: Summary of Clarifications and Amendments",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lindley:2004:DKT
author: David Lindley
title: Degrees Kelvin: a Tale of Genius, Invention, and Tragedy
publisher: Joseph Henry Press
address: Washington, DC, USA
pages: viii + 366
year: 2004
ISBN: 0-309-09073-3 (hardcover), 0-309-53095-4 (e-book) OR 0309090733 (hardcover), 0309530954 (ebook)
LCCN: QC16.K3 L56 2004
bibdate: Mon Nov 22 18:16:00 MST 2004
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager
bibtimestamp: 2004.11.22 18:16:00 MST
keywords: cable; Cambridge; compass; controversies; conundrums; Kelvin
subject: Kelvin, William Thomson, Baron; Physicists: Great Britain; Biography
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
subjectdates: 1824--1907
rawauthor: David Lindley
rawtitle: {Degrees Kelvin}: a Tale of Genius, Invention, and Tragedy
ISBN13:
978-0-309-09073-5 (hardcover), 978-0-309-53095-8 (e-book) OR 9780309090735 (hardcover), 9780309530958 (ebook)

URL:
ftp://uiarchive.cso.uiuc.edu/pub/etext/gutenberg/; http://www.loc.gov/catdir/toc/ecip0410/2003022885.html

abstract:
Destined to become the definitive biography of one of the most important figures in modern science, booktitle Degrees Kelvin unravels the mystery of a life composed of equal parts triumph and tragedy, hubris and humility, yielding a surprising and compelling portrait of a complex and enigmatic man.

TOC:
Acknowledgments Introduction 1: Cambridge 2: Conundrums 3: Cable 4: Controversies 5: Compass 6: Kelvin Epilogue Bibliography Notes Index

rawabstract:
Destined to become the definitive biography of one of the most important figures in modern science, \booktitle{Degrees Kelvin} unravels the mystery of a life composed of equal parts triumph and tragedy, hubris and humility, yielding a surprising and compelling portrait of a complex and enigmatic man.

rawTOC:
Acknowledgments \\ Introduction \\ 1: Cambridge \\ 2: Conundrums \\ 3: Cable \\ 4: Controversies \\ 5: Compass \\ 6: Kelvin \\ Epilogue \\ Bibliography \\ Notes \\ Index

entry:
@Book{Lindley:2004:DKT,
  author =       "David Lindley",
  title =        "{Degrees Kelvin}: a Tale of Genius, Invention, and
                 Tragedy",
  publisher =    "Joseph Henry Press",
  address =      "Washington, DC, USA",
  pages =        "viii + 366",
  year =         "2004",
  ISBN =         "0-309-09073-3 (hardcover), 0-309-53095-4 (e-book)",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-309-09073-5 (hardcover), 978-0-309-53095-8
                 (e-book)",
  LCCN =         "QC16.K3 L56 2004",
  bibdate =      "Mon Nov 22 18:16:00 MST 2004",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager",
  price =        "US\$27.59",
  URL =          "ftp://uiarchive.cso.uiuc.edu/pub/etext/gutenberg/;
                 http://www.loc.gov/catdir/toc/ecip0410/2003022885.html",
  abstract =     "Destined to become the definitive biography of one of
                 the most important figures in modern science,
                 \booktitle{Degrees Kelvin} unravels the mystery of a
                 life composed of equal parts triumph and tragedy,
                 hubris and humility, yielding a surprising and
                 compelling portrait of a complex and enigmatic man.",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  keywords =     "cable; Cambridge; compass; controversies; conundrums;
                 Kelvin",
  subject =      "Kelvin, William Thomson, Baron; Physicists: Great
                 Britain; Biography",
  subject-dates = "1824--1907",
  tableofcontents = "Acknowledgments \\
                 Introduction \\
                 1: Cambridge \\
                 2: Conundrums \\
                 3: Cable \\
                 4: Controversies \\
                 5: Compass \\
                 6: Kelvin \\
                 Epilogue \\
                 Bibliography \\
                 Notes \\
                 Index",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lindley:2008:UEH
author: David Lindley
title: Uncertainty: Einstein, Heisenberg, Bohr, and the struggle for the soul of science
publisher: pub-ANCHOR-BOOKS
address: pub-ANCHOR-BOOKS:adr
pages: viii + 257
year: 2008
ISBN: 1-4000-7996-9 OR 1400079969
ISBN13: 978-1-4000-7996-4 OR 9781400079964
LCCN: QC174.17.H4 L56 2007
bibdate: Tue Dec 09 15:00:37 2008
bibtimestamp: 2008.12.09 15:00:37 ???
URL: http://www.loc.gov/catdir/toc/ecip0614/2006017029.html
subject: Heisenberg uncertainty principle; Physics; Philosophy
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: David Lindley
rawtitle: Uncertainty: {Einstein}, {Heisenberg}, {Bohr}, and the struggle for the soul of science
bibsource:
https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/bibnet/authors/b/bohr-niels.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/bibnet/authors/h/heisenberg-werner.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/einstein.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; melvyl.cdlib.org:210/CDL90

abstract:
The remarkable story of a startling scientific idea that ignited a battle among the greatest minds of the twentieth century and profoundly influenced intellectual inquiry in fields ranging from physics to literary criticism, anthropology and journalism. In 1927, young German physicist Werner Heisenberg challenged centuries of scientific understanding when he introduced what came to be known as `the uncertainty principle.' Heisenberg proved that in many physical measurements, you can obtain one bit of information only at the price of losing another. This proposition, undermining the cherished belief that science could reveal the physical world with limitless detail and precision, placed Heisenberg in direct opposition to the revered Albert Einstein. Niels Bohr, Heisenberg's mentor and Einstein's long-time friend, found himself caught between the two. Bohr understood that Heisenberg was correct, but he also recognized the vital necessity of gaining Einstein's support as the world faced the shocking implications of Heisenberg's principle.

TOC:
Contents Introduction 1. Irritable Particles 2. Entropy Strives Toward a Maximum 3. An Enigma, a Subject of Profound Astonishment 4. How Does an Electron Decide? 5. An Audacity Unheard of in Earlier Times 6. Lack of Knowledge is No Guarantee of Success 7. How Can One Be Happy? 8. I Would Rather Be a Cobbler 9. Something Has Happened 10. The Soul of the Old System 11. I Am Inclined to Give Up Determinism 12. Our Words Don't Fit 13. Awful Bohr Incantation Terminology 14. Now the Game Was Won 15. Life Experience and not Scientific Experience 16. Possibilities of Unambiguous Interpretation 17. The No-Man's-Land Between Logic and Physics 18. Anarchy At Last Postscript

rawabstract:
The remarkable story of a startling scientific idea that ignited a battle among the greatest minds of the twentieth century and profoundly influenced intellectual inquiry in fields ranging from physics to literary criticism, anthropology and journalism. In 1927, young German physicist Werner Heisenberg challenged centuries of scientific understanding when he introduced what came to be known as `the uncertainty principle.' Heisenberg proved that in many physical measurements, you can obtain one bit of information only at the price of losing another. This proposition, undermining the cherished belief that science could reveal the physical world with limitless detail and precision, placed Heisenberg in direct opposition to the revered Albert Einstein. Niels Bohr, Heisenberg's mentor and Einstein's long-time friend, found himself caught between the two. Bohr understood that Heisenberg was correct, but he also recognized the vital necessity of gaining Einstein's support as the world faced the shocking implications of Heisenberg's principle.

rawTOC:
Contents \\ Introduction \\ 1. Irritable Particles \\ 2. Entropy Strives Toward a Maximum \\ 3. An Enigma, a Subject of Profound Astonishment \\ 4. How Does an Electron Decide? \\ 5. An Audacity Unheard of in Earlier Times \\ 6. Lack of Knowledge is No Guarantee of Success \\ 7. How Can One Be Happy? \\ 8. I Would Rather Be a Cobbler \\ 9. Something Has Happened \\ 10. The Soul of the Old System \\ 11. I Am Inclined to Give Up Determinism \\ 12. Our Words Don't Fit \\ 13. Awful Bohr Incantation Terminology \\ 14. Now the Game Was Won \\ 15. Life Experience and not Scientific Experience \\ 16. Possibilities of Unambiguous Interpretation \\ 17. The No-Man's-Land Between Logic and Physics \\ 18. Anarchy At Last \\ Postscript

entry:
@Book{Lindley:2008:UEH,
  author =       "David Lindley",
  title =        "Uncertainty: {Einstein}, {Heisenberg}, {Bohr}, and the
                 struggle for the soul of science",
  publisher =    pub-ANCHOR-BOOKS,
  address =      pub-ANCHOR-BOOKS:adr,
  pages =        "viii + 257",
  year =         "2008",
  ISBN =         "1-4000-7996-9",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-1-4000-7996-4",
  LCCN =         "QC174.17.H4 L56 2007",
  bibdate =      "Tue Dec 09 15:00:37 2008",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/bibnet/authors/b/bohr-niels.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/bibnet/authors/h/heisenberg-werner.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/einstein.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 melvyl.cdlib.org:210/CDL90",
  URL =          "http://www.loc.gov/catdir/toc/ecip0614/2006017029.html",
  abstract =     "The remarkable story of a startling scientific idea
                 that ignited a battle among the greatest minds of the
                 twentieth century and profoundly influenced
                 intellectual inquiry in fields ranging from physics to
                 literary criticism, anthropology and journalism. In
                 1927, young German physicist Werner Heisenberg
                 challenged centuries of scientific understanding when
                 he introduced what came to be known as `the uncertainty
                 principle.' Heisenberg proved that in many physical
                 measurements, you can obtain one bit of information
                 only at the price of losing another. This proposition,
                 undermining the cherished belief that science could
                 reveal the physical world with limitless detail and
                 precision, placed Heisenberg in direct opposition to
                 the revered Albert Einstein. Niels Bohr, Heisenberg's
                 mentor and Einstein's long-time friend, found himself
                 caught between the two. Bohr understood that Heisenberg
                 was correct, but he also recognized the vital necessity
                 of gaining Einstein's support as the world faced the
                 shocking implications of Heisenberg's principle.",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  subject =      "Heisenberg uncertainty principle; Physics;
                 Philosophy",
  tableofcontents = "Contents \\
                 Introduction \\
                 1. Irritable Particles \\
                 2. Entropy Strives Toward a Maximum \\
                 3. An Enigma, a Subject of Profound Astonishment \\
                 4. How Does an Electron Decide? \\
                 5. An Audacity Unheard of in Earlier Times \\
                 6. Lack of Knowledge is No Guarantee of Success \\
                 7. How Can One Be Happy? \\
                 8. I Would Rather Be a Cobbler \\
                 9. Something Has Happened \\
                 10. The Soul of the Old System \\
                 11. I Am Inclined to Give Up Determinism \\
                 12. Our Words Don't Fit \\
                 13. Awful Bohr Incantation Terminology \\
                 14. Now the Game Was Won \\
                 15. Life Experience and not Scientific Experience \\
                 16. Possibilities of Unambiguous Interpretation \\
                 17. The No-Man's-Land Between Logic and Physics \\
                 18. Anarchy At Last \\
                 Postscript",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lions:1996:LCU
author: John Lions
title: Lions' Commentary on UNIX 6th Edition, with Source Code
publisher: Peer-to-Peer Communications
address: San Jose, CA 95164-0218, USA
pages: 254
year: 1996
ISBN: 1-57398-013-7 OR 1573980137
ISBN13: 978-1-57398-013-5 OR 9781573980135
LCCN: QA76.76.O63 L562 1996
bibdate: Fri Jun 26 10:43:09 1998
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/unix.bib
bibtimestamp: 1998.06.26 10:43:09 ???
series: Computer classics revisited
TOC: UNIX operating system source code level six A commentary on the UNIX operating system
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: John Lions
rawtitle: {Lions'} Commentary on {UNIX 6th Edition}, with Source Code
rawTOC: UNIX operating system source code level six \\ A commentary on the UNIX operating system
note:
With forewords by Dennis M. Ritchie and Ken Thompson. Prefatory notes by Peter H. Salus and Michael Tilson; a Historical Note by Peter H. Salus; and Appreciations by Greg Rose, Mike O'Dell, Berny Goodheart, Peter Collinson, and Peter Reintjes. Originally circulated as two restricted-release volumes: ``UNIX Operating System Source Code Level Six'', and ``A Commentary on the UNIX Operating System''.

URL:
http://wiki.tuhs.org/doku.php?id=publications:lions_commentary; http://www.lemis.com/grog/Documentation/Lions/; http://www.peer-to-peer.com/catalog/opsrc/lions.html; https://github.com/kanner/lions-book

rawnote:
With forewords by Dennis M. Ritchie and Ken Thompson. Prefatory notes by Peter H. Salus and Michael Tilson; a Historical Note by Peter H. Salus; and Appreciations by Greg Rose, Mike O'Dell, Berny Goodheart, Peter Collinson, and Peter Reintjes. Originally circulated as two restricted-release volumes: ``UNIX Operating System Source Code Level Six'', and ``A Commentary on the UNIX Operating System''.

entry:
@Book{Lions:1996:LCU,
  author =       "John Lions",
  title =        "{Lions'} Commentary on {UNIX 6th Edition}, with Source
                 Code",
  publisher =    "Peer-to-Peer Communications",
  address =      "San Jose, CA 95164-0218, USA",
  pages =        "254",
  year =         "1996",
  ISBN =         "1-57398-013-7",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-1-57398-013-5",
  LCCN =         "QA76.76.O63 L562 1996",
  bibdate =      "Fri Jun 26 10:43:09 1998",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/unix.bib",
  note =         "With forewords by Dennis M. Ritchie and Ken Thompson.
                 Prefatory notes by Peter H. Salus and Michael Tilson; a
                 Historical Note by Peter H. Salus; and Appreciations by
                 Greg Rose, Mike O'Dell, Berny Goodheart, Peter
                 Collinson, and Peter Reintjes. Originally circulated as
                 two restricted-release volumes: ``UNIX Operating System
                 Source Code Level Six'', and ``A Commentary on the UNIX
                 Operating System''.",
  price =        "US\$29.96; CAN\$41.95",
  series =       "Computer classics revisited",
  URL =          "http://wiki.tuhs.org/doku.php?id=publications:lions_commentary;
                 http://www.lemis.com/grog/Documentation/Lions/;
                 http://www.peer-to-peer.com/catalog/opsrc/lions.html;
                 https://github.com/kanner/lions-book",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  tableofcontents = "UNIX operating system source code level six \\
                 A commentary on the UNIX operating system",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lipkin:1999:LLV
author: Bernice Sacks Lipkin
title: LaTeX for Linux: a Vade Mecum
publisher: pub-SV
address: pub-SV:adr
pages: xxxi + 568
year: 1999
ISBN: 0-387-98708-8 (paperback) OR 0387987088 (paperback)
ISBN13: 978-0-387-98708-8 (paperback) OR 9780387987088 (paperback)
LCCN: Z253.4 L38 L56 1999
bibdate: Thu Sep 21 10:27:12 2000
bibtimestamp: 2000.09.21 10:27:12 ???
keywords: Computerized typesetting; LaTeX (Computer file)
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Bernice Sacks Lipkin
rawtitle: {\LaTeX} for {Linux}: a Vade Mecum
bibsource:
https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/linux.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/texbook3.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/unix.bib

abstract:
booktitle LaTeX for Linux is a comprehensive introduction and guide to using LaTeX. While it is directed at Linux and UNIX users, it is also a first-rate how-to book on using LaTeX to prepare articles, books, and theses for users of any system that supports LaTeX. Unlike other LaTeX books, it is especially useful for someone coming to LaTeX for the first time. As Linux grows rapidly in popularity, more and more people looking to take advantage of the desktop publishing power of LaTeX --- included with most Linux distributions --- will find LaTeX for Linux a wonderful way to get started.

TOC:
Part I: Reading LaTeX / 1 1: What a LaTeX Command Does / 3 2: Concepts: How LaTeX Operates on Text / 7 2.1: Grammatical Elements / 8 2.2: Instructions to LaTeX / 9 2.2.1: Commands / 10 2.2.2: Declarations / 11 2.2.3: Environments / 12 2.3: Basic Principles in Reading and Writing LaTeX Commands / 14 2.4: The Scope of an Instruction / 15 2.5: LaTeX Conventions / 17 3: Document Classes / 21 3.1: LaTeX 's Style of Styling Styles / 21 3.2: Format of a Very Simple LaTeX File / 23 3.3: LaTeX -defined Classes / 23 3.4: Slides / 24 3.5: Letters / 25 3.6: Articles / 29 3.7: Reports / 30 3.8: Books / 30 3.9: Document Class Options / 32 3.10: TOC Option / 36 Part II: Preparatory Tasks / 37 4: Constructing practice.tex, a Practice File / 39 5: Setting Emacs Keys for Common Constructions / 45 5.1: Writing in Emacs / 45 5.2: A Font Shape Template / 46 5.3: A List Template / 48 5.4: A Verbatim Template / 51 5.5: A Macro Template / 52 5.6: A Logo Template / 53 6: Viewing and Printing Marked Up Files / 55 7: Dealing with Errors / 59 7.1: Real Errors / 60 7.2: Overfull and Underfull Lines and Pages / 64 7.2.1: The overfull line / 64 7.2.2: The underfull line / 67 7.2.3: The overfull page / 67 7.2.4: The underfull page / 68 7.2.5: Other alerts / 68 Part III: Writing LaTeX / 71 8: LaTeX -Reserved Single-Character Commands / 73 8.1: Single-Character Command Symbols / 73 8.2: Writing Special Symbols As Ordinary Text / 75 8.3: Writing Aliases For Single Character Commands / 77 8.4: Meta Level Mimicking Of Text Commands / 78 9: Single-Word Instructions / 81 9.1: Font Features / 81 9.2: Commands / 83 9.2.1: The LaTeX repertoire of commands / 84 9.2.2: User-created new commands / 87 9.3: Declarations / 88 9.4: Environments / 89 9.4.1: Using an environment whose name is a defined declaration / 90 9.4.2: Constructing an environment from an existing environment / 91 9.4.3: Creating environments from scratch / 92 9.4.4: Trouble spots in creating a new environment / 93 10: Newcommands and Macros / 95 10.1: What a Macro Is / 95 10.2: Exact Substitution / 95 10.3: PlaceHolder Substitution / 96 10.3.1: Composing the macro / 97 10.3.2: Using the macro / 98 10.3.3: Revising a macro definition / 99 10.4: Using LaTeX Instructions in the Macro / 99 10.4.1: Commands in the macro argument / 99 10.4.2: Declarations in the macro argument / 100 10.4.3: Environments and macros / 101 10.5: Incorporating a Macro in a Macro / 103 10.6: The Complete Newcommand Format / 104 10.7: Trouble Spots in Writing Macros / 107 10.8: The Complete Newenvironment Format / 108 Part IV: Formatting in Text Mode / 111 11: Fonts / 115 11.1: Font Terminology / 116 11.2: Commands/Declarations That Control Font Features / 118 11.2.1: Manipulating font family, series and shapes / 118 11.2.2: Font sizes / 121 11.2.3: Changing both font size and type style / 123 11.3: Naming Conventions for Fonts / 123 11.3.1: Classic TEX fonts / 123 11.3.2: Using NFSS to classify names / 125 11.3.3: Fonts supplied with LaTeX / 130 11.4: The Directory Structure for Storing Fonts / 133 11.5: To Load a New Font / 134 11.5.1: Why load yet another font? / 134 11.5.2: To change the main font family for the entire document / 135 11.5.3: To load an additional font from NFSS descriptors / 139 11.5.4: The main font and the selectfont font / 145 11.5.5: Behind the scenes in loading and using a font / 146 12: Accents, Dingbats, Standard and Nonstandard Codes / 157 12.1: The Fonts on Disk / 159 12.1.1: Naming font files / 159 12.1.2: Directory names / 160 12.1.3: To view and use a font table / 161 12.2: The Standard ASCII Codes / 164 12.2.1: Built-In letter accents / 167 12.2.2: Trademarks and registries / 168 12.3: Nonstandard Coding Tables / 170 12.3.1: Dingbats / 172 12.3.2: Saint Mary Road symbol fonts / 174 12.3.3: European Computer Modern text fonts / 177 12.3.4: text companion symbols / 178 12.3.5: Math symbol fonts / 179 12.3.6: wasy symbol fonts / 181 12.4: Nonstandard Sizes: Banners, Posters And Spreads / 182 13: Manipulating Space / 195 13.1: Adding a Small Amount of Space Between Characters/Words / 195 13.2: Adding Significant Space Between Words / 197 13.3: Adding Space Between Sentences / 200 13.4: Adding Space Between Two Lines / 201 13.4.1: Using [length] / 201 13.4.2: Using the vspace command / 202 13.4.3: Using fixed size vertical skips / 203 13.4.4: Filling vertical space up to what's needed / 204 13.4.5: The /par command / 205 13.5: Changing the Permanent Spacing Between Lines / 205 13.6: Adding a Blank Line Between Paragraphs / 205 13.7: Adding Permanent Space Between Paragraphs / 206 13.8: Double Spacing a Draft Copy / 206 14: Lists / 209 14.1: The Itemize List / 210 14.2: The Enumerate List / 212 14.3: The Description List / 214 14.4: Other Description List Styles / 216 14.5: The Trivlist Environment / 219 15: Aligning and Indenting Text / 221 15.1: Aligning the Text Horizontally / 221 15.2: Raising Text / 223 15.3: Outdenting / 224 15.4: Breaking Single Lines on the Right / 225 15.5: Creating an Outline / 226 15.6: Using Displayed Paragraph Formats / 228 15.6.1: Quotation and quote environments / 228 15.6.2: Verse environment / 229 15.6.3: Center environment / 230 15.6.4: An ordinary description list / 231 15.7: Simple Paragraph Indenting / 232 15.8: Controlling the Degree of Indentation / 232 16: Floating Objects / 237 16.1.1: General format / 237 16.1.2: Usage / 239 16.1.3: Subfigures / 242 16.1.4: Working text around a figure / 243 16.1.5: Creating new float styles / 250 16.1.6: Captions / 251 16.2: Marginal Notes / 252 16.3.1: Tabs / 254 16.3.2: The tabular environment / 258 16.3.3: Floats and multiple columns / 270 17.1: Footnotes in Text / 273 17.1.1: Footnote syntax in text / 274 17.1.2: Shifting between numbers and symbols / 275 17.1.3: Numbering by symbol / 275 17.1.4: Resetting the counter / 276 17.1.5: Examples of numbering styles / 277 17.2: Footnotes in a Minipage / 279 17.2.1: Minipage footnotes with independent numbering / 279 17.2.2: Blending minipage and text footnotes / 281 17.3: Changing Footnote Style / 284 17.4: Footnote Modification Packages / 285 18: Cross-Referencing / 287 18.1: Referencing Numbered LaTeX Objects / 287 18.2: Page References / 289 18.3: Referencing Footnotes / 290 18.4: Positioning the Label / 291 18.4.1: The LaTeX object is stylized / 291 18.4.2: The LaTeX object is not stylized / 292 19: Literal Text and Silent Text / 295 19.1: Verbatim Text / 295 19.2: Writing Notes To Yourself / 299 19.2.1: Using the % / 299 19.2.2: Invisible reminders / 299 19.2.3: Visible reminders / 300 19.2.4: The LaTeX /typeout and /typein commands / 301 Part V: Formatting in Math Mode / 303 20: Math Symbols, Alphabets and Grammar / 305 20.1: Built-in Symbols / 306 20.1.1: Greek letters, booleans, integrals and sums / 306 20.1.2: Some common mathematical operators / 307 20.1.3: Math accents / 308 20.1.4: Adding ordinary text in math mode / 309 20.2: Modifying the Appearance of Equations / 310 20.2.1: Changing math type style / 310 20.2.2: Space wedges / 312 20.2.3: Size / 313 20.2.4: Creating a New Math Alphabet Command Name / 315 20.2.5: Adding Math Symbols / 318 20.3: Writing, Protecting and Revising Math Macros / 320 20.3.1: Writing a math macro / 320 20.3.2: Redefining the math macro / 321 20.4: Lemmas, Axioms and Conjectures / 322 21: Single Line Math Modes / 325 21.1: Unnumbered Equation in Running Text / 325 21.2: displaymath for a Single Unnumbered Equation / 326 21.3: A Numbered Equation on a Separate Line / 327 22: Arrays: Multi-Line Math Mode / 329 22.1: Creating an Array / 329 Part VI: Formatting in Box Mode / 337 23: Box Mode / 339 23.1: The Single Line Box: makebox , framebox / 340 23.1.1: The makebox and mbox commands / 340 23.1.2: framebox and fbox commands / 341 23.1.3: Changing the appearance of the frame / 342 23.1.4: Fancy frames / 344 23.2: The Paragraph Box: Parboxes and Minipages / 345 23.2.1: The parbox / 345 23.2.2: The minipage environment / 348 23.2.3: Framing the minipage / 354 23.3: The Inked Rectangle: The Rulebox / 356 23.3.1: Solid boxes / 356 23.3.2: Struts / 358 23.4: Sizing the Box in Relative Terms / 358 23.5: Saving Designs / 362 Part VII: Enhancements to the Text / 369 24: Creating Pictures and Graphics / 371 24.1: Creating Pictures in LaTeX / 371 24.1.1: Positioning the picture / 372 24.1.2: Picture commands / 372 24.1.3: Additional graphics packages / 374 24.2: The xv Package / 376 24.3: The XFig Package / 379 24.4: The XPaint Package / 382 24.5: ImageMagick / 382 24.6: GIMP / 386 24.7: Packages for Ready Money / 388 25: Inserting Completed Pictures and Graphics / 391 25.1: Step 1: Linking the Printer Driver and graphicx / 392 25.2: Step 2: Size Information in the EPS File / 393 25.2.1: The BoundingBox / 394 25.2.2: The calc package / 396 25.3: Step 3: Using the /includegraphics Command / 398 25.4: //includegraphics Options / 401 25.4.1: Resetting the BoundingBox / 402 25.4.2: viewport: resetting the part of the picture to exhibit / 403 25.4.3: Resetting exhibition width / 403 25.4.4: Resetting exhibition height / 404 25.4.5: Scaling: another way to reset size / 404 25.4.6: Resetting exhibition orientation / 405 25.4.7: The interaction between size and orientation / 408

rawabstract:
\booktitle{LaTeX for Linux} is a comprehensive introduction and guide to using LaTeX. While it is directed at Linux and UNIX users, it is also a first-rate how-to book on using LaTeX to prepare articles, books, and theses for users of any system that supports LaTeX. Unlike other LaTeX books, it is especially useful for someone coming to LaTeX for the first time. As Linux grows rapidly in popularity, more and more people looking to take advantage of the desktop publishing power of LaTeX --- included with most Linux distributions --- will find LaTeX for Linux a wonderful way to get started.

rawTOC:
Part I: Reading {\LaTeX} / 1 \\ 1: What a {\LaTeX} Command Does / 3 \\ 2: Concepts: How {\LaTeX} Operates on Text / 7 \\ 2.1: Grammatical Elements / 8 \\ 2.2: Instructions to {\LaTeX} / 9 \\ 2.2.1: Commands / 10 \\ 2.2.2: Declarations / 11 \\ 2.2.3: Environments / 12 \\ 2.3: Basic Principles in Reading and Writing {\LaTeX} Commands / 14 \\ 2.4: The Scope of an Instruction / 15 \\ 2.5: {\LaTeX} Conventions / 17 \\ 3: Document Classes / 21 \\ 3.1: {\LaTeX}'s Style of Styling Styles / 21 \\ 3.2: Format of a Very Simple {\LaTeX} File / 23 \\ 3.3: {\LaTeX}-defined Classes / 23 \\ 3.4: Slides / 24 \\ 3.5: Letters / 25 \\ 3.6: Articles / 29 \\ 3.7: Reports / 30 \\ 3.8: Books / 30 \\ 3.9: Document Class Options / 32 \\ 3.10: TOC Option / 36 \\ Part II: Preparatory Tasks / 37 \\ 4: Constructing practice.tex, a Practice File / 39 \\ 5: Setting Emacs Keys for Common Constructions / 45 \\ 5.1: Writing in Emacs / 45 \\ 5.2: A Font Shape Template / 46 \\ 5.3: A List Template / 48 \\ 5.4: A Verbatim Template / 51 \\ 5.5: A Macro Template / 52 \\ 5.6: A Logo Template / 53 \\ 6: Viewing and Printing Marked Up Files / 55 \\ 7: Dealing with Errors / 59 \\ 7.1: Real Errors / 60 \\ 7.2: Overfull and Underfull Lines and Pages / 64 \\ 7.2.1: The overfull line / 64 \\ 7.2.2: The underfull line / 67 \\ 7.2.3: The overfull page / 67 \\ 7.2.4: The underfull page / 68 \\ 7.2.5: Other alerts / 68 \\ Part III: Writing {\LaTeX} / 71 \\ 8: {\LaTeX}-Reserved Single-Character Commands / 73 \\ 8.1: Single-Character Command Symbols / 73 \\ 8.2: Writing Special Symbols As Ordinary Text / 75 \\ 8.3: Writing Aliases For Single Character Commands / 77 \\ 8.4: Meta Level Mimicking Of Text Commands / 78 \\ 9: Single-Word Instructions / 81 \\ 9.1: Font Features / 81 \\ 9.2: Commands / 83 \\ 9.2.1: The {\LaTeX} repertoire of commands / 84 \\ 9.2.2: User-created new commands / 87 \\ 9.3: Declarations / 88 \\ 9.4: Environments / 89 \\ 9.4.1: Using an environment whose name is a defined declaration / 90 \\ 9.4.2: Constructing an environment from an existing environment / 91 \\ 9.4.3: Creating environments from scratch / 92 \\ 9.4.4: Trouble spots in creating a new environment / 93 \\ 10: Newcommands and Macros / 95 \\ 10.1: What a Macro Is / 95 \\ 10.2: Exact Substitution / 95 \\ 10.3: PlaceHolder Substitution / 96 \\ 10.3.1: Composing the macro / 97 \\ 10.3.2: Using the macro / 98 \\ 10.3.3: Revising a macro definition / 99 \\ 10.4: Using {\LaTeX} Instructions in the Macro / 99 \\ 10.4.1: Commands in the macro argument / 99 \\ 10.4.2: Declarations in the macro argument / 100 \\ 10.4.3: Environments and macros / 101 \\ 10.5: Incorporating a Macro in a Macro / 103 \\ 10.6: The Complete Newcommand Format / 104 \\ 10.7: Trouble Spots in Writing Macros / 107 \\ 10.8: The Complete Newenvironment Format / 108 \\ Part IV: Formatting in Text Mode / 111 \\ 11: Fonts / 115 \\ 11.1: Font Terminology / 116 \\ 11.2: Commands/Declarations That Control Font Features / 118 \\ 11.2.1: Manipulating font family, series and shapes / 118 \\ 11.2.2: Font sizes / 121 \\ 11.2.3: Changing both font size and type style / 123 \\ 11.3: Naming Conventions for Fonts / 123 \\ 11.3.1: Classic TEX fonts / 123 \\ 11.3.2: Using NFSS to classify names / 125 \\ 11.3.3: Fonts supplied with {\LaTeX} / 130 \\ 11.4: The Directory Structure for Storing Fonts / 133 \\ 11.5: To Load a New Font / 134 \\ 11.5.1: Why load yet another font? / 134 \\ 11.5.2: To change the main font family for the entire document / 135 \\ 11.5.3: To load an additional font from NFSS descriptors / 139 \\ 11.5.4: The main font and the selectfont font / 145 \\ 11.5.5: Behind the scenes in loading and using a font / 146 \\ 12: Accents, Dingbats, Standard and Nonstandard Codes / 157 \\ 12.1: The Fonts on Disk / 159 \\ 12.1.1: Naming font files / 159 \\ 12.1.2: Directory names / 160 \\ 12.1.3: To view and use a font table / 161 \\ 12.2: The Standard ASCII Codes / 164 \\ 12.2.1: Built-In letter accents / 167 \\ 12.2.2: Trademarks and registries / 168 \\ 12.3: Nonstandard Coding Tables / 170 \\ 12.3.1: Dingbats / 172 \\ 12.3.2: Saint Mary Road symbol fonts / 174 \\ 12.3.3: European Computer Modern text fonts / 177 \\ 12.3.4: text companion symbols / 178 \\ 12.3.5: Math symbol fonts / 179 \\ 12.3.6: wasy symbol fonts / 181 \\ 12.4: Nonstandard Sizes: Banners, Posters And Spreads / 182 \\ 13: Manipulating Space / 195 \\ 13.1: Adding a Small Amount of Space Between Characters/Words / 195 \\ 13.2: Adding Significant Space Between Words / 197 \\ 13.3: Adding Space Between Sentences / 200 \\ 13.4: Adding Space Between Two Lines / 201 \\ 13.4.1: Using \\ [length] / 201 \\ 13.4.2: Using the \vspace command / 202 \\ 13.4.3: Using fixed size vertical skips / 203 \\ 13.4.4: Filling vertical space up to what's needed / 204 \\ 13.4.5: The /par command / 205 \\ 13.5: Changing the Permanent Spacing Between Lines / 205 \\ 13.6: Adding a Blank Line Between Paragraphs / 205 \\ 13.7: Adding Permanent Space Between Paragraphs / 206 \\ 13.8: Double Spacing a Draft Copy / 206 \\ 14: Lists / 209 \\ 14.1: The Itemize List / 210 \\ 14.2: The Enumerate List / 212 \\ 14.3: The Description List / 214 \\ 14.4: Other Description List Styles / 216 \\ 14.5: The Trivlist Environment / 219 \\ 15: Aligning and Indenting Text / 221 \\ 15.1: Aligning the Text Horizontally / 221 \\ 15.2: Raising Text / 223 \\ 15.3: Outdenting / 224 \\ 15.4: Breaking Single Lines on the Right / 225 \\ 15.5: Creating an Outline / 226 \\ 15.6: Using Displayed Paragraph Formats / 228 \\ 15.6.1: Quotation and quote environments / 228 \\ 15.6.2: Verse environment / 229 \\ 15.6.3: Center environment / 230 \\ 15.6.4: An ordinary description list / 231 \\ 15.7: Simple Paragraph Indenting / 232 \\ 15.8: Controlling the Degree of Indentation / 232 \\ 16: Floating Objects / 237 \\ 16.1.1: General format / 237 \\ 16.1.2: Usage / 239 \\ 16.1.3: Subfigures / 242 \\ 16.1.4: Working text around a figure / 243 \\ 16.1.5: Creating new float styles / 250 \\ 16.1.6: Captions / 251 \\ 16.2: Marginal Notes / 252 \\ 16.3.1: Tabs / 254 \\ 16.3.2: The tabular environment / 258 \\ 16.3.3: Floats and multiple columns / 270 \\ 17.1: Footnotes in Text / 273 \\ 17.1.1: Footnote syntax in text / 274 \\ 17.1.2: Shifting between numbers and symbols / 275 \\ 17.1.3: Numbering by symbol / 275 \\ 17.1.4: Resetting the counter / 276 \\ 17.1.5: Examples of numbering styles / 277 \\ 17.2: Footnotes in a Minipage / 279 \\ 17.2.1: Minipage footnotes with independent numbering / 279 \\ 17.2.2: Blending minipage and text footnotes / 281 \\ 17.3: Changing Footnote Style / 284 \\ 17.4: Footnote Modification Packages / 285 \\ 18: Cross-Referencing / 287 \\ 18.1: Referencing Numbered {\LaTeX} Objects / 287 \\ 18.2: Page References / 289 \\ 18.3: Referencing Footnotes / 290 \\ 18.4: Positioning the Label / 291 \\ 18.4.1: The {\LaTeX} object is stylized / 291 \\ 18.4.2: The {\LaTeX} object is not stylized / 292 \\ 19: Literal Text and Silent Text / 295 \\ 19.1: Verbatim Text / 295 \\ 19.2: Writing Notes To Yourself / 299 \\ 19.2.1: Using the \% / 299 \\ 19.2.2: Invisible reminders / 299 \\ 19.2.3: Visible reminders / 300 \\ 19.2.4: The {\LaTeX} /typeout and /typein commands / 301 \\ Part V: Formatting in Math Mode / 303 \\ 20: Math Symbols, Alphabets and Grammar / 305 \\ 20.1: Built-in Symbols / 306 \\ 20.1.1: Greek letters, booleans, integrals and sums / 306 \\ 20.1.2: Some common mathematical operators / 307 \\ 20.1.3: Math accents / 308 \\ 20.1.4: Adding ordinary text in math mode / 309 \\ 20.2: Modifying the Appearance of Equations / 310 \\ 20.2.1: Changing math type style / 310 \\ 20.2.2: Space wedges / 312 \\ 20.2.3: Size / 313 \\ 20.2.4: Creating a New Math Alphabet Command Name / 315 \\ 20.2.5: Adding Math Symbols / 318 \\ 20.3: Writing, Protecting and Revising Math Macros / 320 \\ 20.3.1: Writing a math macro / 320 \\ 20.3.2: Redefining the math macro / 321 \\ 20.4: Lemmas, Axioms and Conjectures / 322 \\ 21: Single Line Math Modes / 325 \\ 21.1: Unnumbered Equation in Running Text / 325 \\ 21.2: displaymath for a Single Unnumbered Equation / 326 \\ 21.3: A Numbered Equation on a Separate Line / 327 \\ 22: Arrays: Multi-Line Math Mode / 329 \\ 22.1: Creating an Array / 329 \\ Part VI: Formatting in Box Mode / 337 \\ 23: Box Mode / 339 \\ 23.1: The Single Line Box: \makebox, \framebox / 340 \\ 23.1.1: The \makebox and \mbox commands / 340 \\ 23.1.2: \framebox and \fbox commands / 341 \\ 23.1.3: Changing the appearance of the frame / 342 \\ 23.1.4: Fancy frames / 344 \\ 23.2: The Paragraph Box: Parboxes and Minipages / 345 \\ 23.2.1: The parbox / 345 \\ 23.2.2: The minipage environment / 348 \\ 23.2.3: Framing the minipage / 354 \\ 23.3: The Inked Rectangle: The Rulebox / 356 \\ 23.3.1: Solid boxes / 356 \\ 23.3.2: Struts / 358 \\ 23.4: Sizing the Box in Relative Terms / 358 \\ 23.5: Saving Designs / 362 \\ Part VII: Enhancements to the Text / 369 \\ 24: Creating Pictures and Graphics / 371 \\ 24.1: Creating Pictures in {\LaTeX} / 371 \\ 24.1.1: Positioning the picture / 372 \\ 24.1.2: Picture commands / 372 \\ 24.1.3: Additional graphics packages / 374 \\ 24.2: The xv Package / 376 \\ 24.3: The XFig Package / 379 \\ 24.4: The XPaint Package / 382 \\ 24.5: ImageMagick / 382 \\ 24.6: GIMP / 386 \\ 24.7: Packages for Ready Money / 388 \\ 25: Inserting Completed Pictures and Graphics / 391 \\ 25.1: Step 1: Linking the Printer Driver and graphicx / 392 \\ 25.2: Step 2: Size Information in the EPS File / 393 \\ 25.2.1: The BoundingBox / 394 \\ 25.2.2: The calc package / 396 \\ 25.3: Step 3: Using the /includegraphics Command / 398 \\ 25.4: //includegraphics Options / 401 \\ 25.4.1: Resetting the BoundingBox / 402 \\ 25.4.2: viewport: resetting the part of the picture to exhibit / 403 \\ 25.4.3: Resetting exhibition width / 403 \\ 25.4.4: Resetting exhibition height / 404 \\ 25.4.5: Scaling: another way to reset size / 404 \\ 25.4.6: Resetting exhibition orientation / 405 \\ 25.4.7: The interaction between size and orientation / 408

entry:
@Book{Lipkin:1999:LLV,
  author =       "Bernice Sacks Lipkin",
  title =        "{\LaTeX} for {Linux}: a Vade Mecum",
  publisher =    pub-SV,
  address =      pub-SV:adr,
  pages =        "xxxi + 568",
  year =         "1999",
  ISBN =         "0-387-98708-8 (paperback)",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-387-98708-8 (paperback)",
  LCCN =         "Z253.4 L38 L56 1999",
  bibdate =      "Thu Sep 21 10:27:12 2000",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/linux.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/texbook3.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/unix.bib",
  price =        "US\$49.95",
  abstract =     "\booktitle{LaTeX for Linux} is a comprehensive
                 introduction and guide to using LaTeX. While it is
                 directed at Linux and UNIX users, it is also a
                 first-rate how-to book on using LaTeX to prepare
                 articles, books, and theses for users of any system
                 that supports LaTeX. Unlike other LaTeX books, it is
                 especially useful for someone coming to LaTeX for the
                 first time. As Linux grows rapidly in popularity, more
                 and more people looking to take advantage of the
                 desktop publishing power of LaTeX --- included with
                 most Linux distributions --- will find LaTeX for Linux
                 a wonderful way to get started.",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  keywords =     "Computerized typesetting; LaTeX (Computer file)",
  tableofcontents = "Part I: Reading {\LaTeX} / 1 \\
                 1: What a {\LaTeX} Command Does / 3 \\
                 2: Concepts: How {\LaTeX} Operates on Text / 7 \\
                 2.1: Grammatical Elements / 8 \\
                 2.2: Instructions to {\LaTeX} / 9 \\
                 2.2.1: Commands / 10 \\
                 2.2.2: Declarations / 11 \\
                 2.2.3: Environments / 12 \\
                 2.3: Basic Principles in Reading and Writing {\LaTeX}
                 Commands / 14 \\
                 2.4: The Scope of an Instruction / 15 \\
                 2.5: {\LaTeX} Conventions / 17 \\
                 3: Document Classes / 21 \\
                 3.1: {\LaTeX}'s Style of Styling Styles / 21 \\
                 3.2: Format of a Very Simple {\LaTeX} File / 23 \\
                 3.3: {\LaTeX}-defined Classes / 23 \\
                 3.4: Slides / 24 \\
                 3.5: Letters / 25 \\
                 3.6: Articles / 29 \\
                 3.7: Reports / 30 \\
                 3.8: Books / 30 \\
                 3.9: Document Class Options / 32 \\
                 3.10: TOC Option / 36 \\
                 Part II: Preparatory Tasks / 37 \\
                 4: Constructing practice.tex, a Practice File / 39 \\
                 5: Setting Emacs Keys for Common Constructions / 45 \\
                 5.1: Writing in Emacs / 45 \\
                 5.2: A Font Shape Template / 46 \\
                 5.3: A List Template / 48 \\
                 5.4: A Verbatim Template / 51 \\
                 5.5: A Macro Template / 52 \\
                 5.6: A Logo Template / 53 \\
                 6: Viewing and Printing Marked Up Files / 55 \\
                 7: Dealing with Errors / 59 \\
                 7.1: Real Errors / 60 \\
                 7.2: Overfull and Underfull Lines and Pages / 64 \\
                 7.2.1: The overfull line / 64 \\
                 7.2.2: The underfull line / 67 \\
                 7.2.3: The overfull page / 67 \\
                 7.2.4: The underfull page / 68 \\
                 7.2.5: Other alerts / 68 \\
                 Part III: Writing {\LaTeX} / 71 \\
                 8: {\LaTeX}-Reserved Single-Character Commands / 73 \\
                 8.1: Single-Character Command Symbols / 73 \\
                 8.2: Writing Special Symbols As Ordinary Text / 75 \\
                 8.3: Writing Aliases For Single Character Commands / 77
                 \\
                 8.4: Meta Level Mimicking Of Text Commands / 78 \\
                 9: Single-Word Instructions / 81 \\
                 9.1: Font Features / 81 \\
                 9.2: Commands / 83 \\
                 9.2.1: The {\LaTeX} repertoire of commands / 84 \\
                 9.2.2: User-created new commands / 87 \\
                 9.3: Declarations / 88 \\
                 9.4: Environments / 89 \\
                 9.4.1: Using an environment whose name is a defined
                 declaration / 90 \\
                 9.4.2: Constructing an environment from an existing
                 environment / 91 \\
                 9.4.3: Creating environments from scratch / 92 \\
                 9.4.4: Trouble spots in creating a new environment / 93
                 \\
                 10: Newcommands and Macros / 95 \\
                 10.1: What a Macro Is / 95 \\
                 10.2: Exact Substitution / 95 \\
                 10.3: PlaceHolder Substitution / 96 \\
                 10.3.1: Composing the macro / 97 \\
                 10.3.2: Using the macro / 98 \\
                 10.3.3: Revising a macro definition / 99 \\
                 10.4: Using {\LaTeX} Instructions in the Macro / 99 \\
                 10.4.1: Commands in the macro argument / 99 \\
                 10.4.2: Declarations in the macro argument / 100 \\
                 10.4.3: Environments and macros / 101 \\
                 10.5: Incorporating a Macro in a Macro / 103 \\
                 10.6: The Complete Newcommand Format / 104 \\
                 10.7: Trouble Spots in Writing Macros / 107 \\
                 10.8: The Complete Newenvironment Format / 108 \\
                 Part IV: Formatting in Text Mode / 111 \\
                 11: Fonts / 115 \\
                 11.1: Font Terminology / 116 \\
                 11.2: Commands/Declarations That Control Font Features
                 / 118 \\
                 11.2.1: Manipulating font family, series and shapes /
                 118 \\
                 11.2.2: Font sizes / 121 \\
                 11.2.3: Changing both font size and type style / 123
                 \\
                 11.3: Naming Conventions for Fonts / 123 \\
                 11.3.1: Classic TEX fonts / 123 \\
                 11.3.2: Using NFSS to classify names / 125 \\
                 11.3.3: Fonts supplied with {\LaTeX} / 130 \\
                 11.4: The Directory Structure for Storing Fonts / 133
                 \\
                 11.5: To Load a New Font / 134 \\
                 11.5.1: Why load yet another font? / 134 \\
                 11.5.2: To change the main font family for the entire
                 document / 135 \\
                 11.5.3: To load an additional font from NFSS
                 descriptors / 139 \\
                 11.5.4: The main font and the selectfont font / 145 \\
                 11.5.5: Behind the scenes in loading and using a font /
                 146 \\
                 12: Accents, Dingbats, Standard and Nonstandard Codes /
                 157 \\
                 12.1: The Fonts on Disk / 159 \\
                 12.1.1: Naming font files / 159 \\
                 12.1.2: Directory names / 160 \\
                 12.1.3: To view and use a font table / 161 \\
                 12.2: The Standard ASCII Codes / 164 \\
                 12.2.1: Built-In letter accents / 167 \\
                 12.2.2: Trademarks and registries / 168 \\
                 12.3: Nonstandard Coding Tables / 170 \\
                 12.3.1: Dingbats / 172 \\
                 12.3.2: Saint Mary Road symbol fonts / 174 \\
                 12.3.3: European Computer Modern text fonts / 177 \\
                 12.3.4: text companion symbols / 178 \\
                 12.3.5: Math symbol fonts / 179 \\
                 12.3.6: wasy symbol fonts / 181 \\
                 12.4: Nonstandard Sizes: Banners, Posters And Spreads /
                 182 \\
                 13: Manipulating Space / 195 \\
                 13.1: Adding a Small Amount of Space Between
                 Characters/Words / 195 \\
                 13.2: Adding Significant Space Between Words / 197 \\
                 13.3: Adding Space Between Sentences / 200 \\
                 13.4: Adding Space Between Two Lines / 201 \\
                 13.4.1: Using \\ [length] / 201 \\
                 13.4.2: Using the \vspace command / 202 \\
                 13.4.3: Using fixed size vertical skips / 203 \\
                 13.4.4: Filling vertical space up to what's needed /
                 204 \\
                 13.4.5: The /par command / 205 \\
                 13.5: Changing the Permanent Spacing Between Lines /
                 205 \\
                 13.6: Adding a Blank Line Between Paragraphs / 205 \\
                 13.7: Adding Permanent Space Between Paragraphs / 206
                 \\
                 13.8: Double Spacing a Draft Copy / 206 \\
                 14: Lists / 209 \\
                 14.1: The Itemize List / 210 \\
                 14.2: The Enumerate List / 212 \\
                 14.3: The Description List / 214 \\
                 14.4: Other Description List Styles / 216 \\
                 14.5: The Trivlist Environment / 219 \\
                 15: Aligning and Indenting Text / 221 \\
                 15.1: Aligning the Text Horizontally / 221 \\
                 15.2: Raising Text / 223 \\
                 15.3: Outdenting / 224 \\
                 15.4: Breaking Single Lines on the Right / 225 \\
                 15.5: Creating an Outline / 226 \\
                 15.6: Using Displayed Paragraph Formats / 228 \\
                 15.6.1: Quotation and quote environments / 228 \\
                 15.6.2: Verse environment / 229 \\
                 15.6.3: Center environment / 230 \\
                 15.6.4: An ordinary description list / 231 \\
                 15.7: Simple Paragraph Indenting / 232 \\
                 15.8: Controlling the Degree of Indentation / 232 \\
                 16: Floating Objects / 237 \\
                 16.1.1: General format / 237 \\
                 16.1.2: Usage / 239 \\
                 16.1.3: Subfigures / 242 \\
                 16.1.4: Working text around a figure / 243 \\
                 16.1.5: Creating new float styles / 250 \\
                 16.1.6: Captions / 251 \\
                 16.2: Marginal Notes / 252 \\
                 16.3.1: Tabs / 254 \\
                 16.3.2: The tabular environment / 258 \\
                 16.3.3: Floats and multiple columns / 270 \\
                 17.1: Footnotes in Text / 273 \\
                 17.1.1: Footnote syntax in text / 274 \\
                 17.1.2: Shifting between numbers and symbols / 275 \\
                 17.1.3: Numbering by symbol / 275 \\
                 17.1.4: Resetting the counter / 276 \\
                 17.1.5: Examples of numbering styles / 277 \\
                 17.2: Footnotes in a Minipage / 279 \\
                 17.2.1: Minipage footnotes with independent numbering /
                 279 \\
                 17.2.2: Blending minipage and text footnotes / 281 \\
                 17.3: Changing Footnote Style / 284 \\
                 17.4: Footnote Modification Packages / 285 \\
                 18: Cross-Referencing / 287 \\
                 18.1: Referencing Numbered {\LaTeX} Objects / 287 \\
                 18.2: Page References / 289 \\
                 18.3: Referencing Footnotes / 290 \\
                 18.4: Positioning the Label / 291 \\
                 18.4.1: The {\LaTeX} object is stylized / 291 \\
                 18.4.2: The {\LaTeX} object is not stylized / 292 \\
                 19: Literal Text and Silent Text / 295 \\
                 19.1: Verbatim Text / 295 \\
                 19.2: Writing Notes To Yourself / 299 \\
                 19.2.1: Using the \% / 299 \\
                 19.2.2: Invisible reminders / 299 \\
                 19.2.3: Visible reminders / 300 \\
                 19.2.4: The {\LaTeX} /typeout and /typein commands /
                 301 \\
                 Part V: Formatting in Math Mode / 303 \\
                 20: Math Symbols, Alphabets and Grammar / 305 \\
                 20.1: Built-in Symbols / 306 \\
                 20.1.1: Greek letters, booleans, integrals and sums /
                 306 \\
                 20.1.2: Some common mathematical operators / 307 \\
                 20.1.3: Math accents / 308 \\
                 20.1.4: Adding ordinary text in math mode / 309 \\
                 20.2: Modifying the Appearance of Equations / 310 \\
                 20.2.1: Changing math type style / 310 \\
                 20.2.2: Space wedges / 312 \\
                 20.2.3: Size / 313 \\
                 20.2.4: Creating a New Math Alphabet Command Name / 315
                 \\
                 20.2.5: Adding Math Symbols / 318 \\
                 20.3: Writing, Protecting and Revising Math Macros /
                 320 \\
                 20.3.1: Writing a math macro / 320 \\
                 20.3.2: Redefining the math macro / 321 \\
                 20.4: Lemmas, Axioms and Conjectures / 322 \\
                 21: Single Line Math Modes / 325 \\
                 21.1: Unnumbered Equation in Running Text / 325 \\
                 21.2: displaymath for a Single Unnumbered Equation /
                 326 \\
                 21.3: A Numbered Equation on a Separate Line / 327 \\
                 22: Arrays: Multi-Line Math Mode / 329 \\
                 22.1: Creating an Array / 329 \\
                 Part VI: Formatting in Box Mode / 337 \\
                 23: Box Mode / 339 \\
                 23.1: The Single Line Box: \makebox, \framebox / 340
                 \\
                 23.1.1: The \makebox and \mbox commands / 340 \\
                 23.1.2: \framebox and \fbox commands / 341 \\
                 23.1.3: Changing the appearance of the frame / 342 \\
                 23.1.4: Fancy frames / 344 \\
                 23.2: The Paragraph Box: Parboxes and Minipages / 345
                 \\
                 23.2.1: The parbox / 345 \\
                 23.2.2: The minipage environment / 348 \\
                 23.2.3: Framing the minipage / 354 \\
                 23.3: The Inked Rectangle: The Rulebox / 356 \\
                 23.3.1: Solid boxes / 356 \\
                 23.3.2: Struts / 358 \\
                 23.4: Sizing the Box in Relative Terms / 358 \\
                 23.5: Saving Designs / 362 \\
                 Part VII: Enhancements to the Text / 369 \\
                 24: Creating Pictures and Graphics / 371 \\
                 24.1: Creating Pictures in {\LaTeX} / 371 \\
                 24.1.1: Positioning the picture / 372 \\
                 24.1.2: Picture commands / 372 \\
                 24.1.3: Additional graphics packages / 374 \\
                 24.2: The xv Package / 376 \\
                 24.3: The XFig Package / 379 \\
                 24.4: The XPaint Package / 382 \\
                 24.5: ImageMagick / 382 \\
                 24.6: GIMP / 386 \\
                 24.7: Packages for Ready Money / 388 \\
                 25: Inserting Completed Pictures and Graphics / 391 \\
                 25.1: Step 1: Linking the Printer Driver and graphicx /
                 392 \\
                 25.2: Step 2: Size Information in the EPS File / 393
                 \\
                 25.2.1: The BoundingBox / 394 \\
                 25.2.2: The calc package / 396 \\
                 25.3: Step 3: Using the /includegraphics Command / 398
                 \\
                 25.4: //includegraphics Options / 401 \\
                 25.4.1: Resetting the BoundingBox / 402 \\
                 25.4.2: viewport: resetting the part of the picture to
                 exhibit / 403 \\
                 25.4.3: Resetting exhibition width / 403 \\
                 25.4.4: Resetting exhibition height / 404 \\
                 25.4.5: Scaling: another way to reset size / 404 \\
                 25.4.6: Resetting exhibition orientation / 405 \\
                 25.4.7: The interaction between size and orientation /
                 408",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lippman:1991:CP
author: Stanley B. Lippman
title: C++ Primer
publisher: pub-AW
address: pub-AW:adr
edition: Second
pages: xvi + 614
year: 1991
ISBN: 0-201-54848-8 (paperback) OR 0201548488 (paperback)
ISBN13: 978-0-201-54848-8 (paperback) OR 9780201548488 (paperback)
LCCN: QA76.73.C15 L57 1991
bibdate: Wed Dec 15 10:38:15 1993
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/unix.bib
bibtimestamp: 1993.12.15 10:38:15 ???
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Stanley B. Lippman
rawtitle: {C++} Primer
entry:
@Book{Lippman:1991:CP,
  author =       "Stanley B. Lippman",
  title =        "{C++} Primer",
  publisher =    pub-AW,
  address =      pub-AW:adr,
  edition =      "Second",
  pages =        "xvi + 614",
  year =         "1991",
  ISBN =         "0-201-54848-8 (paperback)",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-201-54848-8 (paperback)",
  LCCN =         "QA76.73.C15 L57 1991",
  bibdate =      "Wed Dec 15 10:38:15 1993",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/unix.bib",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Liu:1984:MSF
author: Yu-Cheng Liu and Glenn A. Gibson
title: Microcomputer Systems: The 8086 / 8088 Family. Architecture, Programming, and Design
publisher: pub-PH
address: pub-PH:adr
pages: ix + 550
year: 1984
ISBN: 0-13-580944-4 OR 0135809444
ISBN13: 978-0-13-580944-0 OR 9780135809440
LCCN: QA76.8.I292 L58 1984
bibdate: Wed Dec 15 10:38:16 1993
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1993.12.15 10:38:16 ???
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Yu-Cheng Liu and Glenn A. Gibson
rawtitle: Microcomputer Systems: The 8086\slash 8088 Family. Architecture, Programming, and Design
note:
A broad treatment of the Intel 8086 and 8088, with shorter surveys of the 8087, 80186, and 80286. Nothing specific to the IBM PC.

rawnote:
A broad treatment of the Intel 8086 and 8088, with shorter surveys of the 8087, 80186, and 80286. Nothing specific to the IBM PC.

entry:
@Book{Liu:1984:MSF,
  author =       "Yu-Cheng Liu and Glenn A. Gibson",
  title =        "Microcomputer Systems: The 8086\slash 8088 Family.
                 Architecture, Programming, and Design",
  publisher =    pub-PH,
  address =      pub-PH:adr,
  pages =        "ix + 550",
  year =         "1984",
  ISBN =         "0-13-580944-4",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-13-580944-0",
  LCCN =         "QA76.8.I292 L58 1984",
  bibdate =      "Wed Dec 15 10:38:16 1993",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  note =         "A broad treatment of the Intel 8086 and 8088, with
                 shorter surveys of the 8087, 80186, and 80286. Nothing
                 specific to the IBM PC.",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Livio:2002:GRS
author: Mario Livio
title: The Golden Ratio: the Story of Phi, the World's Most Astonishing Number
publisher: Broadway Books
address: New York, NY, USA
pages: viii + 294
year: 2002
ISBN: 0-7679-0815-5 OR 0767908155
ISBN13: 978-0-7679-0815-3 OR 9780767908153
LCCN: QA466 .L58 2002
bibdate: Tue Jul 08 12:29:44 2003
bibtimestamp: 2003.07.08 12:29:44 ???
note: Benford's Law is treated on pages 231--237.
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Mario Livio
rawnote: Benford's Law is treated on pages 231--237.
rawtitle: The Golden Ratio: the Story of Phi, the World's Most Astonishing Number
bibsource:
https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/benfords-law.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib

abstract:
Throughout history, thinkers from mathematicians to theologians have pondered the mysterious relationship between numbers and the nature of reality. In this fascinating book, the author tells the tale of a number at the heart of that mystery: phi, or 1.6180339887ldots . This curious mathematical relationship, widely known as ``The Golden Ratio,'' was discovered by Euclid more than two thousand years ago because of its crucial role in the construction of the pentagram, to which magical properties had been attributed. Since then it has shown a propensity to appear in the most astonishing variety of places, from mollusk shells, sunflower florets, and rose petals to the shape of the galaxy. Psychological studies have investigated whether the Golden Ratio is the most aesthetically pleasing proportion extant, and it has been asserted that the creators of the Pyramids and the Parthenon employed it. It is believed to feature in works of art from Leonardo da Vinci's Mona Lisa to Salvador Dali's The Sacrament of the Last Supper, and poets and composers have used it in their works. It has even been found to be connected to the behavior of the stock market! This book is a captivating journey through art and architecture, botany and biology, physics and mathematics. It tells the human story of numerous phi-fixated individuals, including the followers of Pythagoras who believed that this proportion revealed the hand of God; astronomer Johannes Kepler, who saw phi as the greatest treasure of geometry; such Renaissance thinkers as mathematician Leonardo Fibonacci of Pisa; and such masters of the modern world as Goethe, Cezanne, Bartok, and physicist Roger Penrose. Wherever his quest for the meaning of phi takes him, the author reveals the world as a place where order, beauty, and eternal mystery will always coexist.

TOC:
Prelude to a number The pitch and the pentagram Under a star-Y-pointing pyramid? The second treasure Son of good nature The divine proportion Painters and poets have equal license From the tiles to the heavens Is God a mathematician?

rawabstract:
Throughout history, thinkers from mathematicians to theologians have pondered the mysterious relationship between numbers and the nature of reality. In this fascinating book, the author tells the tale of a number at the heart of that mystery: phi, or 1.6180339887\ldots{}. This curious mathematical relationship, widely known as ``The Golden Ratio,'' was discovered by Euclid more than two thousand years ago because of its crucial role in the construction of the pentagram, to which magical properties had been attributed. Since then it has shown a propensity to appear in the most astonishing variety of places, from mollusk shells, sunflower florets, and rose petals to the shape of the galaxy. Psychological studies have investigated whether the Golden Ratio is the most aesthetically pleasing proportion extant, and it has been asserted that the creators of the Pyramids and the Parthenon employed it. It is believed to feature in works of art from Leonardo da Vinci's Mona Lisa to Salvador Dali's The Sacrament of the Last Supper, and poets and composers have used it in their works. It has even been found to be connected to the behavior of the stock market! This book is a captivating journey through art and architecture, botany and biology, physics and mathematics. It tells the human story of numerous phi-fixated individuals, including the followers of Pythagoras who believed that this proportion revealed the hand of God; astronomer Johannes Kepler, who saw phi as the greatest treasure of geometry; such Renaissance thinkers as mathematician Leonardo Fibonacci of Pisa; and such masters of the modern world as Goethe, Cezanne, Bartok, and physicist Roger Penrose. Wherever his quest for the meaning of phi takes him, the author reveals the world as a place where order, beauty, and eternal mystery will always coexist.

rawTOC:
Prelude to a number \\ The pitch and the pentagram \\ Under a star-Y-pointing pyramid? \\ The second treasure \\ Son of good nature \\ The divine proportion \\ Painters and poets have equal license \\ From the tiles to the heavens \\ Is God a mathematician?

entry:
@Book{Livio:2002:GRS,
  author =       "Mario Livio",
  title =        "The Golden Ratio: the Story of Phi, the World's Most
                 Astonishing Number",
  publisher =    "Broadway Books",
  address =      "New York, NY, USA",
  pages =        "viii + 294",
  year =         "2002",
  ISBN =         "0-7679-0815-5",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-7679-0815-3",
  LCCN =         "QA466 .L58 2002",
  bibdate =      "Tue Jul 08 12:29:44 2003",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/benfords-law.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  note =         "Benford's Law is treated on pages 231--237.",
  price =        "US\$24.95, CAN\$37.95",
  abstract =     "Throughout history, thinkers from mathematicians to
                 theologians have pondered the mysterious relationship
                 between numbers and the nature of reality. In this
                 fascinating book, the author tells the tale of a number
                 at the heart of that mystery: phi, or
                 1.6180339887\ldots{}. This curious mathematical
                 relationship, widely known as ``The Golden Ratio,'' was
                 discovered by Euclid more than two thousand years ago
                 because of its crucial role in the construction of the
                 pentagram, to which magical properties had been
                 attributed. Since then it has shown a propensity to
                 appear in the most astonishing variety of places, from
                 mollusk shells, sunflower florets, and rose petals to
                 the shape of the galaxy. Psychological studies have
                 investigated whether the Golden Ratio is the most
                 aesthetically pleasing proportion extant, and it has
                 been asserted that the creators of the Pyramids and the
                 Parthenon employed it. It is believed to feature in
                 works of art from Leonardo da Vinci's Mona Lisa to
                 Salvador Dali's The Sacrament of the Last Supper, and
                 poets and composers have used it in their works. It has
                 even been found to be connected to the behavior of the
                 stock market! This book is a captivating journey
                 through art and architecture, botany and biology,
                 physics and mathematics. It tells the human story of
                 numerous phi-fixated individuals, including the
                 followers of Pythagoras who believed that this
                 proportion revealed the hand of God; astronomer
                 Johannes Kepler, who saw phi as the greatest treasure
                 of geometry; such Renaissance thinkers as mathematician
                 Leonardo Fibonacci of Pisa; and such masters of the
                 modern world as Goethe, Cezanne, Bartok, and physicist
                 Roger Penrose. Wherever his quest for the meaning of
                 phi takes him, the author reveals the world as a place
                 where order, beauty, and eternal mystery will always
                 coexist.",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  tableofcontents = "Prelude to a number \\
                 The pitch and the pentagram \\
                 Under a star-Y-pointing pyramid? \\
                 The second treasure \\
                 Son of good nature \\
                 The divine proportion \\
                 Painters and poets have equal license \\
                 From the tiles to the heavens \\
                 Is God a mathematician?",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Livio:2005:ECS
author: Mario Livio
title: The Equation That Couldn't Be Solved: How Mathematical Genius Discovered the Language of Symmetry
publisher: pub-SIMON-SCHUSTER
address: pub-SIMON-SCHUSTER:adr
pages: x + 353
year: 2005
LCCN: QA174.2 .L58 2005
bibdate: Tue Oct 11 05:00:45 MDT 2005
bibtimestamp: 2005.10.11 05:00:45 MDT
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
subjectdates: 1811--1832
rawauthor: Mario Livio
rawtitle: The Equation That Couldn't Be Solved: How Mathematical Genius Discovered the Language of Symmetry
ISBN:
0-7432-5820-7 (hardcover), 0-7432-5821-5 (e-book), 0-7432-7462-8 (e-book) OR 0743258207 (hardcover), 0743258215 (ebook), 0743274628 (ebook)

ISBN13:
978-0-7432-5820-3 (hardcover), 978-0-7432-5821-0 (e-book), 978-0-7432-7462-3 (e-book) OR 9780743258203 (hardcover), 9780743258210 (ebook), 9780743274623 (ebook)

bibsource:
https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/bibnet/authors/i/infeld-leopold.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager

abstract:
Traces the four-thousand-year-old mathematical effort to discover and define the laws of symmetry, citing the achievements of doomed geniuses Niels Henrick Abel and Evariste Galois to solve the quintic equation and give birth to group theory.

subject:
Group theory; History; Galois theory; History; Galois, Evariste; Symmetric functions; History; Symmetry; Mathematics; History; Diophantine analysis; History

TOC:
Symmetry eye s'dnim eht ni yrtemmyS Never forget this in the midst of your equations The poverty-stricken mathematician The romantic mathematician Groups Symmetry rules Who's the most symmetrical of them all? Requiem for a romantic genius Appendix 1. Card puzzle Appendix 2. Solving a system of two linear equations Appendix 3. Diophantus's solution Appendix 4. A Diophantine equation Appendix 5. Tartaglia's verses and formula Appendix 6. Adriaan van Roomen's challenge Appendix 7. Properties of the roots of quadratic equations Appendix 8. The Galois family tree Appendix 9. The 14--15 puzzle Appendix 10. Solution to the matches problem

rawabstract:
Traces the four-thousand-year-old mathematical effort to discover and define the laws of symmetry, citing the achievements of doomed geniuses Niels Henrick Abel and Evariste Galois to solve the quintic equation and give birth to group theory.

rawTOC:
Symmetry \\ eye s'dnim eht ni yrtemmyS \\ Never forget this in the midst of your equations \\ The poverty-stricken mathematician \\ The romantic mathematician \\ Groups \\ Symmetry rules \\ Who's the most symmetrical of them all? \\ Requiem for a romantic genius \\ Appendix 1. Card puzzle \\ Appendix 2. Solving a system of two linear equations \\ Appendix 3. Diophantus's solution \\ Appendix 4. A Diophantine equation \\ Appendix 5. Tartaglia's verses and formula \\ Appendix 6. Adriaan van Roomen's challenge \\ Appendix 7. Properties of the roots of quadratic equations \\ Appendix 8. The Galois family tree \\ Appendix 9. The 14--15 puzzle \\ Appendix 10. Solution to the matches problem

entry:
@Book{Livio:2005:ECS,
  author =       "Mario Livio",
  title =        "The Equation That Couldn't Be Solved: How Mathematical
                 Genius Discovered the Language of Symmetry",
  publisher =    pub-SIMON-SCHUSTER,
  address =      pub-SIMON-SCHUSTER:adr,
  pages =        "x + 353",
  year =         "2005",
  ISBN =         "0-7432-5820-7 (hardcover), 0-7432-5821-5 (e-book),
                 0-7432-7462-8 (e-book)",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-7432-5820-3 (hardcover), 978-0-7432-5821-0
                 (e-book), 978-0-7432-7462-3 (e-book)",
  LCCN =         "QA174.2 .L58 2005",
  bibdate =      "Tue Oct 11 05:00:45 MDT 2005",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/bibnet/authors/i/infeld-leopold.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager",
  abstract =     "Traces the four-thousand-year-old mathematical effort
                 to discover and define the laws of symmetry, citing the
                 achievements of doomed geniuses Niels Henrick Abel and
                 Evariste Galois to solve the quintic equation and give
                 birth to group theory.",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  subject =      "Group theory; History; Galois theory; History; Galois,
                 Evariste; Symmetric functions; History; Symmetry;
                 Mathematics; History; Diophantine analysis; History",
  subject-dates = "1811--1832",
  tableofcontents = "Symmetry \\
                 eye s'dnim eht ni yrtemmyS \\
                 Never forget this in the midst of your equations \\
                 The poverty-stricken mathematician \\
                 The romantic mathematician \\
                 Groups \\
                 Symmetry rules \\
                 Who's the most symmetrical of them all? \\
                 Requiem for a romantic genius \\
                 Appendix 1. Card puzzle \\
                 Appendix 2. Solving a system of two linear equations
                 \\
                 Appendix 3. Diophantus's solution \\
                 Appendix 4. A Diophantine equation \\
                 Appendix 5. Tartaglia's verses and formula \\
                 Appendix 6. Adriaan van Roomen's challenge \\
                 Appendix 7. Properties of the roots of quadratic
                 equations \\
                 Appendix 8. The Galois family tree \\
                 Appendix 9. The 14--15 puzzle \\
                 Appendix 10. Solution to the matches problem",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lloyd:1987:FLP
author: J. W. (John Wylie) Lloyd
title: Foundations of Logic Programming
publisher: pub-SV
address: pub-SV:adr
edition: Second
pages: xii + 212
year: 1987
ISBN: 0-387-18199-7, 3-540-18199-7 OR 0387181997, 3540181997
ISBN13: 978-0-387-18199-8, 978-3-540-18199-6 OR 9780387181998, 9783540181996
LCCN: QA76.6.L583 1987
bibdate: Fri Sep 11 07:42:16 1998
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1998.09.11 07:42:16 ???
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: J. W. (John Wylie) Lloyd
rawtitle: Foundations of Logic Programming
entry:
@Book{Lloyd:1987:FLP,
  author =       "J. W. (John Wylie) Lloyd",
  title =        "Foundations of Logic Programming",
  publisher =    pub-SV,
  address =      pub-SV:adr,
  edition =      "Second",
  pages =        "xii + 212",
  year =         "1987",
  ISBN =         "0-387-18199-7, 3-540-18199-7",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-387-18199-8, 978-3-540-18199-6",
  LCCN =         "QA76.6.L583 1987",
  bibdate =      "Fri Sep 11 07:42:16 1998",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lockhart:2017:A
author: Paul Lockhart
title: Arithmetic
publisher: The Belknap Press of Harvard University Press
address: Cambridge, MA, USA
pages: 223
year: 2017
ISBN: 0-674-97223-6 OR 0674972236
ISBN13: 978-0-674-97223-0 OR 9780674972230
LCCN: QA115 .L713 2017
bibdate: Sat Dec 22 16:04:02 MST 2018
bibtimestamp: 2018.12.22 16:04:02 MST
subject: Talteori; Arithmetic; History
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Paul Lockhart
rawtitle: Arithmetic
bibsource:
fsz3950.oclc.org:210/WorldCat; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/fparith.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib

abstract:
Educator Paul Lockhart's goal is to demystify arithmetic: to bring the subject to life in a fun and accessible way, and to reveal its profound and simple beauty, as seen through the eyes of a modern research mathematician. The craft of arithmetic arises from our natural desire to count, arrange, and compare quantities. Over the centuries, humans have devised a wide variety of strategies for representing and manipulating numerical information: tally marks, rocks and beads, marked-value and place-value systems, as well as mechanical and electronic calculators. booktitle Arithmetic traces the history and development of these various number languages and calculating devices and examines their comparative advantages and disadvantages, providing readers with an opportunity to develop not only their computational skills but also their own personal tastes and preferences. The book is neither a training manual nor an authoritative history, but rather an entertaining survey of ideas and methods for the reader to enjoy and appreciate. Written in a lively conversational style, booktitle Arithmetic is a fun and engaging introduction to both practical techniques as well as the more abstract mathematical aspects of the subject.

TOC:
Dear Reader / vii Things / 1 Language / 5 Repetition / 10 Tribes / 15 Egypt / 25 Rome / 32 China and Japan / 41 India / 48 Europe / 75 Multiplication / 87 Division / 117 Machines / 136 Fractions / 151 Negative numbers / 180 The art of counting / 197 Afterword / 215 Index / 217

rawabstract:
Educator Paul Lockhart's goal is to demystify arithmetic: to bring the subject to life in a fun and accessible way, and to reveal its profound and simple beauty, as seen through the eyes of a modern research mathematician. The craft of arithmetic arises from our natural desire to count, arrange, and compare quantities. Over the centuries, humans have devised a wide variety of strategies for representing and manipulating numerical information: tally marks, rocks and beads, marked-value and place-value systems, as well as mechanical and electronic calculators. \booktitle{Arithmetic} traces the history and development of these various number languages and calculating devices and examines their comparative advantages and disadvantages, providing readers with an opportunity to develop not only their computational skills but also their own personal tastes and preferences. The book is neither a training manual nor an authoritative history, but rather an entertaining survey of ideas and methods for the reader to enjoy and appreciate. Written in a lively conversational style, \booktitle{Arithmetic} is a fun and engaging introduction to both practical techniques as well as the more abstract mathematical aspects of the subject.

rawTOC:
Dear Reader / vii \\ Things / 1 \\ Language / 5 \\ Repetition / 10 \\ Tribes / 15 \\ Egypt / 25 \\ Rome / 32 \\ China and Japan / 41 \\ India / 48 \\ Europe / 75 \\ Multiplication / 87 \\ Division / 117 \\ Machines / 136 \\ Fractions / 151 \\ Negative numbers / 180 \\ The art of counting / 197 \\ Afterword / 215 \\ Index / 217

entry:
@Book{Lockhart:2017:A,
  author =       "Paul Lockhart",
  title =        "Arithmetic",
  publisher =    "The Belknap Press of Harvard University Press",
  address =      "Cambridge, MA, USA",
  pages =        "223",
  year =         "2017",
  ISBN =         "0-674-97223-6",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-674-97223-0",
  LCCN =         "QA115 .L713 2017",
  bibdate =      "Sat Dec 22 16:04:02 MST 2018",
  bibsource =    "fsz3950.oclc.org:210/WorldCat;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/fparith.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  abstract =     "Educator Paul Lockhart's goal is to demystify
                 arithmetic: to bring the subject to life in a fun and
                 accessible way, and to reveal its profound and simple
                 beauty, as seen through the eyes of a modern research
                 mathematician. The craft of arithmetic arises from our
                 natural desire to count, arrange, and compare
                 quantities. Over the centuries, humans have devised a
                 wide variety of strategies for representing and
                 manipulating numerical information: tally marks, rocks
                 and beads, marked-value and place-value systems, as
                 well as mechanical and electronic calculators.
                 \booktitle{Arithmetic} traces the history and
                 development of these various number languages and
                 calculating devices and examines their comparative
                 advantages and disadvantages, providing readers with an
                 opportunity to develop not only their computational
                 skills but also their own personal tastes and
                 preferences. The book is neither a training manual nor
                 an authoritative history, but rather an entertaining
                 survey of ideas and methods for the reader to enjoy and
                 appreciate. Written in a lively conversational style,
                 \booktitle{Arithmetic} is a fun and engaging
                 introduction to both practical techniques as well as
                 the more abstract mathematical aspects of the
                 subject.",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  subject =      "Talteori; Arithmetic; History",
  tableofcontents = "Dear Reader / vii \\
                 Things / 1 \\
                 Language / 5 \\
                 Repetition / 10 \\
                 Tribes / 15 \\
                 Egypt / 25 \\
                 Rome / 32 \\
                 China and Japan / 41 \\
                 India / 48 \\
                 Europe / 75 \\
                 Multiplication / 87 \\
                 Division / 117 \\
                 Machines / 136 \\
                 Fractions / 151 \\
                 Negative numbers / 180 \\
                 The art of counting / 197 \\
                 Afterword / 215 \\
                 Index / 217",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lomb:2011:TVP
author: Nick Lomb
title: Transit of Venus: 1631 to the present
publisher: Experiment
address: New York, NY, USA
pages: 228
year: 2011
ISBN: 1-61519-055-4 OR 1615190554
ISBN13: 978-1-61519-055-3 OR 9781615190553
LCCN: QB509 .L66 2012
bibdate: Thu Sep 6 12:00:55 MDT 2012
bibtimestamp: 2012.09.06 12:00:55 MDT
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Nick Lomb
rawtitle: Transit of {Venus}: 1631 to the present
bibsource:
https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/annscience.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager

abstract:
Every so often, the planet Venus does something remarkable. Its orbit brings it to a point directly between the Sun and the Earth, where it appears to us as a black dot moving across the bright disc of the Sun. This transit of Venus is rare, occurring in pairs eight years apart and then not for more than a hundred years; it has fascinated astronomers for centuries.

remark:
Transit of Venus was first published in Australia by NewSouth, an imprint of UNSW Press. The first North American edition is published in association with the Powerhouse Museum, Sydney, Australia, and NewSouth.

TOC:
Transit fast facts Introduction A spot of unusual magnitude: 1639 Frozen plains and tropical seas: 1761 Venus of the South Seas: 1769 Capturing the transit: 1874 and 1882 Space-age transit: 2004 Observing the 2012 transit Glossary Bibliography Acknowledgments Index

rawabstract:
Every so often, the planet Venus does something remarkable. Its orbit brings it to a point directly between the Sun and the Earth, where it appears to us as a black dot moving across the bright disc of the Sun. This transit of Venus is rare, occurring in pairs eight years apart and then not for more than a hundred years; it has fascinated astronomers for centuries.

rawTOC:
Transit fast facts \\ Introduction \\ A spot of unusual magnitude: 1639 \\ Frozen plains and tropical seas: 1761 \\ Venus of the South Seas: 1769 \\ Capturing the transit: 1874 and 1882 \\ Space-age transit: 2004 \\ Observing the 2012 transit \\ Glossary \\ Bibliography \\ Acknowledgments \\ Index

entry:
@Book{Lomb:2011:TVP,
  author =       "Nick Lomb",
  title =        "Transit of {Venus}: 1631 to the present",
  publisher =    "Experiment",
  address =      "New York, NY, USA",
  pages =        "228",
  year =         "2011",
  ISBN =         "1-61519-055-4",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-1-61519-055-3",
  LCCN =         "QB509 .L66 2012",
  bibdate =      "Thu Sep 6 12:00:55 MDT 2012",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/annscience.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager",
  abstract =     "Every so often, the planet Venus does something
                 remarkable. Its orbit brings it to a point directly
                 between the Sun and the Earth, where it appears to us
                 as a black dot moving across the bright disc of the
                 Sun. This transit of Venus is rare, occurring in pairs
                 eight years apart and then not for more than a hundred
                 years; it has fascinated astronomers for centuries.",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  remark =       "Transit of Venus was first published in Australia by
                 NewSouth, an imprint of UNSW Press. The first North
                 American edition is published in association with the
                 Powerhouse Museum, Sydney, Australia, and NewSouth.",
  tableofcontents = "Transit fast facts \\
                 Introduction \\
                 A spot of unusual magnitude: 1639 \\
                 Frozen plains and tropical seas: 1761 \\
                 Venus of the South Seas: 1769 \\
                 Capturing the transit: 1874 and 1882 \\
                 Space-age transit: 2004 \\
                 Observing the 2012 transit \\
                 Glossary \\
                 Bibliography \\
                 Acknowledgments \\
                 Index",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lomuto:1983:UP
author: Ann Nicols Lomuto and Nico Lomuto
title: A UNIX Primer
publisher: pub-PH
address: pub-PH:adr
pages: xvi + 239
year: 1983
ISBN: 0-13-938886-9 OR 0139388869
ISBN13: 978-0-13-938886-6 OR 9780139388866
LCCN: QA76.8.U65 L65 1983
bibdate: Wed Dec 15 10:38:17 1993
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1993.12.15 10:38:17 ???
series: Prentice-Hall Software Series, Editor: Brian W. Kernighan
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Ann Nicols Lomuto and Nico Lomuto
rawtitle: A {UNIX} Primer
entry:
@Book{Lomuto:1983:UP,
  author =       "Ann Nicols Lomuto and Nico Lomuto",
  title =        "A {UNIX} Primer",
  publisher =    pub-PH,
  address =      pub-PH:adr,
  pages =        "xvi + 239",
  year =         "1983",
  ISBN =         "0-13-938886-9",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-13-938886-6",
  LCCN =         "QA76.8.U65 L65 1983",
  bibdate =      "Wed Dec 15 10:38:17 1993",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  series =       "Prentice-Hall Software Series, Editor: Brian W.
                 Kernighan",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lord:1984:MDS
author: E. A. Lord and C. B. Wilson
title: The Mathematical Description of Shape and Form
publisher: pub-ELLIS-HORWOOD
address: pub-ELLIS-HORWOOD:adr
pages: 260
year: 1984
LCCN: QA501 .L86 1984
bibdate: Sun Jul 10 01:10:05 1994
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1994.07.10 01:10:05 ???
series: Ellis Horwood Series in Mathematics and its Applications, Editor: G. M. Bell
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: E. A. Lord and C. B. Wilson
rawtitle: The Mathematical Description of Shape and Form
ISBN:
0-85312-722-0, 0-85312-726-3, 0-470-20043-X (paperback) OR 0853127220, 0853127263, 047020043X (paperback)

ISBN13:
978-0-85312-722-2, 978-0-85312-726-0, 978-0-470-20043-8 (paperback) OR 9780853127222, 9780853127260, 9780470200438 (paperback)

entry:
@Book{Lord:1984:MDS,
  author =       "E. A. Lord and C. B. Wilson",
  title =        "The Mathematical Description of Shape and Form",
  publisher =    pub-ELLIS-HORWOOD,
  address =      pub-ELLIS-HORWOOD:adr,
  pages =        "260",
  year =         "1984",
  ISBN =         "0-85312-722-0, 0-85312-726-3, 0-470-20043-X
                 (paperback)",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-85312-722-2, 978-0-85312-726-0,
                 978-0-470-20043-8 (paperback)",
  LCCN =         "QA501 .L86 1984",
  bibdate =      "Sun Jul 10 01:10:05 1994",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  series =       "Ellis Horwood Series in Mathematics and its
                 Applications, Editor: G. M. Bell",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lorentz:1952:PRC
publisher: pub-DOVER
address: pub-DOVER:adr
pages: viii + 216
year: 1952
ISBN: 0-486-60081-5, 0-486-31840-0 (e-book) OR 0486600815, 0486318400 (ebook)
ISBN13: 978-0-486-60081-9, 978-0-486-31840-0 (e-book) OR 9780486600819, 9780486318400 (ebook)
LCCN: QC 173.55 L67 1952
bibdate: Mon Feb 11 17:22:28 2019
bibtimestamp: 2019.02.11 17:22:28 ???
note: With notes by A. Sommerfeld. Translated By W. Perrett and G. B. Jeffery
subject: Relativity (Physics)
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawnote: With notes by A. Sommerfeld. Translated By W. Perrett and G. B. Jeffery
author:
H. A. (Hendrik Antoon) Lorentz and A. (Albert) Einstein and H. (Hermann) Minkowski and H. (Hermann) Weyl

title:
The Principle of Relativity: a Collection of Original Memoirs on the Special and General Theory of Relativity

bibsource:
https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/bibnet/authors/s/sommerfeld-arnold.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/einstein.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; library.ox.ac.uk:210/ADVANCE

abstract:
Here are the 11 papers that forged the general and special theories of relativity: seven papers by Einstein, plus two papers by Lorentz and one each by Minkowski and Weyl. A thrill to read again the original papers by these giants. School Science and Mathematics. 1923 edition.

remark:
Unabridged and unaltered republication of the 1923 translation originally published by Methuen and Company, 1923. Translated sections have come from the text as published in a German collection, under the title ``Des Relativitatsprinzip'' (Teubner, 4th ed., 1922).

TOC:
1: Michelson's interference experiment / H. A. Lorentz 2: On the electrodynamics of moving bodies / A. Einstein 3: On the electrodynamics of moving bodies / A. Einstein 4: Does the inertia of a body depend upon its energy-content? / A. Einstein 5: Space and time / H. Minkowski 6: On the influence of gravitation on the propagation of light / A. Einstein 7: The foundation of the general theory of relativity / A. Einstein 8: Hamilton's principle and the general theory of relativity / A. Einstein 9: Cosmological considerations on the general theory of relativity / A. Einstein 10: Do gravitational fields play an essential part in the structure of the elementary particles of matter? / A. Einstein 11: Gravitation and electricity / H. Weyl

rawabstract:
Here are the 11 papers that forged the general and special theories of relativity: seven papers by Einstein, plus two papers by Lorentz and one each by Minkowski and Weyl. A thrill to read again the original papers by these giants. School Science and Mathematics. 1923 edition.

rawauthor:
H. A. (Hendrik Antoon) Lorentz and A. (Albert) Einstein and H. (Hermann) Minkowski and H. (Hermann) Weyl

rawtitle:
The {Principle of Relativity}: a Collection of Original Memoirs on the {Special and General Theory of Relativity}

rawTOC:
1: Michelson's interference experiment / H. A. Lorentz \\ 2: On the electrodynamics of moving bodies / A. Einstein \\ 3: On the electrodynamics of moving bodies / A. Einstein \\ 4: Does the inertia of a body depend upon its energy-content? / A. Einstein \\ 5: Space and time / H. Minkowski \\ 6: On the influence of gravitation on the propagation of light / A. Einstein \\ 7: The foundation of the general theory of relativity / A. Einstein \\ 8: Hamilton's principle and the general theory of relativity / A. Einstein \\ 9: Cosmological considerations on the general theory of relativity / A. Einstein \\ 10: Do gravitational fields play an essential part in the structure of the elementary particles of matter? / A. Einstein \\ 11: Gravitation and electricity / H. Weyl

entry:
@Book{Lorentz:1952:PRC,
  author =       "H. A. (Hendrik Antoon) Lorentz and A. (Albert)
                 Einstein and H. (Hermann) Minkowski and H. (Hermann)
                 Weyl",
  title =        "The {Principle of Relativity}: a Collection of
                 Original Memoirs on the {Special and General Theory of
                 Relativity}",
  publisher =    pub-DOVER,
  address =      pub-DOVER:adr,
  pages =        "viii + 216",
  year =         "1952",
  ISBN =         "0-486-60081-5, 0-486-31840-0 (e-book)",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-486-60081-9, 978-0-486-31840-0 (e-book)",
  LCCN =         "QC 173.55 L67 1952",
  bibdate =      "Mon Feb 11 17:22:28 2019",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/bibnet/authors/s/sommerfeld-arnold.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/einstein.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 library.ox.ac.uk:210/ADVANCE",
  note =         "With notes by A. Sommerfeld. Translated By W. Perrett
                 and G. B. Jeffery",
  abstract =     "Here are the 11 papers that forged the general and
                 special theories of relativity: seven papers by
                 Einstein, plus two papers by Lorentz and one each by
                 Minkowski and Weyl. A thrill to read again the original
                 papers by these giants. School Science and Mathematics.
                 1923 edition.",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  remark =       "First published in translation: Methuen, 1923.. With
                 contributions by A. Einstein, H. Minkowski and H.
                 Weyl.",
  remark =       "Unabridged and unaltered republication of the 1923
                 translation originally published by Methuen and
                 Company, 1923. Translated sections have come from the
                 text as published in a German collection, under the
                 title ``Des Relativit{\"a}tsprinzip'' (Teubner, 4th
                 ed., 1922).",
  subject =      "Relativity (Physics)",
  tableofcontents = "1: Michelson's interference experiment / H. A.
                 Lorentz \\
                 2: On the electrodynamics of moving bodies / A.
                 Einstein \\
                 3: On the electrodynamics of moving bodies / A.
                 Einstein \\
                 4: Does the inertia of a body depend upon its
                 energy-content? / A. Einstein \\
                 5: Space and time / H. Minkowski \\
                 6: On the influence of gravitation on the propagation
                 of light / A. Einstein \\
                 7: The foundation of the general theory of relativity /
                 A. Einstein \\
                 8: Hamilton's principle and the general theory of
                 relativity / A. Einstein \\
                 9: Cosmological considerations on the general theory of
                 relativity / A. Einstein \\
                 10: Do gravitational fields play an essential part in
                 the structure of the elementary particles of matter? /
                 A. Einstein \\
                 11: Gravitation and electricity / H. Weyl",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lorenzo:2018:ASB
author: Mark Jones Lorenzo
title: Adventures of a Statistician: The Biography of John W. Tukey
publisher: SE Books
address: 5307 West Tyson Street, Philadelphia, PA 19107, USA
pages: 340
year: 2018
ISBN: 1-72201-358-3 (paperback) OR 1722013583 (paperback)
ISBN13: 978-1-72201-358-5 (paperback) OR 9781722013585 (paperback)
LCCN: QA276.157 .T854 2018
bibdate: Thu Apr 16 12:55:18 MDT 2020
bibtimestamp: 2020.04.16 12:55:18 MDT
subject: Tukey, John W.; mathematical statistics
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
subjectdates: 1915--2000
rawauthor: Mark Jones Lorenzo
rawtitle: Adventures of a Statistician: The Biography of {John W. Tukey}
bibsource:
fsz3950.oclc.org:210/WorldCat; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/bibnet/authors/t/tukey-john-w.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib

TOC:
Prologue / 13 Part One: The Path to Statistics 1: Origins / 27 2: Studying Chemistry at Brown / 32 3: Making his mark at Princeton / 36 4: Reaching the mathematical summit / 47 5: Becoming a specialist in topology / 51 6: Navigating world crisis / 55 7: The war, multiple comparisons, and a seismic shift / 62 Part Two: Working as a Statistician 8: A finger in every pie / 81 9: Government science / 89 10: Counting every vote / 97 11: Stories from the birthplace of the future / 103 12: The development of the Fast Fourier Transform / 112 13: Explorations in time series / 122 14: The difference between science and mathematics / 128 15: The ontology of statistics / 137 16: Teaching at Princeton / 145 17: Statistical computing and the PRIM-9 / 154 18: Clashes, criticism, ldots / 171 19: ldots and Controversy: the Kinsey affair / 176 Part Three: Life among the Academics 20: The quest for robustness / 195 21: The elders and their children / 210 22: Making the census count / 224 23: Playing favorites / 236 24: Statistics at Princeton / 242 25: The development of booktitle Exploratory Data Analysis / 251 26: Discovering surprises in the data / 262 27: A graphical touch / 265 28: Hunting for wild shots / 269 29: Critical reaction to booktitle EDA / 278 30: Exploratory data analysis practiced as ritual / 282 31: Unpacking Statistics 411 / 289 Part Four: The Post-Retirement Years 32: Statistics at sunset / 295 33: Still keeping busy / 299 34: Down to one / 304 35: The greatest symposium / 307 36: His working boots stayed on / 310 Epilogue / 313 Coda / 317 Resources / 319 Acknowledgements / 339 About the author / 341

rawTOC:
Prologue / 13 \\ Part One: The Path to Statistics \\ 1: Origins / 27 \\ 2: Studying Chemistry at Brown / 32 \\ 3: Making his mark at Princeton / 36 \\ 4: Reaching the mathematical summit / 47 \\ 5: Becoming a specialist in topology / 51 \\ 6: Navigating world crisis / 55 \\ 7: The war, multiple comparisons, and a seismic shift / 62 \\ Part Two: Working as a Statistician \\ 8: A finger in every pie / 81 \\ 9: Government science / 89 \\ 10: Counting every vote / 97 \\ 11: Stories from the birthplace of the future / 103 \\ 12: The development of the Fast Fourier Transform / 112 \\ 13: Explorations in time series / 122 \\ 14: The difference between science and mathematics / 128 \\ 15: The ontology of statistics / 137 \\ 16: Teaching at Princeton / 145 \\ 17: Statistical computing and the PRIM-9 / 154 \\ 18: Clashes, criticism, \ldots{} / 171 \\ 19: \ldots{} and Controversy: the Kinsey affair / 176 \\ Part Three: Life among the Academics \\ 20: The quest for robustness / 195 \\ 21: The elders and their children / 210 \\ 22: Making the census count / 224 \\ 23: Playing favorites / 236 \\ 24: Statistics at Princeton / 242 \\ 25: The development of \booktitle{Exploratory Data Analysis} / 251 \\ 26: Discovering surprises in the data / 262 \\ 27: A graphical touch / 265 \\ 28: Hunting for wild shots / 269 \\ 29: Critical reaction to \booktitle{EDA} / 278 \\ 30: Exploratory data analysis practiced as ritual / 282 \\ 31: Unpacking Statistics 411 / 289 \\ Part Four: The Post-Retirement Years \\ 32: Statistics at sunset / 295 \\ 33: Still keeping busy / 299 \\ 34: Down to one / 304 \\ 35: The greatest symposium / 307 \\ 36: His working boots stayed on / 310 \\ Epilogue / 313 \\ Coda / 317 \\ Resources / 319 \\ Acknowledgements / 339 \\ About the author / 341

entry:
@Book{Lorenzo:2018:ASB,
  author =       "Mark Jones Lorenzo",
  title =        "Adventures of a Statistician: The Biography of {John
                 W. Tukey}",
  publisher =    "SE Books",
  address =      "5307 West Tyson Street, Philadelphia, PA 19107, USA",
  pages =        "340",
  year =         "2018",
  ISBN =         "1-72201-358-3 (paperback)",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-1-72201-358-5 (paperback)",
  LCCN =         "QA276.157 .T854 2018",
  bibdate =      "Thu Apr 16 12:55:18 MDT 2020",
  bibsource =    "fsz3950.oclc.org:210/WorldCat;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/bibnet/authors/t/tukey-john-w.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  subject =      "Tukey, John W.; mathematical statistics",
  subject-dates = "1915--2000",
  tableofcontents = "Prologue / 13 \\
                 Part One: The Path to Statistics \\
                 1: Origins / 27 \\
                 2: Studying Chemistry at Brown / 32 \\
                 3: Making his mark at Princeton / 36 \\
                 4: Reaching the mathematical summit / 47 \\
                 5: Becoming a specialist in topology / 51 \\
                 6: Navigating world crisis / 55 \\
                 7: The war, multiple comparisons, and a seismic shift /
                 62 \\
                 Part Two: Working as a Statistician \\
                 8: A finger in every pie / 81 \\
                 9: Government science / 89 \\
                 10: Counting every vote / 97 \\
                 11: Stories from the birthplace of the future / 103 \\
                 12: The development of the Fast Fourier Transform / 112
                 \\
                 13: Explorations in time series / 122 \\
                 14: The difference between science and mathematics /
                 128 \\
                 15: The ontology of statistics / 137 \\
                 16: Teaching at Princeton / 145 \\
                 17: Statistical computing and the PRIM-9 / 154 \\
                 18: Clashes, criticism, \ldots{} / 171 \\
                 19: \ldots{} and Controversy: the Kinsey affair / 176
                 \\
                 Part Three: Life among the Academics \\
                 20: The quest for robustness / 195 \\
                 21: The elders and their children / 210 \\
                 22: Making the census count / 224 \\
                 23: Playing favorites / 236 \\
                 24: Statistics at Princeton / 242 \\
                 25: The development of \booktitle{Exploratory Data
                 Analysis} / 251 \\
                 26: Discovering surprises in the data / 262 \\
                 27: A graphical touch / 265 \\
                 28: Hunting for wild shots / 269 \\
                 29: Critical reaction to \booktitle{EDA} / 278 \\
                 30: Exploratory data analysis practiced as ritual / 282
                 \\
                 31: Unpacking Statistics 411 / 289 \\
                 Part Four: The Post-Retirement Years \\
                 32: Statistics at sunset / 295 \\
                 33: Still keeping busy / 299 \\
                 34: Down to one / 304 \\
                 35: The greatest symposium / 307 \\
                 36: His working boots stayed on / 310 \\
                 Epilogue / 313 \\
                 Coda / 317 \\
                 Resources / 319 \\
                 Acknowledgements / 339 \\
                 About the author / 341",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lorenzo:2019:AMH
author: Mark Jones Lorenzo
title: Abstracting Away the Machine: The History of the Fortran Programming Language (FORmula TRANslation)
publisher: SE Books
address: 5307 West Tyson Street, Philadelphia, PA 19107, USA
pages: 325
year: 2019
ISBN: 1-08-239594-3 OR 1082395943
ISBN13: 978-1-08-239594-9 OR 9781082395949
LCCN: QA76.73.F25 BT22 2019
bibdate: Thu Apr 16 12:36:44 2020
bibtimestamp: 2020.04.16 12:36:44 ???
remark: See book review by Michael Metcalf in ACM Fortran Forum, 39(1) 1--2 (2020).
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Mark Jones Lorenzo
bibsource:
https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/bibnet/authors/v/von-neumann-john.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/fortran3.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib

TOC:
Introduction / 13 1: The Two Births of 1924 / 17 2: A Stroll Down Madison Avenue / 27 3: Hand-to-Hand Combat with the Machine / 39 4: The UNIVAC and the IBM 701 / 43 5: Speedcoding / 49 6: Building the IBM 704 / 55 7: The Automatic Programming Proposal / 59 8: Assembling the Team / 73 9: The Language Takes Shape / 85 10: Punching a Shared Place in History / 93 11: A Motley Crew / 105 12: Making a Statement / 111 13: The Symbolic/SHARE Assembly Program / 127 14: Building the Firstr FORTRAN Compiler / 133 15: FORTRAN I, Accidentally Distributed / 147 16: The (Short) History of FOR TRANSIT / 161 17: FORTRAN, the Sequel / 167 18: Great Optimism and Little Discipline / 173 19: The Need for Some Standards / 177 20: Knocking Down the Tower of Babel / 191 21: Coloring Outside the Lines / 199 22: Setting the Standards, Again / 211 23: FORTRAN the Foil: Rise of the Competition / 227 24: Implicit None / 263 25: In the Shadow of John von Neumann / 277 26: High Performance and Beyond / 283 27: Too Afraid to Fail / 293 In the Beginning ldots / 297 Resources / 301 Acknowledgments / 323 About the Author / 325

rawtitle:
Abstracting Away the Machine: The History of the {Fortran} Programming Language ({FORmula TRANslation})

rawTOC:
Introduction / 13 \\ 1: The Two Births of 1924 / 17 \\ 2: A Stroll Down Madison Avenue / 27 \\ 3: Hand-to-Hand Combat with the Machine / 39 \\ 4: The UNIVAC and the IBM 701 / 43 \\ 5: Speedcoding / 49 \\ 6: Building the IBM 704 / 55 \\ 7: The Automatic Programming Proposal / 59 \\ 8: Assembling the Team / 73 \\ 9: The Language Takes Shape / 85 \\ 10: Punching a Shared Place in History / 93 \\ 11: A Motley Crew / 105 \\ 12: Making a Statement / 111 \\ 13: The Symbolic/SHARE Assembly Program / 127 \\ 14: Building the Firstr FORTRAN Compiler / 133 \\ 15: FORTRAN I, Accidentally Distributed / 147 \\ 16: The (Short) History of FOR TRANSIT / 161 \\ 17: FORTRAN, the Sequel / 167 \\ 18: Great Optimism and Little Discipline / 173 \\ 19: The Need for Some Standards / 177 \\ 20: Knocking Down the Tower of Babel / 191 \\ 21: Coloring Outside the Lines / 199 \\ 22: Setting the Standards, Again / 211 \\ 23: FORTRAN the Foil: Rise of the Competition / 227 \\ 24: Implicit None / 263 \\ 25: In the Shadow of John von Neumann / 277 \\ 26: High Performance and Beyond / 283 \\ 27: Too Afraid to Fail / 293 \\ In the Beginning \ldots{} / 297 \\ Resources / 301 \\ Acknowledgments / 323 \\ About the Author / 325

entry:
@Book{Lorenzo:2019:AMH,
  author =       "Mark Jones Lorenzo",
  title =        "Abstracting Away the Machine: The History of the
                 {Fortran} Programming Language ({FORmula
                 TRANslation})",
  publisher =    "SE Books",
  address =      "5307 West Tyson Street, Philadelphia, PA 19107, USA",
  pages =        "325",
  year =         "2019",
  ISBN =         "1-08-239594-3",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-1-08-239594-9",
  LCCN =         "QA76.73.F25 BT22 2019",
  bibdate =      "Thu Apr 16 12:36:44 2020",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/bibnet/authors/v/von-neumann-john.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/fortran3.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  remark =       "See book review by Michael Metcalf in ACM Fortran
                 Forum, 39(1) 1--2 (2020).",
  tableofcontents = "Introduction / 13 \\
                 1: The Two Births of 1924 / 17 \\
                 2: A Stroll Down Madison Avenue / 27 \\
                 3: Hand-to-Hand Combat with the Machine / 39 \\
                 4: The UNIVAC and the IBM 701 / 43 \\
                 5: Speedcoding / 49 \\
                 6: Building the IBM 704 / 55 \\
                 7: The Automatic Programming Proposal / 59 \\
                 8: Assembling the Team / 73 \\
                 9: The Language Takes Shape / 85 \\
                 10: Punching a Shared Place in History / 93 \\
                 11: A Motley Crew / 105 \\
                 12: Making a Statement / 111 \\
                 13: The Symbolic/SHARE Assembly Program / 127 \\
                 14: Building the Firstr FORTRAN Compiler / 133 \\
                 15: FORTRAN I, Accidentally Distributed / 147 \\
                 16: The (Short) History of FOR TRANSIT / 161 \\
                 17: FORTRAN, the Sequel / 167 \\
                 18: Great Optimism and Little Discipline / 173 \\
                 19: The Need for Some Standards / 177 \\
                 20: Knocking Down the Tower of Babel / 191 \\
                 21: Coloring Outside the Lines / 199 \\
                 22: Setting the Standards, Again / 211 \\
                 23: FORTRAN the Foil: Rise of the Competition / 227 \\
                 24: Implicit None / 263 \\
                 25: In the Shadow of John von Neumann / 277 \\
                 26: High Performance and Beyond / 283 \\
                 27: Too Afraid to Fail / 293 \\
                 In the Beginning \ldots{} / 297 \\
                 Resources / 301 \\
                 Acknowledgments / 323 \\
                 About the Author / 325",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lorin:1975:SSS
author: Harold Lorin
title: Sorting and Sort Systems
publisher: pub-AW
address: pub-AW:adr
pages: xv + 373
year: 1975
ISBN: 0-201-14453-0 OR 0201144530
ISBN13: 978-0-201-14453-6 OR 9780201144536
LCCN: QA76.5 .L577 1975
bibdate: Wed Dec 15 10:38:19 1993
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1993.12.15 10:38:19 ???
series: The Systems Programming Series
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Harold Lorin
rawtitle: Sorting and Sort Systems
TOC:
Basic sort concepts and basic sorts Exchange sorts and linear insertion Shell's sorting method Structure in sorting Tournament sorts Trees in insertion Quicksort High-order selection sorts Internal merging Distributive sorts Comparison of internal sorts The sort phase of an external sort Tape merging Poliphase tape merging Cascade and compromise tape merges Oscillating and crisscross merges Tape merge overview Random-access sorting Generalized sorting systems Special systems considerations

rawTOC:
Basic sort concepts and basic sorts \\ Exchange sorts and linear insertion \\ Shell's sorting method \\ Structure in sorting \\ Tournament sorts \\ Trees in insertion \\ Quicksort \\ High-order selection sorts \\ Internal merging \\ Distributive sorts \\ Comparison of internal sorts \\ The sort phase of an external sort \\ Tape merging \\ Poliphase tape merging \\ Cascade and compromise tape merges \\ Oscillating and crisscross merges \\ Tape merge overview \\ Random-access sorting \\ Generalized sorting systems \\ Special systems considerations

entry:
@Book{Lorin:1975:SSS,
  author =       "Harold Lorin",
  title =        "Sorting and Sort Systems",
  publisher =    pub-AW,
  address =      pub-AW:adr,
  pages =        "xv + 373",
  year =         "1975",
  ISBN =         "0-201-14453-0",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-201-14453-6",
  LCCN =         "QA76.5 .L577 1975",
  bibdate =      "Wed Dec 15 10:38:19 1993",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  series =       "The Systems Programming Series",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  tableofcontents = "Basic sort concepts and basic sorts \\
                 Exchange sorts and linear insertion \\
                 Shell's sorting method \\
                 Structure in sorting \\
                 Tournament sorts \\
                 Trees in insertion \\
                 Quicksort \\
                 High-order selection sorts \\
                 Internal merging \\
                 Distributive sorts \\
                 Comparison of internal sorts \\
                 The sort phase of an external sort \\
                 Tape merging \\
                 Poliphase tape merging \\
                 Cascade and compromise tape merges \\
                 Oscillating and crisscross merges \\
                 Tape merge overview \\
                 Random-access sorting \\
                 Generalized sorting systems \\
                 Special systems considerations",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Low:1960:PRS
author: William Low
title: Paramagnetic Resonance in Solids
volume: 2
publisher: pub-ACADEMIC
address: pub-ACADEMIC:adr
pages: viii + 212
year: 1960
LCCN: QC176 .L6 1960
bibdate: Sat Jul 25 13:55:27 1998
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1998.07.25 13:55:27 ???
series: Solid state physics. Supplement
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: William Low
rawtitle: Paramagnetic Resonance in Solids
entry:
@Book{Low:1960:PRS,
  author =       "William Low",
  title =        "Paramagnetic Resonance in Solids",
  volume =       "2",
  publisher =    pub-ACADEMIC,
  address =      pub-ACADEMIC:adr,
  pages =        "viii + 212",
  year =         "1960",
  LCCN =         "QC176 .L6 1960",
  bibdate =      "Sat Jul 25 13:55:27 1998",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  series =       "Solid state physics. Supplement",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  xxISBN =       "none",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: LSBT:2005:BAL
author: Core Members of the Linux Standard Base Team
title: Building applications with the Linux Standard Base
publisher: pub-PHPTR
address: pub-PHPTR:adr
pages: xxvi + 246
year: 2005
ISBN: 0-13-145695-4 (hardcover) OR 0131456954 (hardcover)
ISBN13: 978-0-13-145695-2 (hardcover) OR 9780131456952 (hardcover)
LCCN: QA76.76.O63 B8375 2004
bibdate: Thu Jun 22 05:22:21 2006
bibtimestamp: 2006.06.22 05:22:21 ???
note: Foreword by Theodore Ts'o. Includes CD-ROM.
subject: Linux; Operating systems (Computers); Application software; Development
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: {Core Members of the Linux Standard Base Team}
rawnote: Foreword by Theodore Ts'o. Includes CD-ROM.
rawtitle: Building applications with the {Linux Standard Base}
bibsource:
https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/linux.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/unix.bib; z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager

URL:
http://www.freestandards.org/; http://www.lanana.org/; http://www.linuxbase.org/; http://www.linuxbase.org/test/registered.html; http://www.phptr.com/title/0131456954

TOC:
Part I. Introduction 1. Understanding the LSB 2. Ensuring binary compatibility Part II. Developing LSB applications 3. Using LSB coding practices 4. Packaging your LSB application 5. Migrating Solaris applications to Linux Part III. Certifying for the LSB 6. LSB certification for Linux distributions 7. ISB certification for software products Part IV. Contributing to the LSB project 8. Adding new interfaces to the LSB written specification 9. Adding new architectures to the LSB portfolio Part V. Using LSB resources 10. Using the LSB written specification 11. Using the LSB test suites 12. Using the sample implementation 13. Using the LSB development environment 14. Using the application battery Appendices A. GNU free documentation license B. Resources C. Book logistics

rawTOC:
Part I. Introduction \\ 1. Understanding the LSB \\ 2. Ensuring binary compatibility \\ Part II. Developing LSB applications \\ 3. Using LSB coding practices \\ 4. Packaging your LSB application \\ 5. Migrating Solaris applications to Linux \\ Part III. Certifying for the LSB \\ 6. LSB certification for Linux distributions \\ 7. ISB certification for software products \\ Part IV. Contributing to the LSB project \\ 8. Adding new interfaces to the LSB written specification \\ 9. Adding new architectures to the LSB portfolio \\ Part V. Using LSB resources \\ 10. Using the LSB written specification \\ 11. Using the LSB test suites \\ 12. Using the sample implementation \\ 13. Using the LSB development environment \\ 14. Using the application battery \\ Appendices \\ A. GNU free documentation license \\ B. Resources \\ C. Book logistics

entry:
@Book{LSBT:2005:BAL,
  author =       "{Core Members of the Linux Standard Base Team}",
  title =        "Building applications with the {Linux Standard Base}",
  publisher =    pub-PHPTR,
  address =      pub-PHPTR:adr,
  pages =        "xxvi + 246",
  year =         "2005",
  ISBN =         "0-13-145695-4 (hardcover)",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-13-145695-2 (hardcover)",
  LCCN =         "QA76.76.O63 B8375 2004",
  bibdate =      "Thu Jun 22 05:22:21 2006",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/linux.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/unix.bib;
                 z3950.loc.gov:7090/Voyager",
  note =         "Foreword by Theodore Ts'o. Includes CD-ROM.",
  URL =          "http://www.freestandards.org/; http://www.lanana.org/;
                 http://www.linuxbase.org/;
                 http://www.linuxbase.org/test/registered.html;
                 http://www.phptr.com/title/0131456954",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  baseteam =     "Stuart Anderson and Mark Brown and Kevin Caunt and
                 Marvin Heffler and Andrew Josey and George Kraft IV and
                 Radhakrishnan Sethuraman and Matt Taggart and Kristin
                 Thomas and Theodore Ts'o and Mats Wichmann and Chris
                 Yeoh",
  subject =      "Linux; Operating systems (Computers); Application
                 software; Development",
  tableofcontents = "Part I. Introduction \\
                 1. Understanding the LSB \\
                 2. Ensuring binary compatibility \\
                 Part II. Developing LSB applications \\
                 3. Using LSB coding practices \\
                 4. Packaging your LSB application \\
                 5. Migrating Solaris applications to Linux \\
                 Part III. Certifying for the LSB \\
                 6. LSB certification for Linux distributions \\
                 7. ISB certification for software products \\
                 Part IV. Contributing to the LSB project \\
                 8. Adding new interfaces to the LSB written
                 specification \\
                 9. Adding new architectures to the LSB portfolio \\
                 Part V. Using LSB resources \\
                 10. Using the LSB written specification \\
                 11. Using the LSB test suites \\
                 12. Using the sample implementation \\
                 13. Using the LSB development environment \\
                 14. Using the application battery \\
                 Appendices \\
                 A. GNU free documentation license \\
                 B. Resources \\
                 C. Book logistics",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Lucas:2015:FM
author: Michael W. Lucas and Allan Jude
title: FreeBSD Mastery: ZFS
publisher: Tilted Windmill Press
pages: xx + 212
year: 2015
ISBN: 0-692-45235-4 (paperback) OR 0692452354 (paperback)
ISBN13: 978-0-692-45235-6 (paperback) OR 9780692452356 (paperback)
bibdate: Fri Jun 24 17:30:44 MDT 2016
bibtimestamp: 2016.06.24 17:30:44 MDT
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Michael W. Lucas and Allan Jude
rawtitle: {FreeBSD} Mastery: {ZFS}
bibsource:
fsz3950.oclc.org:210/WorldCat; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/unix.bib

TOC:
0: Introduction / 1 1: Introducing ZFS / 15 2: Virtual Devices / 23 3: Pools / 45 4: ZFS Datasets / 75 5: Repairs & Renovations / 103 6: Disk Space Management / 131 7: Snapshots and Clones / 161 8: Installing to ZFS / 195 Afterword / 201 About the Authors / 203

rawTOC:
0: Introduction / 1 \\ 1: Introducing ZFS / 15 \\ 2: Virtual Devices / 23 \\ 3: Pools / 45 \\ 4: ZFS Datasets / 75 \\ 5: Repairs \& Renovations / 103 \\ 6: Disk Space Management / 131 \\ 7: Snapshots and Clones / 161 \\ 8: Installing to ZFS / 195 \\ Afterword / 201 \\ About the Authors / 203

entry:
@Book{Lucas:2015:FM,
  author =       "Michael W. Lucas and Allan Jude",
  title =        "{FreeBSD} Mastery: {ZFS}",
  publisher =    "Tilted Windmill Press",
  address =      "????",
  pages =        "xx + 212",
  year =         "2015",
  ISBN =         "0-692-45235-4 (paperback)",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-692-45235-6 (paperback)",
  LCCN =         "????",
  bibdate =      "Fri Jun 24 17:30:44 MDT 2016",
  bibsource =    "fsz3950.oclc.org:210/WorldCat;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/unix.bib",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  tableofcontents = "0: Introduction / 1 \\
                 1: Introducing ZFS / 15 \\
                 2: Virtual Devices / 23 \\
                 3: Pools / 45 \\
                 4: ZFS Datasets / 75 \\
                 5: Repairs \& Renovations / 103 \\
                 6: Disk Space Management / 131 \\
                 7: Snapshots and Clones / 161 \\
                 8: Installing to ZFS / 195 \\
                 Afterword / 201 \\
                 About the Authors / 203",
}


bibtype: article
filename: master.bib
label: Ludgate:1909:PAM
author: P. E. Ludgate
title: On a proposed analytical machine
journal: j-SCI-PROC-ROY-DUBLIN-SOC
volume: 12
number: 9
pages: 77--91
year: 1909
bibdate: Wed Oct 13 11:14:08 2010
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 2010.10.13 11:14:08 ???
note: Reprinted in cite [ 2.4]Randell:1982:ODC.
fjournal: Scientific proceedings of the Royal Dublin Society
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: P. E. Ludgate
rawnote: Reprinted in \cite[\S 2.4]{Randell:1982:ODC}.
rawtitle: On a proposed analytical machine
entry:
@Article{Ludgate:1909:PAM,
  author =       "P. E. Ludgate",
  title =        "On a proposed analytical machine",
  journal =      j-SCI-PROC-ROY-DUBLIN-SOC,
  volume =       "12",
  number =       "9",
  pages =        "77--91",
  year =         "1909",
  bibdate =      "Wed Oct 13 11:14:08 2010",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  note =         "Reprinted in \cite[\S 2.4]{Randell:1982:ODC}.",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  fjournal =     "Scientific proceedings of the Royal Dublin Society",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Luke:1969:SFTa
author: Yudell L. Luke
title: The Special Functions and Their Approximations
volume: I
publisher: pub-ACADEMIC
address: pub-ACADEMIC:adr
pages: xx + 349
year: 1969
ISBN: 0-12-459901-X, 0-08-095560-6 (e-book) OR 012459901X, 0080955606 (ebook)
ISBN13: 978-0-12-459901-7, 978-0-08-095560-5 (e-book) OR 9780124599017, 9780080955605 (ebook)
LCCN: QA351 .L94 1969
bibdate: Wed Dec 15 17:55:35 1993
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1993.12.15 17:55:35 ???
series: Mathematics in Science and Engineering, Volume 53-I, Editor: Richard Bellman
URL: http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/book/9780124599017
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Yudell L. Luke
rawtitle: The Special Functions and Their Approximations
TOC:
I: Asymptotic expansions II: Gamma function and related functions III: Hypergeometric functions IV: Confluent hypergeometric functions V: Generalized hypergeometric function and the $G$-function VI: Identification of the $F$ and $G$-functions with the special functions of mathematical physics VII: Asymptotic expansions of $F$ for large parameters VIII: Orthogonal polynomials Bibliography Notation Index Index

rawTOC:
I: Asymptotic expansions \\ II: Gamma function and related functions \\ III: Hypergeometric functions \\ IV: Confluent hypergeometric functions \\ V: Generalized hypergeometric function and the $G$-function \\ VI: Identification of the $F$ and $G$-functions with the special functions of mathematical physics \\ VII: Asymptotic expansions of $F$ for large parameters \\ VIII: Orthogonal polynomials \\ Bibliography \\ Notation Index \\ Index

entry:
@Book{Luke:1969:SFTa,
  author =       "Yudell L. Luke",
  title =        "The Special Functions and Their Approximations",
  volume =       "I",
  publisher =    pub-ACADEMIC,
  address =      pub-ACADEMIC:adr,
  pages =        "xx + 349",
  year =         "1969",
  ISBN =         "0-12-459901-X, 0-08-095560-6 (e-book)",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-12-459901-7, 978-0-08-095560-5 (e-book)",
  LCCN =         "QA351 .L94 1969",
  bibdate =      "Wed Dec 15 17:55:35 1993",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  series =       "Mathematics in Science and Engineering, Volume 53-I,
                 Editor: Richard Bellman",
  URL =          "http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/book/9780124599017",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  tableofcontents = "I: Asymptotic expansions \\
                 II: Gamma function and related functions \\
                 III: Hypergeometric functions \\
                 IV: Confluent hypergeometric functions \\
                 V: Generalized hypergeometric function and the
                 $G$-function \\
                 VI: Identification of the $F$ and $G$-functions with
                 the special functions of mathematical physics \\
                 VII: Asymptotic expansions of $F$ for large parameters
                 \\
                 VIII: Orthogonal polynomials \\
                 Bibliography \\
                 Notation Index \\
                 Index",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Luke:1969:SFTb
author: Yudell L. Luke
title: The Special Functions and Their Approximations
volume: II
publisher: pub-ACADEMIC
address: pub-ACADEMIC:adr
pages: xx + 485
year: 1969
ISBN: 0-12-459902-8 OR 0124599028
ISBN13: 978-0-12-459902-4 OR 9780124599024
LCCN: QA351 .L797
bibdate: Wed Dec 15 17:55:38 1993
bibsource: https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/elefunt.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib
bibtimestamp: 1993.12.15 17:55:38 ???
series: Mathematics in Science and Engineering, Volume 53-II, Editor: Richard Bellman
URL: http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/book/9780124599024
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Yudell L. Luke
rawtitle: The Special Functions and Their Approximations
TOC:
Dedication / v Preface / vii--ix Contents of Volume I / xv Introduction / xvii--xx IX: Expansions of Generalized Hypergeometric Functions in Series of Functions of the Same Kind / 1--65 X: The $tau $-Method / 66--91 XI: Polynomial and Rational Approximations to Generalized Hypergeometric Functions / 92--132 XII: Recursion Formulas for Polynomials and Functions which Occur in Infinite Series and Rational Approximations to Generalized Hypergeometric Functions / 133--166 XIII: Polynomial and Rational Approximations for $E(z) = _2F_1(1, sigma ; rho + 1; 1/z)$ / 167--185 XIV: Polynomial and Rational Approximations for the Incomplete Gamma Function / 186--213 XV: Trapezoidal Rule Integration Formulas / 214--226 XVI: Applications / 227--281 XVII: Tables of Coefficients / 282--452 Bibliography / 453--461 Notation Index / 463--467 Subject Index to Volumes I and II / 468--485

rawTOC:
Dedication / v \\ Preface / vii--ix \\ Contents of Volume I / xv \\ Introduction / xvii--xx \\ IX: Expansions of Generalized Hypergeometric Functions in Series of Functions of the Same Kind / 1--65 \\ X: The $\tau$-Method / 66--91 \\ XI: Polynomial and Rational Approximations to Generalized Hypergeometric Functions / 92--132 \\ XII: Recursion Formulas for Polynomials and Functions which Occur in Infinite Series and Rational Approximations to Generalized Hypergeometric Functions / 133--166 \\ XIII: Polynomial and Rational Approximations for $E(z) = _2F_1(1, \sigma; \rho + 1; 1/z)$ / 167--185 \\ XIV: Polynomial and Rational Approximations for the Incomplete Gamma Function / 186--213 \\ XV: Trapezoidal Rule Integration Formulas / 214--226 \\ XVI: Applications / 227--281 \\ XVII: Tables of Coefficients / 282--452 \\ Bibliography / 453--461 \\ Notation Index / 463--467 \\ Subject Index to Volumes I and II / 468--485

entry:
@Book{Luke:1969:SFTb,
  author =       "Yudell L. Luke",
  title =        "The Special Functions and Their Approximations",
  volume =       "II",
  publisher =    pub-ACADEMIC,
  address =      pub-ACADEMIC:adr,
  pages =        "xx + 485",
  year =         "1969",
  ISBN =         "0-12-459902-8",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-12-459902-4",
  LCCN =         "QA351 .L797",
  bibdate =      "Wed Dec 15 17:55:38 1993",
  bibsource =    "https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/elefunt.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  series =       "Mathematics in Science and Engineering, Volume 53-II,
                 Editor: Richard Bellman",
  URL =          "http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/book/9780124599024",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  tableofcontents = "Dedication / v \\
                 Preface / vii--ix \\
                 Contents of Volume I / xv \\
                 Introduction / xvii--xx \\
                 IX: Expansions of Generalized Hypergeometric Functions
                 in Series of Functions of the Same Kind / 1--65 \\
                 X: The $\tau$-Method / 66--91 \\
                 XI: Polynomial and Rational Approximations to
                 Generalized Hypergeometric Functions / 92--132 \\
                 XII: Recursion Formulas for Polynomials and Functions
                 which Occur in Infinite Series and Rational
                 Approximations to Generalized Hypergeometric Functions
                 / 133--166 \\
                 XIII: Polynomial and Rational Approximations for $E(z)
                 = _2F_1(1, \sigma; \rho + 1; 1/z)$ / 167--185 \\
                 XIV: Polynomial and Rational Approximations for the
                 Incomplete Gamma Function / 186--213 \\
                 XV: Trapezoidal Rule Integration Formulas / 214--226
                 \\
                 XVI: Applications / 227--281 \\
                 XVII: Tables of Coefficients / 282--452 \\
                 Bibliography / 453--461 \\
                 Notation Index / 463--467 \\
                 Subject Index to Volumes I and II / 468--485",
}


bibtype: book
filename: master.bib
label: Luke:1975:MFT
author: Yudell L. Luke
title: Mathematical Functions and Their Approximations
publisher: pub-ACADEMIC
address: pub-ACADEMIC:adr
pages: xvii + 568
year: 1975
ISBN: 0-12-459950-8, 1-4832-6245-6 (e-book) OR 0124599508, 1483262456 (ebook)
ISBN13: 978-0-12-459950-5, 978-1-4832-6245-1 (e-book) OR 9780124599505, 9781483262451 (ebook)
LCCN: QA55 .L96 1975
bibdate: Fri Jun 30 05:58:16 MDT 2023
bibtimestamp: 2023.06.30 05:58:16 MDT
acknowledgement: ack-nhfb
rawauthor: Yudell L. Luke
rawtitle: Mathematical Functions and Their Approximations
bibsource:
ftp://garbo.uwasa.fi/pc/doc-soft/fpbibl18.zip; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/elefunt.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/fparith.bib; https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib

URL:
https://shop.elsevier.com/books/mathematical-functions-and-their-approximations/luke/978-0-12-459950-5

remark:
An updated version of part of Handbook of mathematical functions with formulas, graphs, and mathematical tables, edited by M. Abramowitz and I.A. Stegun. Includes indexes.

subject:
Mathematics; Tables; Fonctions (Matheematiques); Matheematiques; Calculus; Mathematical Analysis; Mathematics; Approximation; Funktion; Mathematik; Spezielle Funktion

TOC:
Preface / xv I. The Gamma Function and Related Functions 1.1 Definitions and Elementary Properties / 1 1.2 Power Series and Other Series Expansions / 1 1.3 Asymptotic Expansions / 7 1.4 Rational Approximations for y (z) / 13 1.5 Inequalities / 17 1.6 Bibliographic and Numerical Data / 20 1.6.1 General References / 20 1.6.2 Description of and References to Tables / 21 1.6.3 Description of and References to Other Approximations and Expansions / 22 II. The Binomial Function 2.1 Power Series / 24 2.2 Expansions in Series of Jacobi and Chebyshev Polynomials / 24 2.3 Expansions in Series of Bessel Functions / 26 2.4 Pade Approximations / 27 24.1 $(1 + 1 / z)^-c$ / 27 2.4.2 The Square Root / 28 2.4.3 Pade Coefficients / 30 2.4.4 The Function $e^-w$ / 31 2.5 Inequalities / 34 III. Elementary Functions 3.1 Logarithmic Functions / 36 3.1.1 Power Series / 36 3.1.2 Expansion in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials / 38 3.1.3 Pade Approximations / 39 3.1.4 Inequalities / 41 3.2 Exponential Function / 42 3.2.1 Series Expansions / 42 3.2.2 Expansions in Series of Jacobi and Chebyshev Polynomials and Bessel Functions / 42 3.2.3 Pade Approximations / 46 3.2.4 Inequalities / 51 3.3 Circular and Hyperbolic Functions / 52 3.3.1 Power Series / 52 3.3.2 Expansions in Series of Jacobi and Chebyshev Polynomials and Bessel Functions / 52 3.3.3 Rational and Pade Approximations / 57 3.3.4 Inequalities / 60 3.4 Inverse Circular and Hyperbolic Functions / 61 3.4.1 Power Series / 61 3.4.2 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials / 63 3.4.3 Pade Approximations / 68 3.4.4 Inequalities / 72 3.5 Bibliographic and Numerical Data / 74 3.5.1 Description of and References to Tables / 74 3.5.2 Description of and References to Other Approximations and Expansions / 74 IV. Incomplete Gamma Functions 4.1 Definitions and Series Expansions / 77 4.2 Differential Equations and Difference Equations / 78 4.3 Pade Approximations / 79 4.3.1 $_1F_1(1; nu + 1; -z)$ / 79 4.3.2 $z^1 - nu e^z Gamma (nu , z)$ / 82 4.3.3 The Error $T_n(nu , z)$ for $|rm arg z/k| leq pi $ / 84 4.3.4 The Negative Real Axis and the Zeros of $F_n(nu , z)$ / 89 4.4 Inequalities / 95 4.4.1 $H(nu , z)$ / 95 4.4.2 $Gamma (nu , z)$ / 96 4.5 Notes on the Computation of the Incomplete Gamma Function / 97 4.6 Exponential Integrals / 103 4.6.1 Relation to Incomplete Gamma Function and Other Properties / 103 4.6.2 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials / 104 4.6.3 Rational and Pad Approximations / 106 4.7 Cosine and Sine Integrals / 115 4.7.1 Relation to Exponential Integral and Other Properties / 115 4.7.2 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials / 116 4.8 Error Functions / 119 4.8.1 Relation to Incomplete Gamma Function and Other Properties / 119 4.8.2 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials and Bessel Functions / 122 4.8.3 Pade Approximations / 124 4.8.4 Trapezoidal Rule Approximations / 134 4.8.5 Inequalities / 137 4.9 Fresnel Integrals / 139 4.9.1 Relation to Error Functions and Other Properties / 139 4.9.2 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials / 140 4.10 Bibliographic and Numerical Data / 143 4.10.1 References / 143 4.10.2 Description of and References to Tables / 143 4.10.3 Description of and References to Other Approximations and Expansions / 149 V. The Generalized Hypergeometric Function $_pF_g$ and the $G$-Function 5.1 Introduction / 154 5.2 The $_pF_q$ / 155 5.2.1 Power Series / 155 5.2.2 Derivatives and Contiguous Relations / 159 5.2.3 Integral Representations and Integrals Involving the $_pF_q$ / 160 5.2.4 Evaluation for Special Values of the Variable and Parameters / 163 5.3 The $G$-Function / 170 5.3.1 Definition and Relation to the $_pF_q$ / 170 5.3.2 Elementary Properties / 176 5.3.3 Analytic Continuation of $G_p, p^m, n(z)$ / 178 5.4 The Confluence Principle / 179 5.5 Multiplication Theorems / 184 5.6 Integrals Involving $G$-Functions / 186 5.7 Differential Equations / 190 5.7.1 The $_pF_q$ / 190 5.7.2 The $G$-Function / 192 5.8 Series of $G$-Functions / 194 5.8.1 Introduction / 194 5.8.2 Notation / 194 5.8.3 Expansion Theorems / 197 5.9 Asymptotic Expansions / 199 5.9.1 $G_p, q^q, n(z)$, $n = 0, 1$ / 199 5.9.2 $G_p, q^m, n(z)$ / 201 5.9.3 $_pF_q(z)$ / 206 5.10 Expansions in Series of Generalized Jacobi, Generalized Laguerre and Chebyshev Polynomials / 213 5.10.1 Expansions for $G$-Functions / 213 5.10.2 Expansions for $_pF_q$ / 220 5.11 Expansions in Series of Bessel Functions / 223 5.12 Polynomial and Rational Approximations / 224 5.13 Recurrence Formulas for Polynomials and Functions Occurring in Approximations to Generalized Hypergeometric Functions / 234 5.13.1 Introduction / 234 5.13.2 Recursion Formulas for Extended Jacobi and Laguerre Functions / 235 5.13.3 Recursion Formulas for the Numerator and Denominator Polynomials in the Rational Approximations for the Generalized Hypergeometric Function / 244 5.13.4 Recursion Formula for Coefficients in the Expansion of the $G$-Function in Series of Extended Jacobi Polynomials / 247 5.14 Inequalities / 252 VI. The Gaussian Hypergeometric Function $_2F_1$ 6.1 Introduction / 257 6.2 Elementary Properties / 257 6.2.1 Derivatives / 257 6.2.2 Contiguous Relations / 258 6.2.3 Integral Representations / 259 6.3 Differential Equations / 260 6.4 Kummer Solutions and Transformation Formulae / 262 6.5 Analytic Continuation / 263 6.6 The Complete Solution and Wronskians / 265 6.7 Quadratic Transformations / 270 6.8 The $_2F_1$ for Special Values of the Argument / 271 6.9 Expansion in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials / 274 6.10 Pade Approximations for $_2F_1(1, sigma ;rho + 1;-1/z)$ / 274 6.11 Inequalities / 278 6.12 Bibliographic and Numerical Data / 279 6.12.1 References / 279 6.12.2 Description of and References to Tables / 279 VII. The Confluent Hypergeometric Function 7.1 Introduction / 284 7.2 Integral Representations / 284 7.3 Elementary Relations / 285 7.3.1 Derivatives / 285 7.3.2 Contiguous Relations / 285 7.3.3 Products of Confluent Functions / 286 7.4 Differential Equations / 287 7.5 The Complete Solution and Wronskians / 288 7.6 Asymptotic Expansions / 291 7.7 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials / 293 7.8 Expansions in Series of Besse! Functions / 294 7.9 Inequalities / 295 7.10 Other Notations and Related Functions / 295 7.11 Bibliographic and Numerical Data / 296 7.11.1 References / 296 7.11.2 Description of and References to Tables and Other Approximations / 296 VIII. Identification of the $_pF_q$, and $G$-Functions with the Special Functions 8.1 Introduction / 298 8.2 Named Special Functions Expressed as $_pF_q$'s / 298 8.2.1 Elementary Functions / 298 8.2.2 The Incomplete Gamma Function and Related Functions / 298 8.2.3 The Gaussian Hypergeometric Function / 298 8.2.4 Legendre Functions / 299 8.2.5 Orthogonal Polynomials / 299 8.2.6 Complete Elliptic Integrals / 299 8.2.7 Confluent Hypergeometric Functions, Whittaker Functions and Bessel Functions / 300 8.3 Named Functions Expressed in Terms of the $G$-Function / 300 8.4 The $G$-Function Expressed as a Named Function / 306 IX. Bessel Functions and Their Integrals 9.1 Introduction / 311 9.2 Definitions, Connecting Relations and Power Series / 311 9.3 Difference--Differential Formulas / 313 9.4 Products of Bessel Functions / 314 9.5 Asymptotic Expansions for Large Variable / 315 9.6 Integrals of Bessel Functions / 315 9.7 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials / 316 9.8 Expansions in Series of Bessel Functions / 360 9.9 Rational Approximations / 361 9.9.1 Introduction / 361 9.9.2 $I_nu (z)$, $z$ Small / 361 9.9.3 $K_nu (z)$, $z$ Large / 366 9.10 Computation of Bessel Functions by Use of Recurrence Formulas / 380 9.10.1 Introduction / 380 9.10.2 Backward Recurrence Schemata for Generating $I_nu (z)$ / 380 9.10.3 Closed Form Expressions / 382 9.10.4 Expressions for $J_nu (z)$ / 389 9.10.5 Numerical Examples / 392 9.11 Evaluation of Bessel Functions by Application of Trapezoidal Type Integration Formulas / 395 9.12 Inequalities / 399 9.13 Bibliographic and Numerical Data / 403 9.13.1 References / 403 9.13.2 Description of and References to Tables / 404 9.13.3 Description of and References to Other Approximations and Expansions / 410 X. Lommel Functions, Struve Functions, and Associated Bessel Functions 10.1 Definitions, Connecting Relations and Power Series / 413 10.2 Asymptotic Expansions / 415 10.3 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials and Bessel Functions / 415 10.4 Rational Approximations for $H_nu (z) - Y_nu (z)$ and the Errors in These Approximations / 422 10.5 Bibliographic and Numerical Data / 426 10.5.1 References / 426 10.5.2 Description of and References to Tables / 426 XI. Orthogonal Polynomials 11.1 Introduction / 428 11.2 Orthogonal Properties / 428 11.3 Jacobi Polynomials / 436 11.3.1 Expansion Formulae / 436 11.3.2 Difference--Differential Formulae / 439 11.3.3 Integrals / 439 11.3.4 Expansion of $x^rho $ in Series of Jacobi Polynomials / 440 11.3.5 Convergence Theorems for the Expansion of Arbitrary Functions in Series of Jacobi Polynomials / 442 11.3.6 Evaluation and Estimation of the Coefficients in the Expansion of a Given Function $f(x)$ in Series of Jacobi Polynomials / 443 11.4 The Chebyshev Polynomials $T_n(x)$ and $U_n(x)$ / 453 11.5 The Chebyshev Polynomials $T_n^*(x)$ and $U_n^*(x)$ / 459 11.6 Coefficients for Expansion of Integrals of Functions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials of the First Kind / 464 11.6.1 Introduction / 464 11.6.2 Series of Shifted Chebyshev Polynomials / 464 11.6.3 Series of Chebyshev Polynomials of Even Order / 468 11.6.4 Series of Chebyshev Polynomials of Odd Order / 468 11.7 Orthogonality Properties of Chebyshev Polynomials with Respect to Summation / 469 11.8 A Nesting Procedure for the Computation of Expansions in Series of Functions Where the Functions Satisfy a Linear Finite Difference Equation / 475 XII. Computation by Use of Recurrence Formulas 12.1 Introduction / 483 12.2 Homogeneous Difference Equations / 483 12.3 Inhomogeneous Difference Equations / 487 XIII. Some Aspects of Rational and Polynomial Approximations 13.1 Introduction / 490 13.2 Approximations in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials of the First Kind / 490 13.3 The Pade Table / 493 13.4 Approximation of Functions Defined by a Differential Equation --- The $tau $-Method / 495 13.5 Approximations of Functions Defined by a Series / 499 13.6 Solution of Differential Equations in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials of the First Kind / 500 XIV. Miscellaneous Topics 14.1 Introduction / 505 14.2 Bernoulli Polynomials and Numbers / 505 14.3 $D$ and $delta $ Operators / 507 14.4 Computation and Check of the Tables / 509 14.5 Mathematical Constants / 512 14.6 Late Bibliography / 516 Bibliography / 517 Notation Index / 545 Subject Index / 551

rawTOC:
Preface / xv \\ \\ I. The Gamma Function and Related Functions \\ \\ 1.1 Definitions and Elementary Properties / 1 \\ 1.2 Power Series and Other Series Expansions / 1 \\ 1.3 Asymptotic Expansions / 7 \\ 1.4 Rational Approximations for y (z) / 13 \\ 1.5 Inequalities / 17 \\ 1.6 Bibliographic and Numerical Data / 20 \\ 1.6.1 General References / 20 \\ 1.6.2 Description of and References to Tables / 21 \\ 1.6.3 Description of and References to Other Approximations and Expansions / 22 \\ \\ II. The Binomial Function \\ \\ 2.1 Power Series / 24 \\ 2.2 Expansions in Series of Jacobi and Chebyshev Polynomials / 24 \\ 2.3 Expansions in Series of Bessel Functions / 26 \\ 2.4 Pad{\'e} Approximations / 27 \\ 24.1 $(1 + 1 / z)^{-c}$ / 27 \\ 2.4.2 The Square Root / 28 \\ 2.4.3 Pad{\'e} Coefficients / 30 \\ 2.4.4 The Function $e^{-w}$ / 31 \\ 2.5 Inequalities / 34 \\ \\ III. Elementary Functions \\ \\ 3.1 Logarithmic Functions / 36 \\ 3.1.1 Power Series / 36 \\ 3.1.2 Expansion in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials / 38 \\ 3.1.3 Pad{\'e} Approximations / 39 \\ 3.1.4 Inequalities / 41 \\ 3.2 Exponential Function / 42 \\ 3.2.1 Series Expansions / 42 \\ 3.2.2 Expansions in Series of Jacobi and Chebyshev Polynomials and Bessel Functions / 42 \\ 3.2.3 Pad{\'e} Approximations / 46 \\ 3.2.4 Inequalities / 51 \\ 3.3 Circular and Hyperbolic Functions / 52 \\ 3.3.1 Power Series / 52 \\ 3.3.2 Expansions in Series of Jacobi and Chebyshev Polynomials and Bessel Functions / 52 \\ 3.3.3 Rational and Pad{\'e} Approximations / 57 \\ 3.3.4 Inequalities / 60 \\ 3.4 Inverse Circular and Hyperbolic Functions / 61 \\ 3.4.1 Power Series / 61 \\ 3.4.2 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials / 63 \\ 3.4.3 Pad{\'e} Approximations / 68 \\ 3.4.4 Inequalities / 72 \\ 3.5 Bibliographic and Numerical Data / 74 \\ 3.5.1 Description of and References to Tables / 74 \\ 3.5.2 Description of and References to Other Approximations and Expansions / 74 \\ \\ IV. Incomplete Gamma Functions \\ \\ 4.1 Definitions and Series Expansions / 77 \\ 4.2 Differential Equations and Difference Equations / 78 \\ 4.3 Pad{\'e} Approximations / 79 \\ 4.3.1 $_1F_1(1; \nu + 1; -z)$ / 79 \\ 4.3.2 $z^{1 - \nu} e^z \Gamma(\nu, z)$ / 82 \\ 4.3.3 The Error $T_n(\nu, z)$ for $|{\rm arg} z/k| \leq \pi$ / 84 \\ 4.3.4 The Negative Real Axis and the Zeros of $F_n(\nu, z)$ / 89 \\ 4.4 Inequalities / 95 \\ 4.4.1 $H(\nu, z)$ / 95 \\ 4.4.2 $\Gamma(\nu, z)$ / 96 \\ 4.5 Notes on the Computation of the Incomplete Gamma Function / 97 \\ 4.6 Exponential Integrals / 103 \\ 4.6.1 Relation to Incomplete Gamma Function and Other Properties / 103 \\ 4.6.2 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials / 104 \\ 4.6.3 Rational and Pad Approximations / 106 \\ 4.7 Cosine and Sine Integrals / 115 \\ 4.7.1 Relation to Exponential Integral and Other Properties / 115 \\ 4.7.2 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials / 116 \\ 4.8 Error Functions / 119 \\ 4.8.1 Relation to Incomplete Gamma Function and Other Properties / 119 \\ 4.8.2 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials and Bessel Functions / 122 \\ 4.8.3 Pad{\'e} Approximations / 124 \\ 4.8.4 Trapezoidal Rule Approximations / 134 \\ 4.8.5 Inequalities / 137 \\ 4.9 Fresnel Integrals / 139 \\ 4.9.1 Relation to Error Functions and Other Properties / 139 \\ 4.9.2 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials / 140 \\ 4.10 Bibliographic and Numerical Data / 143 \\ 4.10.1 References / 143 \\ 4.10.2 Description of and References to Tables / 143 \\ 4.10.3 Description of and References to Other Approximations and Expansions / 149 \\ \\ V. The Generalized Hypergeometric Function $_pF_g$ and the $G$-Function \\ \\ 5.1 Introduction / 154 \\ 5.2 The $_pF_q$ / 155 \\ 5.2.1 Power Series / 155 \\ 5.2.2 Derivatives and Contiguous Relations / 159 \\ 5.2.3 Integral Representations and Integrals Involving the $_pF_q$ / 160 \\ 5.2.4 Evaluation for Special Values of the Variable and Parameters / 163 \\ 5.3 The $G$-Function / 170 \\ 5.3.1 Definition and Relation to the $_pF_q$ / 170 \\ 5.3.2 Elementary Properties / 176 \\ 5.3.3 Analytic Continuation of $G_{p, p}^{m, n}(z)$ / 178 \\ 5.4 The Confluence Principle / 179 \\ 5.5 Multiplication Theorems / 184 \\ 5.6 Integrals Involving $G$-Functions / 186 \\ 5.7 Differential Equations / 190 \\ 5.7.1 The $_pF_q$ / 190 \\ 5.7.2 The $G$-Function / 192 \\ 5.8 Series of $G$-Functions / 194 \\ 5.8.1 Introduction / 194 \\ 5.8.2 Notation / 194 \\ 5.8.3 Expansion Theorems / 197 \\ 5.9 Asymptotic Expansions / 199 \\ 5.9.1 $G_{p, q}^{q, n}(z)$, $n = 0, 1$ / 199 \\ 5.9.2 $G_{p, q}^{m, n}(z)$ / 201 \\ 5.9.3 $_pF_q(z)$ / 206 \\ 5.10 Expansions in Series of Generalized Jacobi, Generalized Laguerre and Chebyshev Polynomials / 213 \\ 5.10.1 Expansions for $G$-Functions / 213 \\ 5.10.2 Expansions for $_pF_q$ / 220 \\ 5.11 Expansions in Series of Bessel Functions / 223 \\ 5.12 Polynomial and Rational Approximations / 224 \\ 5.13 Recurrence Formulas for Polynomials and Functions Occurring in Approximations to Generalized Hypergeometric Functions / 234 \\ 5.13.1 Introduction / 234 \\ 5.13.2 Recursion Formulas for Extended Jacobi and Laguerre Functions / 235 \\ 5.13.3 Recursion Formulas for the Numerator and Denominator Polynomials in the Rational Approximations for the Generalized Hypergeometric Function / 244 \\ 5.13.4 Recursion Formula for Coefficients in the Expansion of the $G$-Function in Series of Extended Jacobi Polynomials / 247 \\ 5.14 Inequalities / 252 \\ \\ VI. The Gaussian Hypergeometric Function $_2F_1$ \\ \\ 6.1 Introduction / 257 \\ 6.2 Elementary Properties / 257 \\ 6.2.1 Derivatives / 257 \\ 6.2.2 Contiguous Relations / 258 \\ 6.2.3 Integral Representations / 259 \\ 6.3 Differential Equations / 260 \\ 6.4 Kummer Solutions and Transformation Formulae / 262 \\ 6.5 Analytic Continuation / 263 \\ 6.6 The Complete Solution and Wronskians / 265 \\ 6.7 Quadratic Transformations / 270 \\ 6.8 The $_2F_1$ for Special Values of the Argument / 271 \\ 6.9 Expansion in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials / 274 \\ 6.10 Pad{\'e} Approximations for $_2F_1(1, \sigma;\rho + 1;-1/z)$ / 274 \\ 6.11 Inequalities / 278 \\ 6.12 Bibliographic and Numerical Data / 279 \\ 6.12.1 References / 279 \\ 6.12.2 Description of and References to Tables / 279 \\ \\ VII. The Confluent Hypergeometric Function \\ \\ 7.1 Introduction / 284 \\ 7.2 Integral Representations / 284 \\ 7.3 Elementary Relations / 285 \\ 7.3.1 Derivatives / 285 \\ 7.3.2 Contiguous Relations / 285 \\ 7.3.3 Products of Confluent Functions / 286 \\ 7.4 Differential Equations / 287 \\ 7.5 The Complete Solution and Wronskians / 288 \\ 7.6 Asymptotic Expansions / 291 \\ 7.7 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials / 293 \\ 7.8 Expansions in Series of Besse! Functions / 294 \\ 7.9 Inequalities / 295 \\ 7.10 Other Notations and Related Functions / 295 \\ 7.11 Bibliographic and Numerical Data / 296 \\ 7.11.1 References / 296 \\ 7.11.2 Description of and References to Tables and Other Approximations / 296 \\ \\ VIII. Identification of the $_pF_q$, and $G$-Functions with the Special Functions \\ \\ 8.1 Introduction / 298 \\ 8.2 Named Special Functions Expressed as $_pF_q$'s / 298 \\ 8.2.1 Elementary Functions / 298 \\ 8.2.2 The Incomplete Gamma Function and Related Functions / 298 \\ 8.2.3 The Gaussian Hypergeometric Function / 298 \\ 8.2.4 Legendre Functions / 299 \\ 8.2.5 Orthogonal Polynomials / 299 \\ 8.2.6 Complete Elliptic Integrals / 299 \\ 8.2.7 Confluent Hypergeometric Functions, Whittaker Functions and Bessel Functions / 300 \\ 8.3 Named Functions Expressed in Terms of the $G$-Function / 300 \\ 8.4 The $G$-Function Expressed as a Named Function / 306 \\ \\ IX. Bessel Functions and Their Integrals \\ \\ 9.1 Introduction / 311 \\ 9.2 Definitions, Connecting Relations and Power Series / 311 \\ 9.3 Difference--Differential Formulas / 313 \\ 9.4 Products of Bessel Functions / 314 \\ 9.5 Asymptotic Expansions for Large Variable / 315 \\ 9.6 Integrals of Bessel Functions / 315 \\ 9.7 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials / 316 \\ 9.8 Expansions in Series of Bessel Functions / 360 \\ 9.9 Rational Approximations / 361 \\ 9.9.1 Introduction / 361 \\ 9.9.2 $I_\nu(z)$, $z$ Small / 361 \\ 9.9.3 $K_\nu(z)$, $z$ Large / 366 \\ 9.10 Computation of Bessel Functions by Use of Recurrence Formulas / 380 \\ 9.10.1 Introduction / 380 \\ 9.10.2 Backward Recurrence Schemata for Generating $I_\nu(z)$ / 380 \\ 9.10.3 Closed Form Expressions / 382 \\ 9.10.4 Expressions for $J_\nu(z)$ / 389 \\ 9.10.5 Numerical Examples / 392 \\ 9.11 Evaluation of Bessel Functions by Application of Trapezoidal Type Integration Formulas / 395 \\ 9.12 Inequalities / 399 \\ 9.13 Bibliographic and Numerical Data / 403 \\ 9.13.1 References / 403 \\ 9.13.2 Description of and References to Tables / 404 \\ 9.13.3 Description of and References to Other Approximations and Expansions / 410 \\ \\ X. Lommel Functions, Struve Functions, and Associated Bessel Functions \\ \\ 10.1 Definitions, Connecting Relations and Power Series / 413 \\ 10.2 Asymptotic Expansions / 415 \\ 10.3 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials and Bessel Functions / 415 \\ 10.4 Rational Approximations for $H_\nu(z) - Y_\nu(z)$ and the Errors in These Approximations / 422 \\ 10.5 Bibliographic and Numerical Data / 426 \\ 10.5.1 References / 426 \\ 10.5.2 Description of and References to Tables / 426 \\ \\ XI. Orthogonal Polynomials \\ \\ 11.1 Introduction / 428 \\ 11.2 Orthogonal Properties / 428 \\ 11.3 Jacobi Polynomials / 436 \\ 11.3.1 Expansion Formulae / 436 \\ 11.3.2 Difference--Differential Formulae / 439 \\ 11.3.3 Integrals / 439 \\ 11.3.4 Expansion of $x^\rho$ in Series of Jacobi Polynomials / 440 \\ 11.3.5 Convergence Theorems for the Expansion of Arbitrary Functions in Series of Jacobi Polynomials / 442 \\ 11.3.6 Evaluation and Estimation of the Coefficients in the Expansion of a Given Function $f(x)$ in Series of Jacobi Polynomials / 443 \\ 11.4 The Chebyshev Polynomials $T_n(x)$ and $U_n(x)$ / 453 \\ 11.5 The Chebyshev Polynomials $T_n^*(x)$ and $U_n^*(x)$ / 459 \\ 11.6 Coefficients for Expansion of Integrals of Functions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials of the First Kind / 464 \\ 11.6.1 Introduction / 464 \\ 11.6.2 Series of Shifted Chebyshev Polynomials / 464 \\ 11.6.3 Series of Chebyshev Polynomials of Even Order / 468 \\ 11.6.4 Series of Chebyshev Polynomials of Odd Order / 468 \\ 11.7 Orthogonality Properties of Chebyshev Polynomials with Respect to Summation / 469 \\ 11.8 A Nesting Procedure for the Computation of Expansions in Series of Functions Where the Functions Satisfy a Linear Finite Difference Equation / 475 \\ \\ XII. Computation by Use of Recurrence Formulas \\ \\ 12.1 Introduction / 483 \\ 12.2 Homogeneous Difference Equations / 483 \\ 12.3 Inhomogeneous Difference Equations / 487 \\ \\ XIII. Some Aspects of Rational and Polynomial Approximations \\ \\ 13.1 Introduction / 490 \\ 13.2 Approximations in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials of the First Kind / 490 \\ 13.3 The Pad{\'e} Table / 493 \\ 13.4 Approximation of Functions Defined by a Differential Equation --- The $\tau$-Method / 495 \\ 13.5 Approximations of Functions Defined by a Series / 499 \\ 13.6 Solution of Differential Equations in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials of the First Kind / 500 \\ \\ XIV. Miscellaneous Topics \\ \\ 14.1 Introduction / 505 \\ 14.2 Bernoulli Polynomials and Numbers / 505 \\ 14.3 $D$ and $\delta$ Operators / 507 \\ 14.4 Computation and Check of the Tables / 509 \\ 14.5 Mathematical Constants / 512 \\ 14.6 Late Bibliography / 516 \\ \\ Bibliography / 517 \\ \\ Notation Index / 545 \\ \\ Subject Index / 551

entry:
@Book{Luke:1975:MFT,
  author =       "Yudell L. Luke",
  title =        "Mathematical Functions and Their Approximations",
  publisher =    pub-ACADEMIC,
  address =      pub-ACADEMIC:adr,
  pages =        "xvii + 568",
  year =         "1975",
  ISBN =         "0-12-459950-8, 1-4832-6245-6 (e-book)",
  ISBN-13 =      "978-0-12-459950-5, 978-1-4832-6245-1 (e-book)",
  LCCN =         "QA55 .L96 1975",
  bibdate =      "Fri Jun 30 05:58:16 MDT 2023",
  bibsource =    "ftp://garbo.uwasa.fi/pc/doc-soft/fpbibl18.zip;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/elefunt.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/fparith.bib;
                 https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/master.bib",
  URL =          "https://shop.elsevier.com/books/mathematical-functions-and-their-approximations/luke/978-0-12-459950-5",
  acknowledgement = ack-nhfb,
  libnote =      "Not in my library.",
  remark =       "An updated version of part of Handbook of mathematical
                 functions with formulas, graphs, and mathematical
                 tables, edited by M. Abramowitz and I.A. Stegun.
                 Includes indexes.",
  subject =      "Mathematics; Tables; Fonctions (Math{\'e}ematiques);
                 Math{\'e}ematiques; Calculus; Mathematical Analysis;
                 Mathematics; Approximation; Funktion; Mathematik;
                 Spezielle Funktion",
  tableofcontents = "Preface / xv \\
                 \\
                 I. The Gamma Function and Related Functions \\
                 \\
                 1.1 Definitions and Elementary Properties / 1 \\
                 1.2 Power Series and Other Series Expansions / 1 \\
                 1.3 Asymptotic Expansions / 7 \\
                 1.4 Rational Approximations for y (z) / 13 \\
                 1.5 Inequalities / 17 \\
                 1.6 Bibliographic and Numerical Data / 20 \\
                 1.6.1 General References / 20 \\
                 1.6.2 Description of and References to Tables / 21 \\
                 1.6.3 Description of and References to Other
                 Approximations and Expansions / 22 \\
                 \\
                 II. The Binomial Function \\
                 \\
                 2.1 Power Series / 24 \\
                 2.2 Expansions in Series of Jacobi and Chebyshev
                 Polynomials / 24 \\
                 2.3 Expansions in Series of Bessel Functions / 26 \\
                 2.4 Pad{\'e} Approximations / 27 \\
                 24.1 $(1 + 1 / z)^{-c}$ / 27 \\
                 2.4.2 The Square Root / 28 \\
                 2.4.3 Pad{\'e} Coefficients / 30 \\
                 2.4.4 The Function $e^{-w}$ / 31 \\
                 2.5 Inequalities / 34 \\
                 \\
                 III. Elementary Functions \\
                 \\
                 3.1 Logarithmic Functions / 36 \\
                 3.1.1 Power Series / 36 \\
                 3.1.2 Expansion in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials / 38
                 \\
                 3.1.3 Pad{\'e} Approximations / 39 \\
                 3.1.4 Inequalities / 41 \\
                 3.2 Exponential Function / 42 \\
                 3.2.1 Series Expansions / 42 \\
                 3.2.2 Expansions in Series of Jacobi and Chebyshev
                 Polynomials and Bessel Functions / 42 \\
                 3.2.3 Pad{\'e} Approximations / 46 \\
                 3.2.4 Inequalities / 51 \\
                 3.3 Circular and Hyperbolic Functions / 52 \\
                 3.3.1 Power Series / 52 \\
                 3.3.2 Expansions in Series of Jacobi and Chebyshev
                 Polynomials and Bessel Functions / 52 \\
                 3.3.3 Rational and Pad{\'e} Approximations / 57 \\
                 3.3.4 Inequalities / 60 \\
                 3.4 Inverse Circular and Hyperbolic Functions / 61 \\
                 3.4.1 Power Series / 61 \\
                 3.4.2 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials /
                 63 \\
                 3.4.3 Pad{\'e} Approximations / 68 \\
                 3.4.4 Inequalities / 72 \\
                 3.5 Bibliographic and Numerical Data / 74 \\
                 3.5.1 Description of and References to Tables / 74 \\
                 3.5.2 Description of and References to Other
                 Approximations and Expansions / 74 \\
                 \\
                 IV. Incomplete Gamma Functions \\
                 \\
                 4.1 Definitions and Series Expansions / 77 \\
                 4.2 Differential Equations and Difference Equations /
                 78 \\
                 4.3 Pad{\'e} Approximations / 79 \\
                 4.3.1 $_1F_1(1; \nu + 1; -z)$ / 79 \\
                 4.3.2 $z^{1 - \nu} e^z \Gamma(\nu, z)$ / 82 \\
                 4.3.3 The Error $T_n(\nu, z)$ for $|{\rm arg} z/k| \leq
                 \pi$ / 84 \\
                 4.3.4 The Negative Real Axis and the Zeros of $F_n(\nu,
                 z)$ / 89 \\
                 4.4 Inequalities / 95 \\
                 4.4.1 $H(\nu, z)$ / 95 \\
                 4.4.2 $\Gamma(\nu, z)$ / 96 \\
                 4.5 Notes on the Computation of the Incomplete Gamma
                 Function / 97 \\
                 4.6 Exponential Integrals / 103 \\
                 4.6.1 Relation to Incomplete Gamma Function and Other
                 Properties / 103 \\
                 4.6.2 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials /
                 104 \\
                 4.6.3 Rational and Pad Approximations / 106 \\
                 4.7 Cosine and Sine Integrals / 115 \\
                 4.7.1 Relation to Exponential Integral and Other
                 Properties / 115 \\
                 4.7.2 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials /
                 116 \\
                 4.8 Error Functions / 119 \\
                 4.8.1 Relation to Incomplete Gamma Function and Other
                 Properties / 119 \\
                 4.8.2 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials and
                 Bessel Functions / 122 \\
                 4.8.3 Pad{\'e} Approximations / 124 \\
                 4.8.4 Trapezoidal Rule Approximations / 134 \\
                 4.8.5 Inequalities / 137 \\
                 4.9 Fresnel Integrals / 139 \\
                 4.9.1 Relation to Error Functions and Other Properties
                 / 139 \\
                 4.9.2 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials /
                 140 \\
                 4.10 Bibliographic and Numerical Data / 143 \\
                 4.10.1 References / 143 \\
                 4.10.2 Description of and References to Tables / 143
                 \\
                 4.10.3 Description of and References to Other
                 Approximations and Expansions / 149 \\
                 \\
                 V. The Generalized Hypergeometric Function $_pF_g$ and
                 the $G$-Function \\
                 \\
                 5.1 Introduction / 154 \\
                 5.2 The $_pF_q$ / 155 \\
                 5.2.1 Power Series / 155 \\
                 5.2.2 Derivatives and Contiguous Relations / 159 \\
                 5.2.3 Integral Representations and Integrals Involving
                 the $_pF_q$ / 160 \\
                 5.2.4 Evaluation for Special Values of the Variable and
                 Parameters / 163 \\
                 5.3 The $G$-Function / 170 \\
                 5.3.1 Definition and Relation to the $_pF_q$ / 170 \\
                 5.3.2 Elementary Properties / 176 \\
                 5.3.3 Analytic Continuation of $G_{p, p}^{m, n}(z)$ /
                 178 \\
                 5.4 The Confluence Principle / 179 \\
                 5.5 Multiplication Theorems / 184 \\
                 5.6 Integrals Involving $G$-Functions / 186 \\
                 5.7 Differential Equations / 190 \\
                 5.7.1 The $_pF_q$ / 190 \\
                 5.7.2 The $G$-Function / 192 \\
                 5.8 Series of $G$-Functions / 194 \\
                 5.8.1 Introduction / 194 \\
                 5.8.2 Notation / 194 \\
                 5.8.3 Expansion Theorems / 197 \\
                 5.9 Asymptotic Expansions / 199 \\
                 5.9.1 $G_{p, q}^{q, n}(z)$, $n = 0, 1$ / 199 \\
                 5.9.2 $G_{p, q}^{m, n}(z)$ / 201 \\
                 5.9.3 $_pF_q(z)$ / 206 \\
                 5.10 Expansions in Series of Generalized Jacobi,
                 Generalized Laguerre and Chebyshev Polynomials / 213
                 \\
                 5.10.1 Expansions for $G$-Functions / 213 \\
                 5.10.2 Expansions for $_pF_q$ / 220 \\
                 5.11 Expansions in Series of Bessel Functions / 223 \\
                 5.12 Polynomial and Rational Approximations / 224 \\
                 5.13 Recurrence Formulas for Polynomials and Functions
                 Occurring in Approximations to Generalized
                 Hypergeometric Functions / 234 \\
                 5.13.1 Introduction / 234 \\
                 5.13.2 Recursion Formulas for Extended Jacobi and
                 Laguerre Functions / 235 \\
                 5.13.3 Recursion Formulas for the Numerator and
                 Denominator Polynomials in the Rational Approximations
                 for the Generalized Hypergeometric Function / 244 \\
                 5.13.4 Recursion Formula for Coefficients in the
                 Expansion of the $G$-Function in Series of Extended
                 Jacobi Polynomials / 247 \\
                 5.14 Inequalities / 252 \\
                 \\
                 VI. The Gaussian Hypergeometric Function $_2F_1$ \\
                 \\
                 6.1 Introduction / 257 \\
                 6.2 Elementary Properties / 257 \\
                 6.2.1 Derivatives / 257 \\
                 6.2.2 Contiguous Relations / 258 \\
                 6.2.3 Integral Representations / 259 \\
                 6.3 Differential Equations / 260 \\
                 6.4 Kummer Solutions and Transformation Formulae / 262
                 \\
                 6.5 Analytic Continuation / 263 \\
                 6.6 The Complete Solution and Wronskians / 265 \\
                 6.7 Quadratic Transformations / 270 \\
                 6.8 The $_2F_1$ for Special Values of the Argument /
                 271 \\
                 6.9 Expansion in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials / 274
                 \\
                 6.10 Pad{\'e} Approximations for $_2F_1(1, \sigma;\rho
                 + 1;-1/z)$ / 274 \\
                 6.11 Inequalities / 278 \\
                 6.12 Bibliographic and Numerical Data / 279 \\
                 6.12.1 References / 279 \\
                 6.12.2 Description of and References to Tables / 279
                 \\
                 \\
                 VII. The Confluent Hypergeometric Function \\
                 \\
                 7.1 Introduction / 284 \\
                 7.2 Integral Representations / 284 \\
                 7.3 Elementary Relations / 285 \\
                 7.3.1 Derivatives / 285 \\
                 7.3.2 Contiguous Relations / 285 \\
                 7.3.3 Products of Confluent Functions / 286 \\
                 7.4 Differential Equations / 287 \\
                 7.5 The Complete Solution and Wronskians / 288 \\
                 7.6 Asymptotic Expansions / 291 \\
                 7.7 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials / 293
                 \\
                 7.8 Expansions in Series of Besse! Functions / 294 \\
                 7.9 Inequalities / 295 \\
                 7.10 Other Notations and Related Functions / 295 \\
                 7.11 Bibliographic and Numerical Data / 296 \\
                 7.11.1 References / 296 \\
                 7.11.2 Description of and References to Tables and
                 Other Approximations / 296 \\
                 \\
                 VIII. Identification of the $_pF_q$, and $G$-Functions
                 with the Special Functions \\
                 \\
                 8.1 Introduction / 298 \\
                 8.2 Named Special Functions Expressed as $_pF_q$'s /
                 298 \\
                 8.2.1 Elementary Functions / 298 \\
                 8.2.2 The Incomplete Gamma Function and Related
                 Functions / 298 \\
                 8.2.3 The Gaussian Hypergeometric Function / 298 \\
                 8.2.4 Legendre Functions / 299 \\
                 8.2.5 Orthogonal Polynomials / 299 \\
                 8.2.6 Complete Elliptic Integrals / 299 \\
                 8.2.7 Confluent Hypergeometric Functions, Whittaker
                 Functions and Bessel Functions / 300 \\
                 8.3 Named Functions Expressed in Terms of the
                 $G$-Function / 300 \\
                 8.4 The $G$-Function Expressed as a Named Function /
                 306 \\
                 \\
                 IX. Bessel Functions and Their Integrals \\
                 \\
                 9.1 Introduction / 311 \\
                 9.2 Definitions, Connecting Relations and Power Series
                 / 311 \\
                 9.3 Difference--Differential Formulas / 313 \\
                 9.4 Products of Bessel Functions / 314 \\
                 9.5 Asymptotic Expansions for Large Variable / 315 \\
                 9.6 Integrals of Bessel Functions / 315 \\
                 9.7 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials / 316
                 \\
                 9.8 Expansions in Series of Bessel Functions / 360 \\
                 9.9 Rational Approximations / 361 \\
                 9.9.1 Introduction / 361 \\
                 9.9.2 $I_\nu(z)$, $z$ Small / 361 \\
                 9.9.3 $K_\nu(z)$, $z$ Large / 366 \\
                 9.10 Computation of Bessel Functions by Use of
                 Recurrence Formulas / 380 \\
                 9.10.1 Introduction / 380 \\
                 9.10.2 Backward Recurrence Schemata for Generating
                 $I_\nu(z)$ / 380 \\
                 9.10.3 Closed Form Expressions / 382 \\
                 9.10.4 Expressions for $J_\nu(z)$ / 389 \\
                 9.10.5 Numerical Examples / 392 \\
                 9.11 Evaluation of Bessel Functions by Application of
                 Trapezoidal Type Integration Formulas / 395 \\
                 9.12 Inequalities / 399 \\
                 9.13 Bibliographic and Numerical Data / 403 \\
                 9.13.1 References / 403 \\
                 9.13.2 Description of and References to Tables / 404
                 \\
                 9.13.3 Description of and References to Other
                 Approximations and Expansions / 410 \\
                 \\
                 X. Lommel Functions, Struve Functions, and Associated
                 Bessel Functions \\
                 \\
                 10.1 Definitions, Connecting Relations and Power Series
                 / 413 \\
                 10.2 Asymptotic Expansions / 415 \\
                 10.3 Expansions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials and
                 Bessel Functions / 415 \\
                 10.4 Rational Approximations for $H_\nu(z) - Y_\nu(z)$
                 and the Errors in These Approximations / 422 \\
                 10.5 Bibliographic and Numerical Data / 426 \\
                 10.5.1 References / 426 \\
                 10.5.2 Description of and References to Tables / 426
                 \\
                 \\
                 XI. Orthogonal Polynomials \\
                 \\
                 11.1 Introduction / 428 \\
                 11.2 Orthogonal Properties / 428 \\
                 11.3 Jacobi Polynomials / 436 \\
                 11.3.1 Expansion Formulae / 436 \\
                 11.3.2 Difference--Differential Formulae / 439 \\
                 11.3.3 Integrals / 439 \\
                 11.3.4 Expansion of $x^\rho$ in Series of Jacobi
                 Polynomials / 440 \\
                 11.3.5 Convergence Theorems for the Expansion of
                 Arbitrary Functions in Series of Jacobi Polynomials /
                 442 \\
                 11.3.6 Evaluation and Estimation of the Coefficients in
                 the Expansion of a Given Function $f(x)$ in Series of
                 Jacobi Polynomials / 443 \\
                 11.4 The Chebyshev Polynomials $T_n(x)$ and $U_n(x)$ /
                 453 \\
                 11.5 The Chebyshev Polynomials $T_n^*(x)$ and
                 $U_n^*(x)$ / 459 \\
                 11.6 Coefficients for Expansion of Integrals of
                 Functions in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials of the
                 First Kind / 464 \\
                 11.6.1 Introduction / 464 \\
                 11.6.2 Series of Shifted Chebyshev Polynomials / 464
                 \\
                 11.6.3 Series of Chebyshev Polynomials of Even Order /
                 468 \\
                 11.6.4 Series of Chebyshev Polynomials of Odd Order /
                 468 \\
                 11.7 Orthogonality Properties of Chebyshev Polynomials
                 with Respect to Summation / 469 \\
                 11.8 A Nesting Procedure for the Computation of
                 Expansions in Series of Functions Where the Functions
                 Satisfy a Linear Finite Difference Equation / 475 \\
                 \\
                 XII. Computation by Use of Recurrence Formulas \\
                 \\
                 12.1 Introduction / 483 \\
                 12.2 Homogeneous Difference Equations / 483 \\
                 12.3 Inhomogeneous Difference Equations / 487 \\
                 \\
                 XIII. Some Aspects of Rational and Polynomial
                 Approximations \\
                 \\
                 13.1 Introduction / 490 \\
                 13.2 Approximations in Series of Chebyshev Polynomials
                 of the First Kind / 490 \\
                 13.3 The Pad{\'e} Table / 493 \\
                 13.4 Approximation of Functions Defined by a
                 Differential Equation --- The $\tau$-Method / 495 \\
                 13.5 Approximations of Functions Defined by a Series /
                 499 \\
                 13.6 Solution of Differential Equations in Series of
                 Chebyshev Polynomials of the First Kind / 500 \\
                 \\
                 XIV. Miscellaneous Topics \\
                 \\
                 14.1 Introduction / 505 \\
                 14.2 Bernoulli Polynomials and Numbers / 505 \\
                 14.3 $D$ and $\delta$ Operators / 507 \\
                 14.4 Computation and Check of the Tables / 509 \\
                 14.5 Mathematical Constants / 512 \\
                 14.6 Late Bibliography / 516 \\
                 \\
                 Bibliography / 517 \\
                 \\
                 Notation Index / 545 \\
                 \\
                 Subject Index / 551",
}


